Yamaha CVP-201 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CVP-201

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Clavinova CVP-201

Owner’s Manual

IMPORTANT

Check Your Power Supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches

the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom

panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be

provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard

unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage

selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.

To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to

rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage

appears next to the pointer on the panel.

92-469- ➀ (bottom)

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap-

proximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-

essary, contact a qualified service representative to per-

form the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the

manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and con-

sult your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph-

ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi-

cated on this page and those indicated in the safety in-

struction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the equi-

lateral triangle is intended to alert the

user to the presence of important oper-

ating and maintenance (servicing) in-

structions in the literature accompany-

ing the product.

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral triangle,

is intended to alert the user to the pres-

ence of uninsulated “dangerous volt-

age” within the product’s enclosure that

may be of sufficient magnitude to con-

stitute a risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic prod-

ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety

testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when

it is properly installed and used in its normal and custom-

ary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated.

DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product per-

formance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the specifications

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

Model _____________________________________

Serial No. __________________________________

Purchase Date ______________________________

CVP-201

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the

key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately

and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this

might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom-

fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

■ Using the bench (If included)

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten

them periodically using the included tool.

■ Saving data

• Internal backed-up data (see page 152) is retained for about 1 week after the

power is turned off. If the period is exceeded, the data will be lost. Be sure to

turn the power switch on for a few minutes at least once a week. The data

could be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data

to a floppy disk (see page 139).

• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that

you save your important data onto two floppy disks.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use

or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,

short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy

objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,

or roll anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts.

If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and

have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill

into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always

hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be

used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con-

nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over-

heating in the outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly pro-

cess. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might re-

sult in damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme

cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the

day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter-

nal components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or

radio may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acciden-

tally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch

from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly

result in the instrument overheating.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off

the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening

level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not

use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wip-

ing cloths.

• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a

finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.

(1)B-7

CVP-201

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully

so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We

also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Accessories

● Music Software Collection Disk (and Music Book)

This disk features sample songs that you can play back on your Clavinova.

● Floppy Disk

Use this blank disk to record your performances.

● Owner’s Manual

This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.

● Reference Booklet

This manual contains lists of voices, styles, and parameters, etc., as well as specifications

and assembly instructions for your Clavinova.

● Bench

A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s

manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other

than the purchaser’s personal use is prohibited.

● Trademarks:

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines

Corporation.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

The Panel Logos

The logos printed on the Clavinova panel indicate standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.

Disk Orchestra Collection

The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback com-

patibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI

devices.

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file

format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-

quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of

chord types. The Clavinova uses the SFF internally, reads

optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the

Custom Style feature.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which

guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play

accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer

from any manufacturer.

XG Format

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly ex-

pands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with

greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect

capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the

Clavinova’s XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible

song files.

XF Format

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)

standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability

for the future. The Clavinova is capable of displaying lyrics when

an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most com-

mon format used for MIDI sequence files. The Clavinova is com-

patible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using

SMF Format 0.)

CVP-201

Features of the Clavinova

● Easy-to-use LCD Display

The LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand

control of the Clavinova’s operations (page 16).

● Wealth of Rich, Realistic Voices

The CVP-201 has a wide variety of authentic and dynamic voices, including 195 original voices,

480 XG voices, and 12 drum/SFX kits. These include exceptionally natural-sounding piano, strings

and brass voices, and the particularly expressive “SweetTrumpet” voice. Moreover, you can play real-

istic drum and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard (page 31).

● Playback of Song Disks

The Clavinova can play back various commercially available song disks. With the appropriate disk

software, you can play the piano part of the song yourself along with a full orchestra or backing band

(page 93). If the software contains lyrics, you can display them on the Clavinova’s LCD.

● Special Guide Functions for Easy Learning

With the appropriate disk software, the LCD display and guide lamps help you learn songs by

showing you when and where to play the proper notes. The three-step system helps you to master each

song quickly and easily (page 105).

● Fun, Dynamic Automatic Accompaniment

The Auto Accompaniment of the Clavinova gives you full, exciting instrumental backing in your

favorite music styles, according to the chords you play (page 57). There’s even a wide selection of

“Pianist” styles that allow you to enjoy solo piano accompaniment (page 58). Choose from 160 accom-

paniment styles, or create your own custom styles (page 73).

● Easy Access to a Variety of Musical Enjoyment

The Clavinova offers several ways to change panel settings without a lot of fuss. You can use the

One Touch Setting feature to select from four sets of voice, effect, and other settings appropriate to

each accompaniment style (page 72). Or access the Music Database to choose from 463 sets of style

and voice settings, selectable by title or style (page 67). You can even save your current setup for in-

stant recall later using the handy Registration function (page 89).

● Easy-to-use Recording Features

You can record songs using a variety of methods, depending on your keyboard expertise and prefer-

ence. Choose from the Quick Recording, Track Recording, and Chord Sequence Recording functions

(page 110).

● Convenient TO HOST Terminals for Direct Connection to Computers

The Clavinova can be used as a high-quality sound source to play back music software for comput-

ers. It can also be used as a master keyboard, to enter performance data and create music with a com-

puter (page 160).

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with

your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for

any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Home Page:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

CVP-201

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1:

Getting Ready

About This Manual 8

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks 9

Setting Up the Clavinova 10

Music Stand ..................................................................................... 10

Key Cover ........................................................................................ 10

Turning the Power On and Off ......................................................... 11

Headphones..................................................................................... 11

Other Connections ........................................................................... 11

Panel Controls and Terminals 12

Playing the Demo Songs 14

CHAPTER 2:

Basic Operation

Using the LCD Display Controls 16

Selecting a Function ........................................................................ 16

Changing a Setting .......................................................................... 17

Changing a Setting in a Menu Display ............................................. 18

Displaying a Different Page ............................................................. 19

Resetting a Function’s Value ........................................................... 19

Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles .................................. 20

Exiting to the Main Display............................................................... 21

Using the Direct Access Function .................................................... 21

Adjusting the Volume 23

Adjusting the Overall Volume........................................................... 23

Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume............................... 23

Setting the Keyboard Volume .......................................................... 23

Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels ............................... 24

Using the Metronome 25

Using the Metronome....................................................................... 25

Changing the Metronome Settings .................................................. 26

Using the Help Mode 27

CHAPTER 3:

Voices

Selecting Voices 29

Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display ....................... 29

Selecting Voices from the Main Display........................................... 30

Keyboard Percussion ....................................................................... 31

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice ....................... 31

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode 33

Selecting the Second Voice ............................................................. 33

Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode........................................... 33

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice................... 34

Exiting the Dual Mode...................................................................... 35

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard

— Split Mode 36

Selecting the Left Voice ................................................................... 36

Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode ........................................... 36

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice ......................... 37

Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously ........................ 39

Exiting the Split Mode ...................................................................... 39

Using the Pedals 40

Damper Pedal (Right) ...................................................................... 40

Sostenuto Pedal (Center) ................................................................ 40

Soft Pedal (Left) ............................................................................... 40

CHAPTER 4:

Reverb and Other Effects

Reverb 41

Turning the Reverb On or Off .......................................................... 41

Changing the Reverb Settings ......................................................... 41

Chorus 44

Changing the Chorus Settings ......................................................... 44

Voice Effects 46

Turning the Effects On ..................................................................... 46

Changing the Effect Settings ........................................................... 46

CHAPTER 5:

Accompaniment Styles

(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)

Selecting Accompaniment Styles 49

Selecting a Style .............................................................................. 49

Playing the Accompaniment Styles 51

Varying the Style .............................................................................. 51

Starting the Accompaniment Style ................................................... 52

Stopping the Accompaniment Style ................................................. 55

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment 57

Using the Auto Accompaniment....................................................... 57

Starting the Auto Accompaniment ................................................... 58

Stopping the Auto Accompaniment.................................................. 58

Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings .................................. 59

Adjusting Individual Part Levels ....................................................... 65

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions 67

Music Database ............................................................................... 67

Harmony .......................................................................................... 69

One Touch Setting ........................................................................... 72

Creating Your Own Styles 73

Recording a Custom Style ............................................................... 73

Other Custom Style Functions ......................................................... 80

Playing Back Your Custom Styles ................................................... 84

Messages in Custom Style Mode .................................................... 84

Using Style Files 86

About the Yamaha Style File Format ............................................... 86

Loading Styles from a Disk .............................................................. 86

Playing Loaded Style Files............................................................... 88

CVP-201

CHAPTER 6:

Registrations

Using Registrations(Registering and Recalling Panel Setups) 89

Storing a Panel Setup ...................................................................... 89

Recalling the Registered Panel Settings.......................................... 90

Protecting Panel Settings................................................................. 91

CHAPTER 7:

Song Control

Song Playback 93

Song Playback ................................................................................. 93

Part Cancel ...................................................................................... 97

Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment......

Overall Song Playback Volume Control ........................................... 99

Adjustment of Track Settings ......................................................... 100

Changing Settings in the MIXER Display....................................... 100

Repeat Functions ........................................................................... 101

Other Playback Controls ................................................................ 103

Playing Other Types of Music Data ............................................... 104

Guide Control 105

Guide Methods and Piano Roll ...................................................... 105

Using the Guide Function .............................................................. 106

Other Guide-related Functions....................................................... 108

Song Recording 110

Recording Setup: Disk Format ....................................................... 111

Quick Recording ............................................................................ 112

Track Recording (Multi-track Recording) ....................................... 115

Adding New Tracks ........................................................................ 118

Punch-in/out Recording ................................................................. 118

Chord Sequence 121

Other Chord Sequence Functions ................................................. 124

Other Record Edit Functions 126

Setup Memory................................................................................ 126

Song Name .................................................................................... 127

Track Edit ....................................................................................... 128

Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data)............................................. 130

Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display ................................ 131

Recording Without a Disk 133

About the CVP MEMORY Song..................................................... 133

CHAPTER 8:

The Utility Functions

Keyboard 136

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1 ............................. 136

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2 ............................. 137

Pedal 138

FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3 ........................................ 138

Disk 139

FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4......................................... 139

FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5......................................... 142

FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6......................................... 144

FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7......................................... 145

FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8......................................... 146

MIDI 147

FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9 ......................................... 147

FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10 ....................................... 148

FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11 ....................................... 149

FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12 ....................................... 150

Backup 152

FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13 ................................ 152

FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14 ................................ 153

Utility 154

FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15 ....................... 154

FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16 ....................... 155

CHAPTER 9:

Connections

Audio Connections 158

Headphones................................................................................... 158

Audio Input and Output .................................................................. 158

Data Connections 160

Connecting MIDI Equipment .......................................................... 160

Connecting to a Host Computer..................................................... 160

APPENDICES

Effect Type Lists 162

Messages 165

Troubleshooting 170

MIDI and Data Compatibility 172

Index 173

CVP-201

This section explains the notation conventions that are used

throughout this manual.

■ Square brackets [ ] ............................................................................................

Square brackets enclose the names of panel buttons,

sliders, and connectors as they appear on your

Clavinova. For example, the DEMO button is expressed

as [DEMO] in this manual.

■ Bold characters....................................................................................................

Bold type represents items shown in the LCD display, as well as the cor-

responding LCD buttons (i.e., the buttons directly below, or to the left or

right of, these items). For example, the phrase “Select RIGHT1 VOICE”

means that you should press the button directly below the “RIGHT1

VOICE” label at the bottom of the display.

■ Arrows in Operation Explanations..................................................

Different types of arrows are used to distinguish the steps of an operation

from its results.

Operation steps

♥ ➾ ♣ …indicates that you should do ♥, then do ♣.

Operation results

♥ ➔ ♠ …indicates that doing ♥ results in ♠.

CHAPTER 1: Getting Ready

About This Manual

DEMO

HELP

CVP-201

■ Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write

Head......................................................................................

● Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will even-

tually cause read and write errors.

● To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-

available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the

head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer

about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.

● Never open or close the key cover while a disk is

extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position).

The key cover may contact the disk,– possibily dam-

aging the disk or even the disk drive.

● Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk

drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk

drive or floppy disks.

■ About the Floppy Disks...................................

To handle floppy disks with care:

● Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or

apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep

floppy disks in their protective cases when they are

not in use.

● Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely

high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust

or liquids.

● Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the ex-

posed surface of the floppy disk inside.

● Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as

those produced by televisions, speakers, motors,

etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely

erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

● Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

● Do not attach anything other than the provided labels

to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are at-

tached in the proper location.

To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):

To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).

Data backup

For maximum data security Yamaha

recommends that you keep two copies of

important data on separate floppy disks.

This gives you a backup if one disk is lost

or damaged. To make a backup disk use

the Disk Copy function on page 142.

■ Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks .............

To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards

the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly

pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the

eject button pops out.

Handling the Floppy Disk

Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks

● Precautions

Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

● Compatible Disk Type

3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.

To eject a floppy disk:

Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the

FDD is stopped (check if the [DISK IN USE] lamp is off).

Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk

will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected,

carefully remove it by hand.

DISK IN USE lamp

Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can

damage the disk and possibly the disk drive.

If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not

pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject prop-

erly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed

position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only

a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull

out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this

situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the

floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing

the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the

slot and then repeat the eject procedure.

Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive

for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that

can cause data read and write errors.

CVP-201

■ To raise the music stand:...........................................................................

Z Pull the stand up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

X Flip down the two metal supports at the left and the right on the rear

of the music stand.

C Lower the music stand so that it rests on the metal supports.

■ To lower the music stand:.........................................................................

Z Pull the music stand toward yourself as far as it will go.

X Raise the two metal supports until they are flat against the rear sur-

face of the stand.

C Gently lower the music stand backward until it is all the way down.

CAUTION

• Do not try to use the music stand in a half-raised position. Also, when lowering the

stand, let the stand all the way down before releasing it.

■ To open the key cover:..................................................................................

Z Lift the cover slightly (not too much).

X Slide the cover open.

■ To close the key cover:.................................................................................

Z Slide the cover toward you.

X Gently lower the cover over the keys.

CAUTION

• Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully

opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the

cover and main unit.

• Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover

may fall inside the instrument when the cover is opened, and may be impossible to

remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to

the instrument.

Be careful to avoid catching your

fingers when opening or closing

the cover.

Music Stand

Key Cover

Setting Up the Clavinova

CVP-201

Z Connect the power cord.

Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the

bottom panel of the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet.

In some areas, a plug adapter may be provided to match the pin con-

figuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

X Press the [POWER] switch.

The main display appears in the LCD display. (Initially, the voice

Grand Piano and the accompaniment style 8 Beat 1 are selected.)

The power lamp below the lower left end of the keyboard also lights.

C Adjust the LCD.

If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [CON-

TRAST] knob at the left of the LCD.

V Adjust the volume.

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume to an ap-

propriate level.

● When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch

again. Both the LCD display and the power lamp below the left end

of the keyboard will turn off.

Connect a set of stereo headphones (optional) to the [PHONES] jack.

When headphones are connected, the internal speaker system is auto-

matically shut off. Since the Clavinova has two PHONES jacks, two sets

of headphones can be used simultaneously, allowing two people to enjoy

listening to the performance.

Standard stereo

phone jacks

Your Clavinova is equipped with a variety of jacks and terminals that

let you connect it to other audio and MIDI equipment. These connectors

are located at the left end of the unit on the rear panel.

You can connect other instruments that you want to play through the

Clavinova’s speakers to the AUX IN jacks, or output the Clavinova’s

sound to external speakers using the AUX OUT jacks. Use the MIDI

terminals if you want the Clavinova to control — or be controlled by —

another MIDI instrument. There’s even a TO HOST terminal that lets

you connect the Clavinova directly to a personal computer.

Be sure to turn the power off when connecting or disconnecting other

equipment. See the instructions in Chapter 9 of this manual for details.

Turning the Power On and Off

Headphones

Other Connections

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

PHONES

THRU

OUT

MIDI

HOST SELECT

MIDI

Mac

TO HOSTPEDAL

AUX I N

AUX O UT

L/L

RL/L

Setting Up the Clavinova

POWER

CONTRAST

CVP-201

C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3

B0A0G0F0E0D0C0B-1A-1

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAG E

MIXER

FUNCTION

AUTO ACCOMPA NIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ANCEL

r t

0 ! @ # $ % ^ ( ) q

u o

Panel Controls and Terminals

Volume Section

1 [MASTER VOLUME] ....................................page 23

2 [ACMP/SONG VOLUME ] ............................page 23

Special Mode Control Section

3 [DEMO] .........................................................page 14

4 [HELP] ..........................................................page 27

Accompaniment Style Section

5 STYLE buttons .............................................page 49

6 [DISK/CUSTOM]...........................................page 73

7 [MUSIC DATABASE].....................................page 67

8 [HARMONY] .................................................page 69

Auto Accompaniment Section

9 [ACMP ON] ...................................................page 57

0 [INTRO].........................................................page 54

! [MAIN A] .......................................................page 51

@ [MAIN B] .......................................................page 51

# [MAIN C] .......................................................page 51

$ [MAIN D] .......................................................page 51

% [ENDING]......................................................page 55

^ [FADE IN/OUT] .....................................pages 55, 56

Metronome Section

& [METRONOME]............................................page 25

* TEMPO [–], [+] .............................................page 25

Start/Stop Section

( [TAP] .............................................................page 53

) [SYNCHRO]..................................................page 53

q [START/STOP]......................................pages 52, 55

Display Control Section

w [CONTRAST]................................................page 11

e [BEAT] lamps................................................page 52

r [FUNCTION] ...............................................page 136

t[MIXER].........................................................page 24

y LCD display ..................................................page 16

u PAGE [<], [>]...............................................page 19

i [DIRECT ACCESS] ......................................page 21

o LCD buttons..................................................page 18

p [EXIT]............................................................page 21

Q Data dial .......................................................page 17

W [–], [+]............................................................page 17

Song Control Section

E [SONG] .........................................................page 94

R [PLAY/STOP] ................................................page 95

T [REC] ..........................................................page 113

Y [PAUSE] ......................................................page 103

U [REW] .........................................................page 103

I [FF] .............................................................page 103

THRU

OUT

MIDI

HOST SELECT

MIDI

Mac

TO HOSTPEDAL

AUX IN

AUX OUT

L/L

RL/L

J K

: z

PHONES

CVP-201

Panel Controls and Terminals

Guide Control Section

O [EASY PLAY] ..............................................page 105

P [NEXT NOTE] .............................................page 105

a [SOUND REPEAT] .....................................page 106

Voice Section

s VOICE buttons..............................................page 29

d [DUAL] ..........................................................page 33

f [SPLIT]..........................................................page 36

g [REVERB] .....................................................page 41

h [EFFECT]......................................................page 46

Registration/One Touch Setting Section

j [1] through [4] .......................................pages 72, 90

k [BANK –].......................................................page 89

l [BANK +].......................................................page 89

; [REGISTRATION].........................................page 90

A [ONE TOUCH SETTING] .............................page 72

S [DISK IN USE] lamp .......................................page 9

D Floppy disk drive (3.5”) ..................................page 9

F [POWER] ......................................................page 11

G Keyboard guide lamps................................page 109

Connectors

H [PHONES]...................................................page 158

J AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] ....................................page 158

K AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] ................................page 159

L [PEDAL] .............. page 34 in the Reference Booklet

: MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] ...........................page 160

z [HOST SELECT] ........................................page 160

x [TO HOST]..................................................page 160

Pedals

c Soft pedal .....................................................page 40

v Sostenuto pedal ...........................................page 40

b Damper pedal...............................................page 40

F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6

D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

EXIT

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONT ROL

EA SY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

POWER

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

DISK IN USE

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

CVP-201

p W

O P a j k l ;

f h

CVP-201

The Clavinova features a total of 50 demo songs: 4 feature songs,

24 special pieces showcasing the voices, and 22 pieces showcasing

the styles. Listen to them all and hear what the Clavinova can do.

X Select the desired play mode.............................................................

Select the desired play mode by pressing the rightmost LCD button. The

following three modes are available:

ALL All the songs play back continuously in order, starting from the

selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.

RANDOM All the songs play back randomly, starting from the selected

song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.

SINGLE Only the selected song plays back. When the song is finished,

playback stops automatically.

Z Call up the Demo Play mode. ..............................................................

Press [DEMO]. The lamps of the STYLE button and VOICE button

flash continuously, and the DEMO display appears.

C Select the song and start playback..............................................

When you select a song, the demo automatically starts playing in the

selected play mode. There are three ways to select a demo song, as de-

scribed below:

• You can also start the demo playback,

beginning with the first feature song, by

pressing [START/STOP] or [PLAY/

STOP].

• For a complete list of the Clavinova’s

demo songs, refer to page 7 of the

Reference Booklet.

(A) To listen to one of the featured demo songs, press one of

the buttons under the numbers 1 through 4 in the display.

➔ The current song number is highlighted during playback.

Playing the Demo Songs

DEMO

HELP

CVP-201

(B) To listen to a voice demo, press the VOICE button corre-

sponding to the desired voice category.

➔ Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category.

The lamp of the corresponding VOICE button flashes.

There are two demo songs for each voice

category. To skip to the second song,

press the flashing button a second time.

responding to the desired style category.

➔ Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category.

The lamp of the corresponding STYLE button flashes.

There are two demo songs for each style

category. To skip to the second song,

press the flashing button a second time.

V Adjust the volume...........................................................................................

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume.

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control

cannot be used.

B Stop the demo playback...........................................................................

To change songs during playback:

Press the LCD button, VOICE button, or

STYLE button of another song; the song

then changes. When ALL or RANDOM is

selected as the play mode, the Clavinova

will play other songs when the selected

song is finished.

To stop playback, press either [START/STOP] or [PLAY/STOP], or

the LCD button corresponding to the song that’s currently playing.

N Exit the Demo mode. ....................................................................................

To exit the Demo mode, press [DEMO] again (or press [EXIT]).

● Playing Along with the Demo Songs

You can play the keyboard while a demo song is playing back. You

can also change the tempo (page 25) and use the [REW], [FF] and

[PAUSE] buttons. When you play 3. Lyric Demo, the Clavinova will

display the lyrics so you can sing (as well as play) along. Also, you can

use the Guide function (page 105) while the Clavinova is playing 4.

GUIDE Demo. You cannot change the voice selection while the demo is

playing, however.

Demo song data is not output through

the [MIDI OUT] terminal; however, your

keyboard performance data is output.

Playing the Demo Songs

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

CVP-201

You will refer to the LCD display frequently as you operate your

Clavinova. This section consists of a short tutorial that will help

you learn how to read the LCD display and use the related

controls.

Many of the Clavinova’s functions are displayed at the bottom of the

LCD. The main display shown below contains two functions: KBD VOL

and RIGHT1 VOICE. These items are displayed in rounded rectangles,

which means they represent settings that can be changed.

Selecting a Function

Main display

Remember, the

main display

is the dis-

play that appears first when you turn the

power on.

Before you can change a function’s setting, however, you have to select it

first. In the main display, the RIGHT1 VOICE function is highlighted, indi-

cating that this function is currently selected.

Highlighted items

Selected items are

highlighted

(i.e., white

letters on a dark background).

To select a function, press and quickly release the LCD button directly

below that function. For example, you can select KBD VOL by pressing the

leftmost LCD button.

LCD buttons

The five LCD buttons under the LCD

display represent different functions,

depending on the contents of the display.

CHAPTER 2: Basic Operation

Using the LCD Display Controls

Press to select.

CVP-201

There are several ways to change a function’s value. Here are two of the

main ways:

■ Using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.................................

Once you have selected a function, you can change its setting with the

data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. Since you have just selected KBD

VOL, try turning the dial or pressing the [–] button until it reads 0.

Changing a Setting

You can press the [–] and [+] buttons

repeatedly to change the value a little, or

hold them down to change it quickly.

The KBD VOL function sets the keyboard volume. When you set it to

0, you will find that the keyboard won’t produce any sound, no matter

how high you set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider!

Refer to page 23 for details on the KBD

VOL function.

■ Using the LCD buttons..................................................................................

You can also increase a setting by simply pressing and holding the

corresponding LCD button. For now, since you’ll want to hear your key-

board later on, press and hold the leftmost LCD button until the value for

KBD VOL is back up to 127.

This is why you should release the LCD

button quickly when you select a func-

tion: you could end up raising its value

when you want to lower it!

Once you’ve got the keyboard volume back where it belongs, you can

learn about a couple of other ways to change settings.

Hold down to increase.

Using the LCD Display Controls

CVP-201

You can use either of the methods described previously to change the current voice

selection. Just press RIGHT1 VOICE and hold the button down, or use the data dial or

the [+] button to scan through the options. Try listening to a few of the voices while

you’re at it…

Changing a Setting in a Menu Display

Voice

A voice is one of the sounds

the Clavinova uses to make

music.

The problem with this method is that it can be hard to find the voice you’re looking

for — after all, the Clavinova has more than 600 voices! So you’ll probably want to use

a menu display to see what your choices are. Try pressing the [PIANO] button now.

When you press one of the VOICE buttons, the LCD displays a new set of

functions listing the voices of that type. You should now be looking at a menu of

piano voices.

■ Using the LCD buttons.................................................................................................

Each piano voice in this display is listed as a separate function in a rounded rectan-

gle. This means that you can use the LCD buttons to select voices, just like you did to

select the KBD VOL and RIGHT1 VOICE functions at the beginning of this tutorial.

Menu displays

You will use menu displays for

only two purposes: to select a

voice, as shown here, or to

select an accompaniment style

(page 49).

Keep in mind that you can use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select

functions only when viewing a menu display. In other displays, these controls

will change the value of the currently selected function instead.

Try selecting different piano voices in this display before you move on to the

next step.

Using the LCD Display Controls

Refer to page 29 for more

details about selecting voices.

Use the data dial or

[–] and [+] buttons to

select a voice.

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

SYNTHE-

SIZER

■ Using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons................................................

There is another way to select voices in this display. You can use the data dial

or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the selection. Press [–] or turn the data dial

counterclockwise to select a voice to the left; press [+] or turn the dial clockwise

to select a voice to the right.

Press an LCD button to select the corresponding voice.

CVP-201

Using the LCD Display Controls

As you were trying out the piano voices in the preceding step, you

may have been surprised to see all the voice names suddenly replaced by

an entirely different set of voices. Specifically, this occurs when you se-

lect the rightmost voice in the display (Midi Grand), then turn the data

dial clockwise or press the [+] button.

Displaying a Different Page

Display pages

Some displays are divided into two or

more pages, indicated by a series of

overlapping boxes in the upper right

corner of the display. The number in the

topmost box is the number of the current

display page.

This happens because the CVP-201 has more piano voices than it can

fit in the display. When one of the Clavinova’s features includes more

functions than will fit in the display, the functions are divided among two

or more display pages. The VOICE SELECT Piano display consists of

two display pages, as shown below:

When a display is divided into pages, you can use PAGE buttons to

change pages. Try it: press the [<] button to see page 1, or the [>] but-

ton to see page 2. Once you have displayed the desired page, you can use

the LCD buttons select a voice in that page as described in the preceding

step.

Refer to page 138 for details about the

functions on the FUNCTION [PEDAL]

display page.

PAG E

Use the PAGE buttons to switch between pages.

After you have changed a function’s value, you may find you want to

restore its basic setting. To demonstrate this, we’ll have to look at another of

the Clavinova’s displays. Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Resetting a Function’s Value

Basic settings

• The functions of the Clavinova are set

to certain standard values or standard

conditions when the instrument is

shipped. These settings and conditions

are called the basic settings.

• A function’s basic settings are gener-

ally noted in the sidebar together with

the possible settings for that function.

• You can also use the Recall function

(page 153) to restore basic settings at

any time.

This button calls up one of the Clavinova’s FUNCTION displays. You

can use this display to tune and transpose the keyboard.

Refer to page 136 for details on the

TUNE and TRANSPOSE functions.

The TUNE function in this display corresponds to two LCD buttons

labeled ▼ and ▲. You can use these buttons to tune the keyboard up or

down. Press and hold the ▼ button (or use the data dial or the [–] button)

to tune the keyboard down as far as it will go.

MIXER

FUNCTION

CVP-201

If you look at the upper right corner of the LCD, you’ll notice that the

FUNCTION display consists of several display pages. Press the PAGE [>]

key once to open the next page, which is titled FUNCTION [KEYBOARD

2]. We’ll use the functions on this page to discuss the next operation.

In addition to the FIXED VELOCITY function, which is selected in this

display, the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] page has two functions in normal

rectangles: KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING. Such functions cannot be

selected; instead, pressing the corresponding LCD button changes the setting

directly without selecting the function.

Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles

Using the LCD Display Controls

The FIXED VELOCITY function is de-

scribed on page 137.

If you play a few notes, you’ll notice that your Clavinova is flat by quite

a bit. Now, let’s assume that you want to reset the keyboard to the standard

440.0 Hz. You could use the ▲ button (or the data dial, or the [

] button) to

return the value to its basic setting — but there’s an easier way:

When a function has a basic setting, you can reset it to that value by

pressing both the ▲ and ▼ buttons (or both the [–] and [+] buttons) simul-

taneously. Try doing this now.

There are some functions whose settings

cannot be returned to the basic value by

pressing the

▲

and

▼

buttons (or [–] and

[+] buttons) simultaneously.

When you’ve got the keyboard back in tune, you’re ready to go on to the

next operation.

CVP-201

By pressing the LCD button under KEY TOUCH, for example, you can

set the Clavinova’s response to how hard you play. The value displayed in

the rectangle switches from NORMAL to SOFT, then FIXED, then HARD

— but the FIXED VELOCITY function remains selected.

For more details on the KEY TOUCH

function, refer to page 137.

The VOICE SETTING function determines whether reverb, chorus,

effect, and other settings are automatically selected when a voice is se-

lected. It works a little differently: when you press the LCD button, the

highlighted setting switches between AUTO and MANUAL. Still,

FIXED VELOCITY remains selected.

To exit the current display, press the [EXIT] button.

Exiting to the Main Display

You can usually use [EXIT] to get back to

the main display. In some cases, how-

ever, this button will return you to a previ-

ous setting display instead. When this

happens, pressing [EXIT] again will get

you back to the main display.

The main display should show the name of the last piano voice that you

selected in the VOICE SELECT Piano display.

Using the LCD Display Controls

For more details on the VOICE SETTING

function, refer to page 137.

There are other sorts of functions that are displayed in non-rounded

rectangles, like the ones you used to select a demo song in Demo mode

(see page 14). The important thing to remember about these functions is

that you don’t select them, you execute them.

Now we’re ready to return to the main display. First, however, set the

KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING functions back to NORMAL and

AUTO, respectively.

EXIT

The last function we need to discuss is Direct Access. The [DIRECT AC-

CESS] button lets you jump directly to pages with particularly useful settings.

When you press [DIRECT ACCESS], the “Press a button to display

corresponding settings” message will appear in the LCD display.

Using the Direct Access Function

DIRECT ACCESS

CVP-201

This message will remain onscreen for about three seconds. Press the

button corresponding to the settings you want to display before the mes-

sage disappears.

Here is a list of pages you can access with Direct Access:

You can also press an appropriate button

while holding down the [DIRECT AC-

CESS] button.

● A Word about Messages

For ease of operation, the Clavinova displays various messages (like the message displayed by the Direct

Access function as described above) that either prompt you to the next operation, ask for confirmation, or in-

form you that the last operation is not effective, valid, or appropriate. When such messages appear, follow the

instructions as shown. For details about each message, please refer to the “Messages” section on page 165.

[DIRECT ACCESS] plus: Displays: See page:

[HARMONY] HARMONY 69

[ACMP ON]

ACCOMPANIMENT MODE

[METRONOME] METRONOME 26

KEYBOARD [RIGHT1]

(1)

Any VOICE button KEYBOARD [RIGHT2]

(2)

KEYBOARD [LEFT]

(3)

[DUAL] KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] 34

[SPLIT] KEYBOARD [LEFT] 37

[REVERB]

(4)

REVERB 41

REVERB DEPTH 43

[EFFECT]

(4)

EFFECT 46

EFFECT DEPTH 48

[REGISTRATION]

REGISTRATION [FREEZE]

● Saving Your Changes

Now that you’ve started learning how to change the Clavinova’s settings, you may be wondering whether it

will remember the changes you’ve made even after you’ve turned the power off. The answer is yes — but you

need to tell it which settings you want it to remember.

By default, the Clavinova will not remember most of your setting changes. You have two ways to tell it which

settings you want to remember:

• You can register your settings with the Registration function (page 89). Once you have registered your

settings, you can restore them at any time by pressing a couple of buttons.

• You can instruct the Clavinova to remember certain settings when the power is off, and recall these set-

tings when you turn the power back on. To do this, you need to change the settings of the Backup function

(page 152).

Using the LCD Display Controls

(1)

When RIGHT1 VOICE is selected in

the main display.

(2)

When RIGHT2 VOICE is selected in

the main display.

(3)

When LEFT VOICE is selected in the

main display.

(4)

Selects whichever page was most

recently displayed.

CVP-201

The Clavinova has two sliders that let you adjust the overall volume

and the accompaniment or song playback volume. There are also

settings that you can use to adjust the keyboard volume and the

volume of each part of the automatic accompaniment or song.

Adjusting the Overall Volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME]

slider to set the overall volume of

the Clavinova.

• The [MASTER VOLUME] slider also

determines the output level of the

signal at the [PHONES] jack.

• Signals input to the AUX IN jacks are

also affected by the [MASTER VOL-

UME] setting; however, signals output

via the AUX OUT jacks are not.

Use the [ACMP/SONG VOL-

UME] slider to set the playback

volume of the automatic accompa-

niment and songs.

Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume

This control has no effect on the volume

of your keyboard performance.

Select KBD VOL in the main

display, then use the data dial or

the [–] and [+] buttons to change

the keyboard volume.

Setting the Keyboard Volume

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE R EW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Adjusting the Volume

CVP-201

Call up the MIXER display by pressing [MIXER]. In the Mixer display,

the volume of Automatic Accompaniment and individual parts of a song can

be adjusted. Press [MIXER] again (or [EXIT]) to return to the previous

display.

There are two types of mixer display, as shown below.

● Automatic Accompaniment Mixer

This MIXER display appears when you’re not using the Song mode.

See “Adjusting Individual Part Levels” (page 65) for details.

Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels

● Song Mixer

This MIXER display appears in the Song mode. See “Adjusting Indi-

vidual Track Levels” (page 100) for details.

Adjusting the Volume

CVP-201

The Clavinova features a convenient metronome that is ideal for practicing. The

procedure for setting the metronome tempo can also be used to set the playback

tempo for the Auto Accompaniment (page 49) and Song (page 93) modes.

You can start the metronome and set the tempo from any display, including

the main display.

■ Starting and Stopping the Metronome .......................................

Using the Metronome

• The metronome can also be used

during playback in Auto Accompa-

niment (page 49) or Song mode

(page 93).

• The metronome cannot be used

when playing disk software that

was recorded in free-tempo (see

page 96).

To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

METRONOME

➔ The [METRONOME] lamp lights, and the metronome starts keeping

time (indicated by the flashing of the BEAT lamps).

Tempo

• Range: 32 — 280

• Basic setting: Depends on style.

➔ The tempo indication in the main display is highlighted, and the

tempo changes.

Slower Faster

Restoring the Basic Tempo

You can restore the preset tempo for

the currently selected style by simul-

taneously pressing both TEMPO [–]

and [+] buttons.

You can either press TEMPO [–] or [+] buttons briefly to change the

tempo value by one, or hold down the button to change it continuously.

When the tempo is highlighted in the display, you can also use the data

dial or [–] and [+] buttons to set the tempo.

Using the Metronome

During Style or Song Playback…

• If a style or song is started while the

metronome is playing, the metro-

nome will continue to sound along

with the style or song.

• The metronome uses the time signa-

ture of the style or song instead of

the BEAT setting during style or

song playback.

• The metronome stops when the

style or song stops.

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

CONTRAST

BEAT

Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome.

■ Adjusting the Tempo.......................................................................................

The current tempo, indicated at the left edge of the display, depends on

the selected style (see page 49). To change the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]

and [+] buttons.

CVP-201

You can change the metronome’s time signature and volume using the

settings in the METRONOME page.

■ Displaying the Metronome Settings ..............................................

To display the METRONOME page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then

[METRONOME].

Changing the Metronome Settings

➾

➔ The METRONOME display appears.

■ Setting the Beat (Time Signature)....................................................

BEAT

• Settings: NORMAL, 2 — 5

• Basic setting: NORMAL

Use the BEAT ▼ and ▲ buttons to change the time signature. (If the BEAT

function is highlighted, you can also change its settings with the data dial or the

[–] and [+] buttons.)

When NORMAL is selected, the metronome ticks steadily at the current

tempo with no accented beats.

When BEAT is set to 2, 3, 4, or 5, the metronome ticks off measures with the

selected number of beats, playing a bell sound on the first beat of each measure.

■ Setting the Metronome Volume...........................................................

VOLUME

• Range: 0 — 127

• Basic setting: 64

Use the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons to change the metronome volume.

(If the VOLUME function is highlighted, you can also change its settings

with the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.)

The volume of the metronome is determined by both the VOLUME func-

tion and the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider (except in Song mode, in

which case the volume of the metronome is not affected by the slider). If you

use the slider, the playback volume for the Automatic Accompaniment (page

50) will also be affected.

Using the Metronome

DIRECT ACCESS

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

CVP-201

The Help mode provides convenient explanations of the main

functions of the Clavinova. You can select help topics from a menu

displayed on the LCD, or press a button on the panel to get help

information related to that control.

Z Call up the Help mode................................................................................

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

HELP

While the Help mode is active, no other

operations can be performed.

Press the [HELP] button.

➔ The Help menu display appears.

X Select the language if necessary....................................................

The selected language is always backed

up even after the power is turned off.

Select the desired language for help (ENGLISH, JAPANESE, GER-

MAN, FRENCH, or SPANISH) by pressing the fourth LCD button.

Using the Help Mode

DEMO

HELP

C Select a help topic. .........................................................................................

Use the SELECT ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons to select one of the follow-

ing eight menu items.

Help Topics

••

•

Basic Operations

••

•

Accompaniment

••

•

Demo Songs

••

•

Song Playback

••

•

Voices

••

•

Song Recording

••

•

Styles

••

•

Functions

➔ The selected menu is highlighted.

➾ Press the LCD button under ENTER to enter your selection.

➔ The first page of the selected help information is displayed.

CVP-201

V Turn the pages and read the help information..................

Use the fourth LCD button to advance the page. You can also press

the third LCD button if you want to go back and read the previous page.

B Exit the Help topic...........................................................................................

Press the LCD button under EXIT to return to the Help menu. You

can select another menu item or panel button and read through other help

topics.

N Exit the Help mode.........................................................................................

To exit the Help mode and to go back to the main display at any time,

simply press [HELP].

Using the Help Mode

DEMO

HELP

CVP-201

CHAPTER 3: Voices

Selecting Voices

Exiting the Display

To return to the main display, press [EXIT].

Backing Up the Selected Voice

• When the power is turned ON, the Grand

Piano voice is selected automatically.

However, if the Backup function (page

152) is set to ON, the last selected voice

will automatically be selected.

• The last selected voice in each group can

be retained in memory, even after turning

off the power, when the Backup function

(page 152) is set to ON.

The Clavinova features a wealth of rich, authentic voices, including

piano, strings and brass instruments. It also features a Keyboard

Percussion function that lets you play the realistic drum and

percussion sounds directly from the keyboard.

● Voice Types

• Clavinova Voices :195

• XG Voices : 480

• Drum/SFX Kits : 12

* For a list of the voices, see page 3 in the Reference Booklet.

* The Clavinova’s voices are divided into twelve groups, corre-

sponding to the twelve VOICE buttons on the panel.

ZSelect the voice group.............................................................................

Select the desired voice group by pressing the appropriate VOICE

button.

➔ The VOICE SELECT display appears.

Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

CVP-201

You can also select a voice using the RIGHT1 VOICE function in the

main display.

About Ensemble Voices

The Clavinova’s ensemble voices are

rich, dual-like voices that you can play

without entering the Dual mode (page

33.) Press the [Ensemble] button to

display a menu of ensemble voices.

About XG Voices

Yamaha’s XG format is a major new

enhancement to the GM (General MIDI)

System Level 1 format. It provides for

more instrument sounds and variations,

as well as greater expressive control over

voices and effects. XG also ensures

compatibility with future instruments and

software.

• Press the [XG] button to display a

menu of XG voices.

• Press another VOICE button while

holding down the [XG] button to dis-

play a list of XG voices in the corre-

sponding category.

Selecting Voices from the Main Display

ZSelect the RIGHT1 VOICE function...............................................

If the RIGHT1 VOICE function is not already highlighted, press the

fourth LCD button to highlight it.

XSelect the voice...................................................................................................

Select the voice using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can

also hold down RIGHT1 VOICE to advance the voice selection continu-

ously. (When selecting a voice in this way, the voice can be selected not

only from a certain voice group but from all voices.)

CPlay the voice........................................................................................................

Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

Selecting Voices

XSelect the voice..................................................................................................

Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate LCD button. The

data dial and [–] and [+] buttons can be also used.

Each VOICE SELECT display consists of two or more pages. Use the

PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the various pages.

CPlay the selected voice..............................................................................

Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

Automatic Voice-related Settings

Selecting a voice automatically selects

the best-suited reverb, chorus, effect,

and other settings for that particular

voice. You can disable this so that set-

tings are not automatically selected by

using the VOICE SETTING function

(page 137).

CVP-201

The Clavinova has ten drum kits and two SFX kits , found on pages 3

and 5 of the [PERCUSSION] voice group. When one of the drum or SFX

kits is selected, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are

assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.

The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit

are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys.

See the drum/SFX kit list on page 8 in the Reference Booklet for a list-

ing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.

• When a drum kit is selected, only the

keys with drum or percussion symbols

printed above them will sound.

• When an SFX kit is selected, keys

other than those which have been

assigned a special effect sound will not

produce any sound.

• The Transpose (page 136), Tune

(page 136) and Octave (pages 32,34

and 38) functions do not affect the

drum/SFX kits.

You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display page

to change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the

RIGHT1 VOICE function.

The settings you make in this page affect

any voices you select using the RIGHT1

VOICE function. Different settings cannot

be made for each voice.

■ Displaying the Main Voice Keyboard Settings ..................

Z If you are playing in Dual mode or Split mode, make sure RIGHT1

VOICE is selected in the main display.

X Press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any of the VOICE buttons.

➔ The KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display appears.

You can switch between the KEYBOARD

[RIGHT1] page and the [RIGHT2] (page

34) or [LEFT] (page 37) displays using

the PAGE [

] and [

] buttons.

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice

Keyboard Percussion

Selecting Voices

GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

PER-

CUSSION

➾

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

DIRECT ACCESS

CVP-201

X Adjust the volume of the main voice.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold

down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

■ Setting the Volume of the Main Voice...........................................

You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1]

page to change the volume of the main voice.

To adjust the overall keyboard volume,

use the KBD VOL function in the main

display (page 23) instead.

Z Press the VOLUME button.

➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.

VOLUME

• Range: 0 — 127

• Basic setting: 127

■ Setting the Octave of the Main Voice ...........................................

The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets

you adjust the pitch of the main voice up or down by one or two octaves.

Press the OCTAVE button.

➔ The value changes each time you press the button.

OCTAVE

• Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)

–1 (1 octave lower)

0 (no octave shift)

+1 (1 octave higher)

+2 (2 octaves higher)

• Basic setting: 0

■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Main Voice ....................

The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets you

adjust the stereo position of the main voice.

Z Press the PAN button.

➔ The PAN function is highlighted.

PAN

• Settings: L — — R

• Basic setting: (center)

Selecting Voices

X Adjust the stereo position.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position,

or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic set-

ting.

Some voices have octave settings that

are selected automatically when the

voice is selected. (Such settings are not

displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You

can prevent the octave setting from

changing when a voice is selected by

setting the VOICE SETTING function

(page 137) to MANUAL.

CVP-201

Playing Two Voices

Simultaneously — Dual Mode

To change the main voice while playing in Dual mode, select the

RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal

manner.

The Dual mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two

different voices simultaneously in a layer. This makes it easy to

create exceptionally rich and thick tonal textures. You can also set

the volume, octave, and stereo position for the second voice, and

detune the second voice from the main voice to create a thicker

sound.

Z Select the main voice. ..................................................................................

Select a voice in the normal way (page 29), then press [EXIT] to re-

turn to the main display.

X Call up the Dual mode.................................................................................

To call up the Dual mode, press the [DUAL] button.

➔ The RIGHT2 VOICE function appears in the lower right corner of

the LCD display, and the current second voice is displayed to the

right of the main voice (after the plus sign).

Second Voice

• Range: All voices

• Basic setting: StringsSlow

Selecting the Second Voice

C Select the second voice............................................................................

Select the second voice in the same manner as described for the main

voice (page 29). To select the second voice, the RIGHT2 VOICE func-

tion must be highlighted.

Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE R EW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

DUAL

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

If you use the VOICE buttons to select a

voice while either the tempo or the KBD

VOL function is highlighted, the voice you

select will be used as the main voice.

CVP-201

You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page

to change the volume, octave, pan and detune of the voice selected using

the RIGHT2 VOICE function.

The settings you make in this page affect

any voices you select using the RIGHT2

VOICE function. Different settings cannot

be made for each voice.

■ Displaying the Second Voice Keyboard Settings............

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [DUAL].

If the RIGHT2 VOICE function is selected

in the main display, you can also display

the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page by

pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by

any one of the VOICE buttons.

➔ The KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display appears.

You can switch between the KEYBOARD

[RIGHT2] page and the [RIGHT1] (page

31) or [LEFT] (page 37) displays using

the PAGE [

] and [

] buttons.

■ Setting the Volume of the Second Voice...................................

You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2]

page to change the volume of the second voice.

To adjust the overall keyboard volume,

use the KBD VOL function in the main

display (page 23) instead.

Z Press the VOLUME button.

➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.

VOLUME

• Range: 0 — 127

• Basic setting: 127

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice

X Adjust the volume of the second voice.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold

down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

■ Setting the Octave of the Second Voice....................................

The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets

you adjust the pitch of the second voice up or down by one or two oc-

taves. Press the OCTAVE button.

➔ The value changes each time you press the button.

OCTAVE

• Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)

–1 (1 octave lower)

0 (no octave shift)

+1 (1 octave higher)

+2 (2 octaves higher)

• Basic setting: 0

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode

Some voices have octave settings that

are selected automatically when the

voice is selected. (Such settings are not

displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You

can prevent the octave setting from

changing when a voice is selected by

setting the VOICE SETTING function

(page 137) to MANUAL.

➾

ORGAN

THE-

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

ER-

SION

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

DIRECT ACCESS

CVP-201

■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Second Voice ...........

The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets you

adjust the stereo position of the second voice.

Z Press the PAN button.

➔ The PAN function is highlighted.

PAN

• Settings: L — — R

• Basic setting: (center)

■ Detuning the Second Voice....................................................................

The DETUNE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page

lets you detune the pitch of the second voice slightly from that of the

main voice, to produce an even richer sound.

Z Press the DETUNE button.

➔ The DETUNE function is highlighted.

DETUNE

• Range: 0 — 10

• Basic setting: 5

X Adjust the stereo position.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or

hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

X Adjust the detune depth.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the detune depth, or

hold down the DETUNE button to increase the detune depth.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Press the [DUAL] button to exit Dual mode.

➔ The [DUAL] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer

plays in Dual mode.

Exiting the Dual Mode

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode

ORGAN

THE-

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

ER-

SION

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

CVP-201

To change the main voice while playing in Split mode, select the

RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal manner.

Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode

Playing Two Voices on Different

Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

The Split mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two

different voices with each hand. For example, you can play the

bass with your left hand and the piano with your right hand.

Z Select the main voice. ...................................................................................

Select a voice in the normal way (page 29), then press [EXIT] to re-

turn to the main display. The voice you select will be played by the right

range of the keyboard.

X Call up the Split mode. .................................................................................

To call up the Split mode, press the [SPLIT] button.

➔ The LEFT VOICE function appears in the bottom center of the LCD

display, and the current left voice is displayed to the left of the main

voice (before the slash). Also, the keyboard guide lamp corre-

sponding to the split point lights.

Split point

The split point is the key that divides the

right and left sides of the keyboard. You

can change the split point using the

SPLIT POINT function in the KEY-

BOARD [LEFT] display page (page 39).

You can use the Single Finger, Multi

Finger, Fingered1, or Fingered2 modes

(page 59) of the Automatic Accompani-

ment function while playing in Split

mode. In this case, pressing the keys in

the left range will play the Automatic

Accompaniment voices as well as the left

voice.

C Select the left voice. ........................................................................................

Select the left voice in the same manner as described for the main

voice (page 29). To select the left voice, the LEFT VOICE function must

be highlighted.

Left Voice

• Range: All voices

• Basic setting: Acous.Bass 1

Selecting the Left Voice

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

SPL IT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

If you use the VOICE buttons to select a

voice while either the tempo or the KBD

VOL function is highlighted, the voice

you select will be used as the main

voice.

CVP-201

You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display page to

change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the LEFT

VOICE function. You can also select the keyboard range that is affected

by the pedals, as well as the split point that separates the right and left

ranges, using the functions in this page.

The settings you make in this page affect

any voices you select using the LEFT

VOICE function. Different settings cannot

be made for each voice.

■ Displaying the Left Voice Keyboard Settings.....................

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [SPLIT].

If the LEFT VOICE function is selected in

the main display, you can also display

the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page by pressing

[DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any one

of the VOICE buttons.

➔ The KEYBOARD [LEFT] display appears.

You can switch between the KEYBOARD

[LEFT] page and the [RIGHT1] (page 31)

or [RIGHT2] (page 34) displays using the

PAGE [

] and [

] buttons.

■ Setting the Volume of the Left Voice ............................................

You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page

to change the volume of the left voice.

To adjust the overall keyboard volume,

use the KBD VOL function in the main

display (page 23) instead.

Z Press the VOLUME button.

➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.

VOLUME

• Range: 0 — 127

• Basic setting: 127

Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice

X Adjust the volume of the left voice.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold

down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

➾

ORGAN

THE-

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

ER-

SION

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

DIRECT ACCESS

CVP-201

PAN

• Settings: L — — R

• Basic setting: (center)

PEDAL

• Settings: R (right only)

L (left only)

L+R (both)

• Basic setting: R

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

X Adjust the stereo position.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or

hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Left Voice.......................

The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you ad-

just the stereo position of the left voice.

Z Press the PAN button.

➔ The PAN function is highlighted.

■ Setting the Range Affected by the Right and Left

Pedals.........................................................................................................................

The PEDAL function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you

specify which ranges of the keyboard will be affected by the damper and

glide functions controlled by the left and right pedals when playing in

Split mode. Press the PEDAL button.

➔ The value changes each time you press the button.

See page 138 for a list of the functions

that can be controlled by the left pedal.

OCTAVE

• Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)

–1 (1 octave lower)

0 (no octave shift)

+1 (1 octave higher)

+2 (2 octaves higher)

• Basic setting: +1

■ Setting the Octave of the Left Voice..............................................

The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you

adjust the pitch of the left voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press

the OCTAVE button.

➔ The value changes each time you press the button.

Some voices have octave settings that

are selected automatically when the

voice is selected. (Such settings are not

displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You

can prevent the octave setting from

changing when a voice is selected by

setting the VOICE SETTING function

(page 137) to MANUAL.

CVP-201

Z Press the SPLIT POINT button.

➔ The SPLIT function is highlighted.

X Change the split point.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the split point, or hold

down the SPLIT POINT button to move the split point to the right.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

➔ The keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected Split Point

lights, and the key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function.

■ Changing the Split Point............................................................................

You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT]

display to set the split point at any desired key position. In Split mode, the

left voice is played by all keys to the left of (and including) the split point.

The basic setting of the Split Point is F#2.

F 2

C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0

Right range

Left range

SPLIT POINT

• Settings: Any key of the keyboard

• Basic setting: F

Exiting the Split Mode

Press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split mode.

➔ The [SPLIT] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer plays

in Split mode.

ENSEMBLE

ER-

SION

SPLIT EFFECT

The [DUAL] and [SPLIT] buttons can be turned on simultaneously.

When you do so, the right range of the keyboard will play both the main

voice and the second voice.

Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously

When both the Dual and Split modes are

turned on, the name of either the second

voice or the left voice will be displayed

together with the main voice in the main

display.

CVP-201

Using the Pedals

The Clavinova has three pedals.

• Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION]

and [XG] groups may not be affected

by use of the damper pedal.

• Some voices may sound continuously

or have a long decay after the notes

have been released while the damper

pedal is held.

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto

pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as

the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained.

This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes

are played staccato.

• Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION]

and [XG] groups may not be affected

by use of the sostenuto pedal.

• Certain voices, such as [STRINGS] or

[BRASS], sustain continuously when

the sostenuto pedal is pressed.

The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an

actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after

releasing the keys.

Damper Pedal (Right)

Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

Soft Pedal (Left)

Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of

the notes you play.

You can also assign one of many other functions to this pedal; for exam-

ple, you can use it to start/stop the Automatic Accompaniment, or use it to

play Fill Ins. See page 138 for details.

The effect of the soft pedal may differ

slightly depending on the selected voice.

CVP-201

CHAPTER 4:

Reverb and Other Effects

Reverb

Reverb ON/OFF

Basic setting: Depends on voice.

➔ The lamp lights.

The setting of the [REVERB] button has

no effect on Song mode or Auto Accom-

paniment playback.

To turn the reverb off, press [REVERB] again.

➔ The lamp turns off.

Because the basic setting of the [REVERB] button depends on the

voice, the reverb may turn on or off automatically when you select a dif-

ferent voice.

To apply reverb to the keyboard part(s), press the [REVERB] button.

Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a

performance space — anything from a room in a jazz club to a

concert hall. The Clavinova lets you choose from a variety of

reverb effects; you can also set the depth of any reverb effect to

your preference.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE R EW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

REVERB

Turning the Reverb On or Off

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

Changing the Reverb Settings

You can change the reverb type and depth using the REVERB and

REVERB DEPTH display pages.

■ Displaying the Reverb Settings .........................................................

Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB].

➾

DIRECT ACCESS

STRINGS/

CHOIR

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

CVP-201

Use the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the reverb type, or select

the TYPE function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.

➔ The selected reverb type is highlighted.

Because the basic setting of the reverb type depends on the accompa-

niment style, the reverb type may change automatically when you select

a different style.

• The reverb type selection affects all

voices played by the keyboard or Auto

Accompaniment. Different settings

cannot be made for each part.

• Depending on the selected voice, the

depth of the effect may sound stronger

or weaker, even though the same

reverb type is selected.

• The reverb effect cannot be applied to

the sounds input through the AUX IN

[R] and [L/L+R] jacks.

• It is also possible to apply reverb ef-

fects to the keyboard voices using the

[EFFECT] button. See the Effect Type

List on page 46 for details.

• If both the [REVERB] and [EFFECT]

buttons are turned on, both effects will

be applied.

■ Setting the Total Depth ................................................................................

The overall depth of the selected reverb effect can be set using the

TOTAL DEPTH function in the REVERB display.

Z Select the TOTAL DEPTH function.

➔ The TOTAL DEPTH function is highlighted.

TOTAL DEPTH

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)

• Basic setting: 64

Reverb Type

• Settings: See table on page 162.

• Basic setting: Depends on style.

■ Changing the Reverb Type .....................................................................

You can change the reverb type using the REVERB display.

X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the

REVERB page and the REVERB DEPTH page.

If you press the [

] button while the

REVERB DEPTH page is showing, the

CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer

to the other sections of this chapter for

details on chorus and other effect set-

tings.

➔ The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB

DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently).

Reverb

CVP-201

Reverb

X Set the total depth of the reverb effect.

You can change the setting using the TOTAL DEPTH ▼ and ▲ but-

tons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons.

To reset the value to the basic setting of 64, simultaneously press ei-

ther the TOTAL DEPTH ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons.

• The TOTAL DEPTH setting globally

affects all voices. Different settings

cannot be made for each voice.

• You can also set the reverb depth

separately for the rhythm and accom-

paniment parts, and for each keyboard

part. (See the next operation.)

Z Select a part.

Press the LCD button corresponding to RHYTHM to set the reverb

depth for the drum part, or ACMP to set it for all other accompani-

ment parts. Select LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the reverb depth

for the corresponding keyboard part.

• You can also select several parts at

once and adjust their settings simulta-

neously.

➔ The selected function is highlighted.

X Set the reverb depth.

RHYTHM and ACMP

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)

• Basic setting: 64

LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)

• Basic setting: Depends on voice.

Set the reverb depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or

[–] and [+] buttons.

You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD

button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the

[–] and [+] buttons.

The amount of reverb that is applied to a

part depends on both the part depth and

TOTAL DEPTH settings. If one of the

settings is 0, no reverb will be applied to

that part even if the other setting is 127.

Because the basic settings of the LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 func-

tions depend on the voices selected, a reverb depth setting may

change automatically when you select a different part.

■ Setting the Reverb Depth for Each Part....................................

The settings in the REVERB DEPTH display (page 42) let you set the

reverb depth separately for the rhythm and accompaniment parts, as well

as the parts you play from the keyboard.

CVP-201

Changing the Chorus Settings

Unlike the reverb (page 41) and other effects (page 46), which can be

turned on or off using the appropriate panel buttons, the chorus feature is

always considered to be “on.” How chorus is applied to any given voice

depends on the current chorus type and depth settings. You can change

these settings using the functions in the CHORUS display page.

Chorus

The Clavinova’s chorus effects let you modify the voices you play

from the keyboard, adding warmth for an even richer sound.

Flanger effects add pronounced modulation, for a spacy futuris-

tic quality. You can choose from a variety of chorus and flanger

effects, and set the depth of the effect added to each keyboard

voice.

■ Displaying the Chorus Settings........................................................

Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB].

➔ The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB

DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently).

X Press the PAGE [>] button once or twice, as needed.

• You can also press [DIRECT AC-

CESS] followed by [EFFECT], then

use the PAGE [

] button to display the

CHORUS page from either the EF-

FECT page or the EFFECT DEPTH

page.

• Refer to the other sections of this

chapter for details on reverb and other

effect settings.

Press PAGE [>] twice if the REVERB page was displayed, or once if

the REVERB DEPTH page was displayed.

➔ The CHORUS page is displayed.

Chorus Type

• Settings: See table on page 162.

• Basic setting: Depends on style.

You can change the chorus type selection in the CHORUS page.

Use the CHORUS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the chorus type, or

select the CHORUS function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] but-

tons.

■ Changing the Chorus Type.....................................................................

The settings of the CHORUS display

have no effect on Song mode or Auto

Accompaniment playback.

CVP-201

Chorus

➔ The selected chorus type is highlighted.

Because the basic setting of the chorus type depends on the accompa-

niment style, the chorus type may change automatically when you select

a different style.

• The chorus type selection affects all

keyboard parts. Different settings

cannot be made for each part.

• Depending on the selected voice, the

depth of the effect may sound stronger

or weaker, even though the same

chorus type is selected.

• It is also possible to apply chorus

effects to the keyboard voices using

the [EFFECT] button. See the Effect

Type List on page 46 for details.

■ Setting the Chorus Depth for Each Part...................................

The other settings in the CHORUS page let you set the chorus depth

separately for each part you play from the keyboard.

Z Select a part.

Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the chorus depth for the cor-

responding keyboard part.

You can also select several parts at once

and adjust their settings simultaneously.

➔ The selected function is highlighted.

X Set the chorus depth.

Chorus Depth functions

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)

• Basic setting: Depends on voice.

Set the chorus depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or

[–] and [+] buttons.

You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD

button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the

[–] and [+] buttons.

Because the basic settings of the chorus depth functions depend on

the voices selected, a chorus depth setting may change automatically

when you select a different voice.

Since the chorus feature is always on,

you should set a chorus depth of 0 for

any parts that you don’t want affected by

the chorus effect.

CVP-201

➔ The LCD displays either the EFFECT page or the EFFECT

DEPTH page (whichever was used most recently).

Voice Effects

The Clavinova has a variety of effects besides reverb and chorus

that you can use to enhance the sound of the voices or create wild,

special effects. You can adjust the depth of the effect as desired.

To apply the effect to the keyboard parts, press the [EFFECT] button.

Turning the Effects On

Effect ON/OFF

Basic setting: Depends on voice.

➔ The lamp lights.

When the effect system is also used by

an accompaniment style or song, the

effect being applied to the keyboard

part(s) may automatically be turned off

when you start the Auto Accompaniment

or select the song for playback, depend-

ing on the effect type selected by the

style or song. If this happens, you may

be able to apply the effect to the key-

board part(s) by pressing the [EFFECT]

button - again, this depends on the se-

lected effect type. If you do so, the effect

will not be applied to voices played by the

Auto Accompaniment or song.

To turn the effect off, press [EFFECT] again.

➔ The lamp turns off.

Because the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button depends on the

voice, the effect may turn on or off automatically when you select a dif-

ferent voice.

Changing the Effect Settings

You can change the current effect type and depth using the EFFECT

and EFFECT DEPTH display pages.

\■ Displaying the Effect Settings.............................................................

Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [EFFECT].

If you press the [

] button while the

EFFECT page is showing, the CHORUS

page will be displayed. Refer to the first

two sections of this chapter for details on

reverb and chorus settings.

➾

The [EFFECT] lamp will not light if the

effect depth (page 48) is set to 0.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

EFFECT

DIRECT ACCESS

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

STRINGS/

CHOIR

DUAL

SPL I T

REVERB

EFFECT

CVP-201

■ Changing the Effect Type..........................................................................

You can change the effect type selection in the EFFECT page. Select

an effect type using the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons, or highlight the TYPE

function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.

Effect Type

• Settings: See table on page 163.

• Basic setting: Depends on voice.

To reset the effect type to its basic setting, simultaneously press the

EFFECT TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons.

➔ The selected effect type is highlighted.

Because the basic setting of the effect type depends on the voice, the

effect type may change automatically when you select a different voice.

• The effect type selection affects all

keyboard parts. Different settings

cannot be made for each part.

• When the basic setting of the [EF-

FECT] button is ON for two or three

voices selected in Dual and/or Split

mode, the Clavinova will automatically

select the most appropriate effect type

and set the effect depth (page 48) for

each part to an appropriate level.

• Depending on the selected voice, the

depth of the effect may sound stronger

or weaker, even though the same

effect type is selected.

• If both the [EFFECT] and [REVERB]

buttons are turned on, both effects will

be applied.

Voice Effects

X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the EF-

FECT and EFFECT DEPTH pages.

➔ The value displayed by the VARIATION function switches between

OFF and ON, and the effect changes.

The way in which the effect changes depends on the effect type (see

the table on page 163). Also, because the basic setting of the VARIA-

TION function depends on the voice, the setting of this function may

change automatically when you select a different voice.

■ Varying the Effect.............................................................................................

Each of the Clavinova’s effect types has a variation that can be se-

lected using the VARIATION function in the EFFECT page. To vary the

effect produced by the selected effect type, press the LCD button under

VARIATION.

VARIATION function

• Settings: OFF, ON

• Basic setting: Depends on voice.

CVP-201

Effect Depth functions

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)

• Basic setting: Depends on voice.

X Set the effect depth.

Set the effect depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or

[–] and [+] buttons.

You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD

button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the

[–] and [+] buttons.

Because the basic settings of the effect depth functions depend on the

voices selected, an effect depth setting may change automatically

when you select a different voice.

■ Setting the Effect Depth for Each Part .......................................

The settings in the EFFECT DEPTH page let you set the effect depth

separately for each part you play from the keyboard.

Z Select a part.

Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the effect depth for the cor-

responding keyboard part.

➔ The selected function is highlighted.

Voice Effects

CVP-201

CHAPTER 5:

Accompaniment Styles

Selecting Accompaniment Styles

The Clavinova has a wide variety of musical “styles” that you can use for simple

percussion accompaniment, or as the basis of a fully orchestrated accompaniment

— including bass and rhythm parts — using the Auto Accompaniment feature (page

57). There is also a selection of “Pianist” styles that let you play with piano

accompaniment when you activate the Auto Accompaniment.

Selecting a Style

● Style Types

• Rhythm styles: 125

• Pianist styles: 35

• Custom styles: 4

* For information on the styles, see the Style List on page 10 in the Refer-

ence Booklet.

* The Clavinova’s styles are divided into eleven groups, corresponding to

the eleven STYLE buttons on the panel.

* The PIANIST styles and Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style group

do not include drum sounds. Use the Auto Accompaniment (page 58) to

play these styles.

Z Select an accompaniment style group......................................

Disk and Custom Styles

The [DISK/CUSTOM] button lets you use

styles on optional Style File Disks (page

86) or your original styles (page 73) .

Select the desired style group by pressing the appropriate STYLE

button.

➔ The corresponding STYLE SELECT display appears.

• The last selected style in each group

can be retained in memory, even after

turning off the power, when the Backup

function (page 152) is set to ON.

• When the power is turned on, the 8

Beat 1 style is automatically selected.

However, if the Backup function (page

152) is set to ON, the last selected

style will be selected instead.

• Accompaniment styles cannot be

selected in the Song Play mode page

93.

(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

CVP-201

X Select a style...........................................................................................................................

Select the desired style by pressing the appropriate LCD button.

Accompaniment Tempo

• Whenever you select a style,

the preset tempo for that

style is also selected (unless

you change the style during

playback, in which case the

current tempo is main-

tained).

• Adjust the tempo as de-

scribed on page 25.

Accompaniment Volume

Use the [ACMP/SONG VOL-

UME] slider to adjust the play-

back volume, as described on

page 23.

You can also select a style using the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.

Each STYLE SELECT display consists of more than one page. Use the PAGE

[<] and [

>] buttons to switch between pages.

C Return to the main display.......................................................................................

Press [EXIT] to return to the main display.

Selecting Accompaniment Styles

PAG E

EXIT

CVP-201

You will use the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons and the START/

STOP buttons to select style variations and control style playback.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

Each of the Clavinova’s styles has four variations, corresponding to

the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons labeled as [MAIN A], [MAIN

B], [MAIN C], and [MAIN D].

Varying the Style

Use these buttons to select style variations.

Main A is generally the most rudimentary form of the style; the other

variations are more or less lavish embellishments on the same basic

theme. By judiciously switching between variations as you play, you can

add variety and make the performance more interesting.

■ Selecting a Variation ........................................................................................

You can select a style variation before you start playing the style. To

select a variation, simply press the corresponding button.

The Clavinova will begin playing the selected style variation when

you start the style using one of the methods described in the next section.

■ Playing Fill-in Patterns ..................................................................................

Fill-in patterns

A “fill-in pattern” is a embellishment of the

basic rhythm, usually played at the end of

a musical phrase as an exciting transition

into the next segment.

If you select a different style variation while the style is playing, the

Clavinova will play an automatic fill-in pattern as it switches to the new

variation. The fill-in pattern, like the main pattern, is different for each

variation.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

➔ The button’s lamp lights.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

CVP-201

To change the variation while the style is playing, press the button

corresponding to the new variation.

Using the Pedals

You can also use the left pedal to pause

the style or play a special fill-in pattern by

setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page

138) to BREAK or BREAK FIL.

➔ The button’s lamp flashes as the Clavinova plays the fill-in pattern.

Generally speaking, the Clavinova will start the fill-in pattern soon

after you press the button. If you select a variation after the last eighth

note of a measure, however, it will begin the fill-in pattern from the start

of the next measure.

➔ When the fill-in pattern is finished, the button’s lamp lights steadily

as the Clavinova plays the main pattern.

The auto fill-in feature provides an exciting transition as you switch

from one variation to another. If Main A is playing and you press [MAIN

B], for example, the Clavinova will play Fill-in B, then start playing

Main B.

You can also play fill-in patterns without

selecting a different variation. Just press

the button for the variation that is playing.

The Clavinova will play the fill-in for that

variation, then return to the main pattern.

■ More Fun With Fill-ins ....................................................................................

● Changing the Fill-in

It is possible to switch variations while a fill-in pattern is playing. The

Clavinova will switch to the fill-in pattern for the new variation, then

continue with the new main pattern as usual.

● Repeating the Fill-in

If you hold down the flashing button, or press it after the last eighth

note of the measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the fill-in pat-

tern will be repeated.

● Canceling the Fill-in

If you press the flashing button earlier than the last eighth note of the

measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the Clavinova will stop

playing the fill-in pattern and continue with the main pattern.

Starting the Accompaniment Style

There are several ways to start the accompaniment style, as described

below:

■ Standard Start.........................................................................................................

This is the simplest way to start a style. If necessary, select a variation

as described on page 51, then press the [START/STOP] button.

Using the Pedals

You can also use the left pedal to start

and stop the style by setting the LEFT

PEDAL function (page 138) to START/

STOP.

➔ The lamp lights and the style starts.

Beat Indicator

During style playback, the leftmost beat

lamp (red) flashes on the first beat of

each measure, and the other lamps

(green) flash for each successive beat.

The current tempo and measure number

are shown at the left edge of the main

display.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CVP-201

■ Synchronized Start............................................................................................

This method lets you start the style by simply playing a note or chord

on the keyboard.

Z Set the Synchronized Start function.

• If the [SYNCHRO] button is pressed

while a style is playing, style playback

stops and Synchronized Start is auto-

matically set to stand-by.

• When you play the keyboard in Split

mode (page 36) or use the Auto Ac-

companiment in a mode other than

FULL KEYBOARD (page 61), only the

left-hand section of the keyboard will

trigger a synchronized start.

If necessary, select a variation as described on page 51, then press the

[SYNCHRO] button.

X Start playing.

To cancel the Synchronized Start func-

tion before you start the style, press the

[SYNCHRO] button again.

When you are ready, play a note on the keyboard. The style starts

playing when you play the first note.

➔ The [SYNCHRO] lamp turns off, the [START/STOP] lamp lights,

and the style starts.

■ Tap Start.........................................................................................................................

This function lets you set the tempo and start the style in one opera-

tion.

If necessary, select a variation as described on page 51, then tap the

[TAP] button at the desired tempo. Tap four times for 2- and 4-beat

styles, three times for 3-beat styles, and five times for 5-beat styles.

If you do not tap the [TAP] button the

required number of times (i.e., 3 times for

a 3-beat style), the Tap Start function will

be canceled after a few seconds.

The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during style

playback (by tapping the button twice). In this case the tap “click” will

not sound.

When playing a 4-beat style… ➾ Tap 4 times.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

➔ The lamp lights, and the red [BEAT] lamp flashes in time with the

current tempo.

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CVP-201

■ Adding an Introduction.................................................................................

This function lets you embellish the start of a tune by adding an intro-

duction.

Z Set the introduction pattern.

Select the variation to play the intro pattern as described on page 51,

then press the [INTRO] button. There are three introduction patterns,

as shown below:

Pattern Played by:

Intro A [MAIN A]

Intro B [MAIN B]

Intro C/D [MAIN C] or [MAIN D]

Intro Patterns

➔ The [INTRO] lamp lights, and the lamp for the selected variation

flashes.

The flashing light indicates the variation

that will play after the intro. In the illustra-

tion at left, the Clavinova will play Intro A,

followed by Main A.

X Select the main pattern.

Select the variation to play the main pattern when the intro is finished.

(If you want the style to continue playing with the same variation as

the introduction, you can skip this step.)

➔ The lamp for the previously selected button lights, and the lamp of

the selected button flashes.

Since the flashing light indicates the

variation that will play after the intro, the

illustration at left indicates that the

Clavinova will play Intro C/D, followed by

Main A.

C Start the style.

To cancel the introduction before starting

the style, press the [INTRO] button again.

Use one of the three methods described on the preceding pages to

start playing the style.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

CVP-201

Z Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

Using the Pedals

You can also use the left pedal to trigger

a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT

PEDAL function (page 138) to FADE IN/

OUT.

➔ The lamp lights, and the Synchronized Start function (page 53)

turns on automatically.

X Start the style.

To cancel the fade-in before starting the

style, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button

again.

Use one of the three methods described on the preceding page to start

playing the style.

➔ The [FADE IN/OUT] lamp flashes during the fade-in, then turns off

when the fade-in is completed.

There are also several ways to stop accompaniment style playback, as

described below:

■ Standard Stop.........................................................................................................

To stop style playback, press the [START/STOP] button.

Stopping the Accompaniment Style

Using the Pedals

You can also use the left pedal to start

and stop the style by setting the LEFT

PEDAL function (page 138) to START/

STOP.

➔ The lamp turns off and the style stops instantly.

■ Adding an Ending...............................................................................................

To play an ending pattern before the style playback stops, press the

[ENDING] button.

If you press the [ENDING] button on or

after the second beat of a measure, the

ending pattern will start at the top of the

next measure.

■ Fading In.............................................................................................................................

This function lets you gradually fade in the volume of the style. You can

set the Fade In function at any time before you start the style, and use it in

combination with any start method (including the Introduction function).

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

➔ The ENDING lamp lights, and the Clavinova stops style playback after

playing an ending pattern.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FA DE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

CVP-201

■ Fading Out..................................................................................................................

You can have the style fade out and automatically stop by pressing the

[FADE IN/OUT] button.

Using the Pedals

You can also use the left pedal to trigger

a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT

PEDAL function (page 138) to FADE IN/

OUT.

➔ The lamp flashes as the style fades out.

You can use the Fade Out function in combination with any pattern

(including the Introduction and Ending functions).

The Clavinova will play one of three ending patterns, depending on

the main pattern that is currently playing, as shown below.

Pattern Played by:

Ending A [MAIN A]

Ending B [MAIN B]

Ending C/D [MAIN C] or [MAIN D]

Ending Patterns

Press [ENDING] a second time while the ending pattern is playing to

produce a ritardando (gradually slowing) effect.

Using the Pedals

You can also use the left pedal to trigger

the ending pattern and ritardando by

setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page

138) to ENDING/RIT.

Playing the Accompaniment Styles

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOPENDING

FA DE

OUT

CVP-201

The Clavinova includes a sophisticated Auto Accompaniment

system that can provide automated rhythm, bass and chord

backing for your performance in 125 different styles, as well as

35 different types of piano-only accompaniment.

The Auto Accompaniment playback data is normally not output by the

MIDI [OUT] terminal. To send the Auto Accompaniment data to another

MIDI instrument, use the ACMP&RHY and HARMONY functions in the

FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display described on page 150.

You can use one of several methods to indicate the chords that are to

be played by the Auto Accompaniment. Choose the accompaniment

mode that best suits your playing style.

Using the Auto Accompaniment

Detailed explanations of each accompa-

niment mode are given on pages 60 and

61.

● Single Finger

The Single Finger method makes it easy to obtain accompaniment in

major, seventh, minor, and minor-seventh chords by pressing certain keys

(according to simple rules) to the left of the split point indicated by the

keyboard guide lamp. (See page 60.)

● Multi Finger

When you select the Multi Finger mode, you can use either the Single

Finger method or the Fingered 1 method to indicate chords for the ac-

companiment. (See page 60.)

● Fingered 1

The Fingered 1 method lets you control the Auto Accompaniment by

playing full chords to the left of the split point. (See page 60.)

● Fingered 2

This mode accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered 1 mode, with

the exception that the lowest note played to the left of the split point is

used as the bass root (in Fingered 1 mode, the root of the chord is always

used as the bass root). Hence, you can select this mode to play “on bass”

or “fraction” chords. (See page 61.)

● Full Keyboard

The Full Keyboard mode automatically produces appropriate auto-

matic accompaniment for virtually anything you play, anywhere on the

keyboard. (See page 61.)

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE R EW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

ACMP ON

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

CVP-201

You may want to select an accompaniment mode (page 59) before

you start playing. If the accompaniment mode is set to your liking, you

can start the Auto Accompaniment as follows:

Z Select a style.........................................................................................................

Starting the Auto Accompaniment

Pianist styles

You can play the PIANIST styles and

Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style

group with the Auto Accompaniment

(page 49). Since these styles do not

contain drum parts, you’ll have to indicate

a chord as you start the style to hear the

accompaniment.

Select the desired style. (See page 49.)

X Set the tempo and accompaniment volume.......................

Use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the tempo (page 25), and the

[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume of the accompa-

niment parts (page 23).

C Turn on the Auto Accompaniment. ...............................................

• The Auto Accompaniment will auto-

matically turn on when you select a

style in the Pianist style group.

• The Auto Accompaniment can also be

turned on during playback of song data

recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/

700/103/201.

• If you turn the Auto Accompaniment on

while playing back songs recorded

using the Auto Accompaniment, the

recorded accompaniment track will be

dropped in favor of the accompaniment

you play on the keyboard.

Press the [ACMP ON] button.

Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function (page 53).

Also, a keyboard lamp shows the current split point.

V Start the Auto Accompaniment........................................................

• You can also select style variations

and play fill-in patterns as described on

page 51 while playing along with the

Auto Accompaniment.

• Press the [ACMP ON] button again to

turn the Auto Accompaniment off

before you start playing.

Begin playing to start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchro-

nized Start function, or start the style using one (or more) of the other

methods described on pages 52 and 55.

The methods used to indicate Auto Accompaniment chords are de-

scribed in the following pages.

Stopping the Auto Accompaniment

Use one of the methods described on page 55 to stop playback of the

style, including the Auto Accompaniment.

To turn Auto Accompaniment off, press the [ACMP ON] button so

that the lamp goes out.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

➔ The [ACMP ON] lamp lights.

The [SYNCHRO] lamp also lights, indicating that you can start the

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

ACMP ON

CVP-201

You can change the accompaniment mode (which selects the chord

indication method), the split point, and other Auto Accompaniment set-

tings in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display page.

■ Displaying the Auto Accompaniment Settings..................

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [ACMP ON].

Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings

■ Selecting an Accompaniment Mode..............................................

Accompaniment Mode

• Settings: See insert below.

• Basic setting: MULTI FINGER

Use the FINGERING ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an accompaniment

mode.

The method for indicating chords in each accompaniment mode are

described in detail below.

➔ The ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display appears.

➾

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

➔ The selected accompaniment mode is highlighted.

DIRECT ACCESS

ACMP ON

CVP-201

Accompaniment Modes

• The Clavinova displays the names of

the chords you play at the left edge of

the main display, below the tempo.

• The same accompaniment continues

(even after you release the chord in

the left range) until you play the next

chord.

■ Single Finger Chords

The following four chord types can be played in Single Finger mode:

The illustration below shows the key

corresponding to each root note.

• Major

Press the root note of the chord.

• Minor [m]

Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any

black key to the left of it.

• Seventh [7]

Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any

white key to the left of it.

• Minor Seventh [m7]

Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any

white and black keys to the left of it (three keys at once).

Two-note fingerings will produce a chord

based on the previously played chord.

● Fingered 1

To control the Auto Accompaniment, play any chord in the left range

of the keyboard (below and including the split point). Play the melody in

the right range along with the Auto Accompaniment.

• The automatic accompaniment will

sometimes not change when related

chords are played in sequence (e.g.

some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

• If the Clavinova cannot recognize a

chord you play, an asterisk “ * ” will

appear instead of the chord name in

the display.

• Drums-only accompaniment can be

produced by pressing any three con-

secutive keys (e.g., C, C

, D) simulta-

neously. This lets you create dynamic

“drum breaks” in the accompaniment.

A series of dashes “- - -” will appear

instead of a chord name in the display.

● Multi Finger

This method allows you to control the Auto Accompaniment using

either the Single Finger method (described above) or the Fingered 1

method (described below). However, when indicating minor, seventh or

minor seventh chords, it is necessary to play the white key and/or black

key nearest the root note of the chord.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

● Single Finger

To control the Auto Accompaniment, press one, two, or three keys in

the left range of the keyboard (below and including the split point), fol-

lowing the rules described below. Play the melody in the right range

along with the Auto Accompaniment.

CDEFGAB

F# Ab Bb

(Gb)(G#)(A#)

C# Eb

(Db)(D#)

CVP-201

■ Chords in Fingered 1 mode

The chord types below can be played in Fingered 1 mode. For a fin-

gering chart showing all chords in the example key of C, see page 12

of the Reference Booklet.

•

Major

•

Sixth [6]

•

Major seventh [M7]

•

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 (b5)]

•

Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7 (#11)]

•

Added ninth [add 9]

•

Major seventh ninth [M7 (9)]

•

Six ninth [6 (9)]

•

Flatted fifth [(b5)]

•

Augmented [aug]

•

Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]

•

Major seventh augmented [M7 (#5)]

•

Minor [m]

•

Minor sixth [m6]

•

Minor seventh [m7]

•

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]

•

Minor added ninth [m add 9]

•

Minor seventh ninth [m7 (9)]

•

Minor seventh eleventh [m7 (11)]

•

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 (b5)]

•

Minor major seventh [mM7]

•

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7 (9)]

•

Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]

•

Diminished seventh [dim7]

•

Seventh [7]

•

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

•

Seventh ninth [7 (9)]

•

Seventh sharp eleventh [7 (#11)]

•

Seventh added thirteenth [7 (13)]

•

Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]

•

Seventh flatted ninth [7 (b9)]

•

Seventh added flatted thirteenth [7 (b13)]

•

Seventh sharp ninth [7 (#9)]

•

Suspended fourth [sus4]

● Fingered 2

To control the Auto Accompaniment, play chords in the left range of

the keyboard as for Fingered 1. In this mode, however, the lowest note

you play in the will be used as the bass root, as shown at right.

■ Chords in Fingered 2 mode

The Clavinova will recognize the same chord types as listed above for

Fingered 1 mode.

• Although Full Keyboard mode is

designed to work with many types of

music, some arrangements may not

be suitable for use with this feature.

• Chord detection occurs at approxi-

mately 8th-note intervals. Extremely

short chords — less than an 8th note

in length — may not be detected.

Keep in mind…

You can use the Dual and Split modes

together with the Auto Accompaniment.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

On-bass Chords

● Full Keyboard

When the Full Keyboard mode is selected, the Clavinova will automati-

cally create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything

using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You don’t have to worry about

specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will

appear in the display.

C on E

C on G

CVP-201

■ Using the Synchronized Stop Function...................................

The SYNCHRO STOP function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE

display automatically stops the Auto Accompaniment when you’re not

holding down any keys to the left of the split point.

Press the SYNCHRO STOP button to turn the function on.

This function can only be turned on if the

Auto Accompaniment is on and Full

Keyboard mode is not selected.

➔ The SYNCHRO STOP function is highlighted, and the [SYNCHRO]

lamp lights.

The Auto Accompaniment automatically starts when you play in the

left range of the keyboard, and stops when you release it.

This is useful for beginning players who

have difficulty playing in precise time. It is

also effective for creating accompani-

ment “breaks” during the performance.

To turn the function off, press SYNCHRO STOP again.

■ Getting Help With Chords .........................................................................

The CHORD ASSIST function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE

display uses the keyboard guide lamps to show you appropriate

fingerings for chords.

Chord Assistance

The Chord Assistance feature is essen-

tially an electronic “chord book” that

shows you appropriate fingerings for

chords; it is useful when you want to

quickly learn how to play certain chords.

Simply specify the desired chord via the

display, and the fingerings for the Fin-

gered 1 method are indicated by the

keyboard guide lamps.

Z Turn the Chord Assistance function on.

• If the [ACMP ON] button is off, it will

turn on.

• If the split point is set below F

2, it will

automatically be reset to F

• The keyboard guide lamps do not

indicate the split point when Chord

Assistance is on, since they are used

to indicate chord fingerings instead.

Press the CHORD ASSIST button.

➔ The CHORD ASSIST display appears, and the accompaniment

mode automatically changes to Fingered 1.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

CVP-201

X Start the Auto Accompaniment.

Press [START/STOP] or use the Synchronized Start function (page

53) to start the Auto Accompaniment.

C Enter the chord root.

ROOT function

Settings: See sidebar on page 60.

Use the ROOT button to select a root.

➔ The ROOT function is highlighted, and the root changes.

If you hold the ROOT button down, the

INVERT setting may also change.

When the ROOT function is highlighted, you can also use the data

dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a root.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

When the TYPE function is highlighted, you can also use the data dial

or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a chord type.

The following chord types can be specified in the display:

Major [Maj]

Minor [m]

Seventh [7]

Minor seventh [m7]

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]

Sixth [6]

Minor sixth [m6]

Major seventh [M7]

Suspended fourth [sus4]

Augmented [aug]

Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]

Diminished seventh [dim7]

Flatted fifth [(b5)]

Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]

Minor major seventh [mM7]

TYPE function

Settings: See list at left.

Use the TYPE ▼ and ▲ buttons to select a chord type.

➔ The TYPE function is highlighted, and the type changes.

V Enter the chord type.

B Rotate the fingering as desired.

Press INVERT to shift the fingering down the keyboard. Each time

the INVERT button is pressed, the next viable fingering for the chord

appears. The INVERT function displays the inversion number.

CVP-201

N Enter the chord.

• Any chords recognized in Fingered 1

mode can be entered from the key-

board.

• The Clavinova displays the name of

the chord recognized from the key-

board at the left edge of the LCD dis-

play, under the tempo. You can com-

pare this chord root and type displayed

by the ROOT and TYPE functions to

make sure you’re fingering the chord

correctly. When the root of the chord

being played corresponds to one of the

black keys on the keyboard, the root

may be displayed as either flat or

sharp; for example, B

may also be

displayed as A

(see the sidebar on

page 60 for details).

• A flashing keyboard guide lamp indi-

cates a note which may be omitted.

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the fingering for the selected

chord. At this point you can either play the chord on the keyboard or

press the ENTER button to hear the accompaniment play it.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

M Stop the Auto Accompaniment.

When you’re done with Chord Assistance, press [START/STOP] or

[ENDING] to stop the accompaniment.

< Turn Chord Assistance off.

To turn Chord Assistance off, press [EXIT] or [ACMP ON].

➔ The main display appears. If you press [ACMP ON], the Auto Ac-

companiment is turned off at the same time.

SPLIT POINT function

• Settings: Any key of the keyboard

• Basic setting: F

Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the split point.

Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.

• The split point cannot be set when Full

Keyboard mode is selected.

• Changing the split point here also

changes it for the Split mode (see

page 39).

➔ The selected key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function.

F 2

C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0

Right range

Left range

If the Auto Accompaniment or the Split mode (page 36) is on, the

keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected split point lights.

■ Changing the Split Point ............................................................................

You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the ACCOMPANIMENT

MODE display to set the split point at any desired key position. The keys

to the left of (and including) the split point control the chords played by

the Auto Accompaniment in every accompaniment mode except Full

Keyboard.

CVP-201

The Clavinova has five accompaniment parts: Rhythm, Bass, Chord,

Pad, and Phrase.

Adjusting Individual Part Levels

• The overall accompaniment playback

volume can be adjusted using the

[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider.

• By adjusting the volume balance of the

various parts, or setting the volume of

some parts to 0, you can create varia-

tions on the basic style accompani-

ment.

• Some styles may not use all five ac-

companiment parts.

• You can also adjust the level of reverb

that is applied to the Auto Accompani-

ment parts. See page 43 for details.

The volume settings for the five accompaniment parts can be adjusted

individually in the MIXER display page.

Part volume relationships

• The volume level of each Auto Accom-

paniment part is relative to the [ACMP/

SONG VOLUME] setting.

• The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] setting

is relative to the [MASTER VOLUME]

setting.

Z Press the [MIXER] button........................................................................

➔ The lamp lights, and the MIXER page appears.

X Select a part...........................................................................................................

Press the LCD button for the part whose level you want to set.

RHYTHM

This part forms the basis of the accompaniment. The Rhythm

part usually plays one of the drum kits.

BASS

The Bass part uses voices appropriate to each style, including

acoustic bass and synth bass.

CHORD

The Chord part provides appropriate rhythmic chordal accompa-

niment for each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal

instruments here.

PAD

The Pad part plays long chords where necessary, using sus-

tained instruments such as strings, organ, and choir.

PHRASE

The Phrase part is used for embellishments such as punchy

brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the

accompaniment more interesting.

➔ The selected function is highlighted.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

MIXER

FUNCTION

CVP-201

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

C Set the volume level......................................................................................

Part volume levels

• Range: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.)

• Basic setting: 110

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to adjust the volume level. You

can also increase the level by holding down the button you used to select

the part.

You can set the volume of the highlighted part to 0 by pressing and

quickly releasing its button. Press and release the button a second time to

restore the previous value.

To reset the highlighted part’s volume to the basic setting of 110,

simultaneously press the [–] and [+] buttons.

V Repeat steps Xand C...............................................................................

Repeat the preceding steps to set the level for other parts. (You can

also select several parts and adjust their volume settings simultaneously.)

B Exit the MIXER display. ..............................................................................

To exit the function, press the [MIXER] button again, or press

[EXIT].

➔ The lamp turns off, and the main display appears.

MIXER

FUNCTION

EXIT

CVP-201

The Clavinova has many other features and functions that make

the use of the Auto Accompaniment even more convenient and

enjoyable. With these functions you can easily select panel

settings to suit a certain type of music, have the Clavinova play

harmony to your melody line.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

The Clavinova’s built-in Music Database gives you a convenient way

to select the style, voice, and effect settings that will suit a particular type

of music. Just select one of the 463 entries in the Music Database; the

Clavinova does the rest!

For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 11 of the

Reference Booklet.

Z Display the Music Database.................................................................

Music Database

• When you display the Music Database,

the Clavinova automatically recalls a

panel setup that uses the current style.

(The name of this setup is highlighted

in the Music Database display.) If you

want to use the selected setup, you

can simply skip to step 4 of this proce-

dure.

• The Automatic Accompaniment also

turns on when you display the Music

Database. If you access the Music

Database before starting the style, the

Synchronized Start function (page 53)

is also turned on.

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

➔ The lamp lights, and the MUSIC DATABASE display appears.

The MUSIC DATABASE display contains a listing of panel setups that

can be sorted either by style or alphabetically. The name of the style that is

used by the currently highlighted setup is shown at the upper right edge of

the display.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE R EW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONY

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONY

Highlighted

setup

Style name

CVP-201

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

X Sort the list, if necessary.........................................................................

To display the panel setups for a specific

style group, simply press the correspond-

ing STYLE button. The menu is automati-

cally sorted by style, and a panel setup

that uses the currently selected style in

the chosen group is highlighted.

Press the SORT button to switch the highlighted setting between

STYLE and A–Z.

C Select and recall a panel setup.........................................................

The Harmony function will not be turned

on if the Full Keyboard mode is selected,

even if the selected Music Database

setup includes “Harmony On.”

Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to highlight the desired

panel setup in the Music Database list, then press the SET button to recall

the highlighted setup.

➔ The style, voice, and effect settings change automatically.

Once you have selected a panel setup from the Music Database, you

can change the style, voice and effect settings to suit your preferences.

You can also use the Registration function (page 89) to save the panel

setup in the Clavinova’s memory.

V Return to the main display.....................................................................

Press [EXIT] to exit the Music Database menu display.

➔ The previous display appears.

➔ When STYLE is highlighted, the menu list is sorted by style, and a

panel setup that uses the currently selected style is highlighted.

➔ When A–Z is highlighted, the menu is sorted alphabetically.

B Turn off the Music Database................................................................

When you’re done using the Music Database setup, press the [MU-

SIC DATABASE] button again.

➔ The [MUSIC DATABASE] lamp turns off, and the panel settings

you were using before you accessed the Music Database are re-

stored.

CVP-201

Harmony

This feature adds harmony or embellishment notes to the melody you

play using the main voice in the right range of the keyboard. The har-

mony notes are produced automatically to match chords played with

Auto Accompaniment.

■ Adding Harmony.................................................................................................

Since the Harmony function can be turned on and off while playing,

you can add “spice” and professional polish to your performance by ap-

plying harmony to selected phrases as you play.

Z Turn the Harmony function on.

• The Harmony feature cannot be turned

on when Full Keyboard is selected as

the accompaniment mode (page 59).

• The Harmony feature can be used

while playing back the intro or ending,

or while the Auto Accompaniment is

off, if one of the following harmony

types (page 70) is selected: Octave,

1+5, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill.

Press the [HARMONY] button.

➔ The lamp lights.

X Play the keyboard.

Play the keyboard along with the Auto Accompaniment.

• With some Harmony types the voice

used for the Harmony will be different

from the currently selected main voice.

• When chords are played in the right-

hand section of the keyboard, the

harmony will be applied to the last note

played.

C Turn the Harmony function off.

Using the Pedals

• If you set the LEFT PEDAL function to

HARMONY (page 138), the Clavinova

will play harmony only while the left

pedal is pressed.

• If you use the left pedal to control the

harmony, that pedal will have no effect

when the Harmony function is off (i.e.,

when the [HARMONY] lamp is not lit).

Press the [HARMONY] button again.

➔ The lamp turns off.

■ Displaying the Harmony Settings.....................................................

You can change the harmony type, the volume of the harmony voice,

and other harmony settings in the HARMONY display page.

To display the HARMONY page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then

[HARMONY].

➔ The HARMONY display appears.

➾

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONY

DIRECT ACCESS

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONY

CVP-201

■ Selecting a Harmony Type........................................................................

You can change the type of harmony that is played using the TYPE

function in the HARMONY display.

TYPE function

• Settings: See table on this page.

• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.

Use the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a harmony type, or select

the TYPE function and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.

• Some harmony types (indicated by a

“

❍

” in the Speed column of the table at

left) have a speed setting that can be

adjusted. See the next topic for details.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

Type Speed

Duet –

Trio –

Block –

4 Part –

Country –

Octave –

1+5 –

Echo ❍

Tremolo ❍

Trill ❍

Strumming –

Add Jazz Gtr –

Add Brass –

Add Strings –

In The Forest –

Harmony Types

➔ The selected harmony type is highlighted.

To restore the basic setting for the currently selected main voice,

press the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons simultane-

ously.

Since the basic setting of the TYPE function depends on the currently

selected main voice, a different harmony type may be selected automati-

cally if you change the main voice selection.

CVP-201

■ Changing the Harmony Speed.............................................................

You can change the speed of the harmony notes played by the Echo,

Tremolo, and Trill harmony types using the SPEED function in the

HARMONY display.

SPEED function

• Settings: 4, 6, 8, 12 (Echo)

8, 12, 16, 32 (Tremolo)

12, 16, 24, 32 (Trill)

• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.

Z Select the SPEED function.

Press the LCD button under the SPEED function.

➔ The SPEED function is highlighted.

X Change the SPEED setting.

Use the SPEED button, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to

change the value of the SPEED function.

■ Changing the Harmony Volume..........................................................

You can change the volume of the harmony notes using the VOLUME

function in the HARMONY display.

VOLUME function

• Settings: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.)

• Basic setting: Depends on main voice.

Z Select the VOLUME function.

Press the one of the LCD buttons under the VOLUME function.

➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted.

X Change the VOLUME setting.

Use the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+]

buttons to change the value of the VOLUME function.

To restore the VOLUME function to its basic setting for the currently

selected main voice, press the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–]

and [+] buttons simultaneously.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

CVP-201

One Touch Setting

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

The Clavinova’s convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy

for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style you’re

playing. Each style has four preprogrammed panel setups that you can

select by pressing a single button.

For a list of the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to page 11 of the

Reference Booklet.

The One Touch Setting function cannot

be used with styles in the [DISK/CUS-

TOM] group.

Z Select a style.........................................................................................................

Select the desired style in the normal way (see page 49).

X Make sure the ONE TOUCH SETTING function is on.

If necessary, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button.

➔ The [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button lamp lights.

C Select a panel setup......................................................................................

• When you select a panel setup, the

Auto Accompaniment turns on auto-

matically. If you select a panel setup

before starting the style, the Synchro-

nized Start function (page 53) will also

turn on.

• The Harmony function will not be

turned on if the Full Keyboard mode is

selected, even if the selected One

Touch Setting setup includes “Har-

mony On.”

Press one of the four numbered buttons under REGISTRATION/ONE

TOUCH SETTING.

➔ The voice and effect settings change automatically.

Once you have selected a panel setup using the One Touch Setting

function, you can change the voice and effect settings to suit your prefer-

ences. You can also use the Registration function (page 89) to save the

panel setup in the Clavinova’s memory.

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

The Clavinova’s pre-programmed factory

default panel settings can be stored in a

registration memory to allow easy recall

of the pre-programmed panel settings.

Using the REGISTRATION function,

preprogrammed settings initially present

when the Clavinova’s power is first turned

on) to [REGIST A-1] (see page 89). Now

when you select [A-1] all panel settings

will be conveniently returned to their

factory default settings.

CVP-201

The Clavinova lets you create custom accompaniment styles

that you can recall and play back at any time, just like the presets.

Up to four custom styles can be maintained in the Clavinova’s

memory at the same time, and any number can be saved to disk

for later reloading and use.

Creating Your Own Styles

Recording a Custom Style

Use the following procedure to record your own custom styles.

Z Select the DISK/CUSTOM style group.......................................

• One temporary style (named

TEMP.STYLE) is automatically loaded

into the DISK/CUSTOM style memory

when the power is turned on.

• If you have loaded other style data

(see page 87), you can select any of

the styles from the DISK/CUSTOM

STYLE menu to serve as the basis for

your new custom style.

Press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button.

➔ The lamp lights, and the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display appears.

X Select the CUSTOM STYLE function. ............................................

Press the CUSTOM STYLE button.

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

CVP-201

Creating Your Own Styles

C Select a source style....................................................................................

Select a preset style that is close to the style you want to create. Preset

style selection is carried out in the normal way (page 49).

You can also use the style already selected in the DISK/CUSTOM

STYLE display as the basis for your new style, or select a different

DISK/CUSTOM style just as you would a preset style.

B Change the beat and section length...........................................

If you want to create a style with a different time signature than the

selected style, or change the number of measures in the selected section,

press the PAGE [>] button.

V Select the section you want to record. .....................................

• In the CUSTOM STYLE display, the

variations and patterns that make up a

style are referred to as “sections.”

• A custom style includes only one intro

section, one fill-in section, and one

ending section.

• The custom style’s intro, fill-in, and

ending sections are based on the

corresponding patterns for the style

variation (MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, or

MAIN D) that was selected when the

CUSTOM STYLE button was pressed

(page 73).

In page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, press the SECT. button as

many times as necessary to display the section you want to record:

MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, MAIN D, INTRO, FILL IN, or ENDING.

➔ The SECT. function is highlighted, and each section is displayed in

turn. The Clavinova plays the currently displayed section repeatedly.

➔ Page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display appears.

➔ The “Select a source style” message is displayed for a few

seconds, then replaced by page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.

The style that was selected in the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display

begins playing.

CVP-201

BEAT function

• Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5

• Basic setting: Depends on style.

Press the BEAT button to select a different time signature.

➔ The “Clear style?” message is displayed.

Clear style?

Since the patterns of the selected

style will not match the new beat,

you will have to completely clear

the style and start recording from

scratch if you change the time

signature.

➾ Press OK to clear the style, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style

has been cleared, you can use the BEAT button, the data dial, or

the [–] and [+] buttons to select a new time signature.

Creating Your Own Styles

● Changing the beat:

● Changing the section length:

MEAS. function

• Settings: 1 — 8

• Basic setting: Depends on style.

Press the MEAS. button to change the number of measures in the

current section.

➔ The “Clear section?” message is displayed.

Clear section?

• You will have to clear all parts of the

currently selected section and start

recording from scratch if you change

the number of measures.

• The “Clear section?” message will not

be displayed if you have already

cleared the section by changing the

beat, as described above.

➾ Press OK to clear the section, or CANCEL to abort. Once the

style has been cleared, you can use the MEAS. button, the data

dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to set the section length.

● When you’re done here:

Once the BEAT and/or MEAS. parameters have been set as re-

quired, press the PAGE [<] button to return to page 1 of the CUSTOM

STYLE display.

The length of the FILL IN section can

only be set to one measure.

CVP-201

➔ The part number is highlighted. If you have selected a part other

than R1 or R2, the “Clear part?” message will be displayed.

The R1 part is initially selected and set to

record.

Any part you select can be set to record by using the rightmost LCD

button to select REC after selecting the part.

R1 Rhythm 1

R2 Rhythm 2

Bs Bass

C1 Chord 1

C2 Chord 2

Pd Pad

P1 Phrase 1

P2 Phrase 2

Recording part

• Only one part can be set to record.

• All other parts will be set to PLAY (the

part number is surrounded by a box) or

OFF (only the part number is dis-

played).

Part containing no dataPlayback part

OFF

Clear part?

• If the source style is a preset style or a

style loaded from an optional Style File

disk, parts other than R1 and R2 must

be cleared before they can be re-

corded.

• The “Clear part?” message will not be

displayed if the selected part does not

contain any data.

➾ Press OK to clear the part and continue, or CANCEL to abort.

The preset voice for the part being re-

corded is initially selected.

At this point you can also select the voice you want to record the part

with. Select the voice as you would the main keyboard voice (see page

29).

Part Voices that can be used

R1 Any drum or SFX kit in PERCUSSION group

R2 Any

Others Any except a drum kit or SFX kit

Creating Your Own Styles

N Select the part you want to record................................................

Use the PART LCD button, the data dial, or [–] and [+] buttons to

select the part you want to record.

M Select the voice for the part. .................................................................

CVP-201

< Record the selected part...................................................................

• Playback of the custom style can be

started and stopped by pressing the

[START/STOP] button. (Data cannot

be recorded while playback is

stopped.)

• All notes are automatically stopped at

the end of the style (i.e., at the point

between repeats when recording). It is

therefore not advisable to record over

this point.

You can now record new notes in the selected part by playing the

keyboard at the appropriate timing. Record non-percussion parts in C

major seventh (CM7), since the custom style is recorded as a C major

seventh pattern.

If you want to create a totally new part from scratch, press the

CLEAR LCD button to clear the selected part before beginning to

record. If both the R1 and R2 parts are cleared, the metronome will

sound to provide a timing guide. (The metronome sound is not re-

corded, and will stop as soon as the custom style is stored.)

Creating Your Own Styles

When recording a drum kit voice in part R1 or R2, you can clear a

single drum instrument from the part by pressing the key corresponding

to the instrument to be cleared while holding down the C1 key on the

keyboard. (The C1 key is labeled “CANCEL.”) The metronome timing

guide can also be cleared in this way.

Another useful recording aid is the SOLO LCD button: when this

button is pressed and highlighted, only the selected part will sound. Press

the SOLO button again to turn the solo function off and hear all parts in

the selected section.

CVP-201

? Repeat until the custom style is complete...........................

> Quantize the recorded part, if necessary...............................

You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by using the PART

QUANTIZE functions in page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to

align all the notes to a specified beat. Press the PAGE [>] button to dis-

play the function, then press the middle LCD button to select the

quantize size:

Once the required quantize size has been selected, press the START

LCD button to quantize the current part. The part will begin to play using

the new timing, and the START button will change to UNDO, allowing

you to undo the quantize operation and return to the pre-quantized data if

the results are not as you expected. You will not be able to UNDO once

another button has been pressed.

During custom style recording, no MIXER

display is available.

Repeat steps 4 through 9 to record other parts for the currently se-

lected section.

Repeat steps 4 through 10 to record other sections, until all sections

have been recorded.

[ Name the custom style..............................................................................

When your custom style is complete, use the PAGE buttons to select

page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the STYLE NAME

LCD button to display the NAME page.

Creating Your Own Styles

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

CVP-201

Use the > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the charac-

ter you want to change (style names can be up to 12 characters in

length). Use the data dial and/or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the char-

acter you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then

press the CH.SET LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor

position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The BACK

LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete the preceding

character.

When the name is complete, press OK to register the name for the

current custom style, or CANCEL to abort.

Creating Your Own Styles

Store the custom style...............................................................................

The current tempo setting at the time the

custom style is stored becomes the

preset tempo for that style.

Press the STORE LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE

display to store the current custom style in the Clavinova’s memory.

➔ The Clavinova displays a message asking you to confirm your

decision to store the style.

➾ Use the MEMORY No. ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–]

and [+] buttons to select the memory number (1 through 4) where

you want to store the custom style, then press OK to store or

CANCEL to abort.

If the selected memory number already

contains a style, the style name will

appear next to the memory number. The

existing style will be overwritten when a

new style is stored.

CVP-201

In addition to the various functions described in the basic custom

style recording procedure, above, the CUSTOM STYLE display pages

include several other functions that you may find useful when creating

custom styles.

■ RECALL SECTION function......................................................................

This function makes it possible to recall the last-stored version of the

currently selected section (all parts of the section are recalled). Simply

press the RECALL SECTION LCD button in page 2 of the CUSTOM

STYLE display. If the Clavinova cannot recall the preceding operation

(i.e., after time signature has been changed), the “Can’t recall!” mes-

sage will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return to the previous

display.

Exit when done...................................................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the CUSTOM STYLE display and

return to the main display.

Other Custom Style Functions

■ STYLE CLEAR function.................................................................................

Press the STYLE CLEAR LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM

STYLE display to completely clear the current custom style. The “Are

you sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to clear the style, or

NO to cancel the change.

● Be Sure to Save Your Data!

Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned

off, so be sure to save your custom style before turning the power off

(see page 82).

EXIT

Creating Your Own Styles

CVP-201

■ Volume and Effects.........................................................................................

Page 4 of the CUSTOM STYLE display includes several functions

that let you set the volume, reverb, chorus type and depth, and pan for

each part of each custom style section.

Z Select the section and part.

Use the SECT. function to select a section (or select ALL for all sec-

tions), and the PART function to select a part (or select ALL for all

parts).

X Select the parameter you want to set.

The third LCD button selects the parameter to be set for the current

section and part. Choose from VOLUME, REVERB, CHORUS, or

PAN.

C Select the chorus type.

If you selected CHORUS in step 2, the TYPE function is displayed

above the fourth LCD button. Use this function to select the chorus

type you want to apply to the current section and part.

Chorus Type List

• CHORUS 1

• CHORUS 2

• CHORUS 3

• CELESTE 1

• CELESTE 2

• CELESTE 3

• FLANGER 1

• FLANGER 2

• OFF

Creating Your Own Styles

CVP-201

V Set the value or depth of the selected parameter.

• The reverb type used for the custom

style are determined by the style that

was selected as the basis for custom

style creation.

• Normally the VALUE and chorus TYPE

settings from the preset style are ini-

tially selected. If the PART function is

set to ALL, the preset values for part

R1 are displayed. If the SECTION

function is set to ALL, the preset val-

ues for MAIN A are displayed.

• The word “OTHERS” may appear as

the chorus type if the preset style uses

a chorus type other than those in the

list. The OTHERS setting cannot be re-

selected once you select a different

chorus type.

The VALUE (or DEPTH) function displayed above the rightmost

LCD button sets the amount or depth for the parameter selected in

step 2.

When VOLUME is selected, the SECTION setting is fixed at ALL

and the VALUE range is from –50 to +50 (this value is relative to

the preset volume of the source style). When the REVERB or CHO-

RUS parameter is selected, the DEPTH can be set in a range from 0

to 127. When PAN is selected, the VALUE function can be set in a

range from L10 (full left) to C (center) to R10 (full right).

B Repeat as necessary.

Repeat the preceding steps to set other parameters for each part and

section in the custom style.

■ Saving Styles to Disk ...................................................................................

Page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display lets you save custom styles

on a disk. You can save custom styles individually, or in a complete set of

up to four styles.

After inserting a properly formatted disk (page 111) in the Clavinova’s

disk drive, use the MEMORY No. ▼ and ▲ buttons to select the custom

style you want to save to disk, or select ALL to save a complete set of up

to four custom styles. When this is done, press the SAVE LCD button to

start saving the data to disk. At this point the SAVE display appears.

Enter a name for the style file. The procedure for entering the

filename is the same as that used to enter a name for a custom style (page

140). Press SAVE when the name has been entered. If a file with the

same name already exists, the “Same name! Overwrite?” mes-

sage will be displayed. Press OK to overwrite the existing file, or CAN-

CEL to abort the save operation.

Creating Your Own Styles

CVP-201

Custom styles must be stored in the Clavinova’s memory before they

can be saved to a disk. If a custom style has not been stored and you at-

tempt to save it to disk, the “Store in memory before saving

to disk” message will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return

to page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. Store the custom style (see

step 12 on page 79), then try saving again.

■ Deleting Style Files.........................................................................................

Style files can also be deleted from a disk using the DELETE func-

tion on page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.

After inserting a disk that contains style files in the Clavinova disk

drive, press the DELETE LCD button. Use the FILE ▲ and ▼ buttons to

select the style file you want to delete from the disk. The “Are you

sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to delete the style file, or

NO to cancel.

■ Exiting Custom Style Mode...................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode and return to

the main display.

Style files can be loaded from disk using

the ALL LOAD and SINGLE LOAD func-

tions, as described in the “Loading Style

Files” section (page 86).

Creating Your Own Styles

CVP-201

Once created, your original custom styles can be selected for play-

back by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE

▲ and ▼ LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select

the custom style you want to play. The selected style can then be played

in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 51).

Playing Back Your Custom Styles

Since only one intro pattern, one fill-in

pattern, and one ending pattern can be

recorded for each custom style, no intro,

fill-in, or ending variations are produced

during playback.

The following messages may appear when creating and storing a style

in Custom Style mode.

■ Memory Full During Recording.........................................................

This message will be displayed if the memory becomes full during

recording or editing.

Messages in Custom Style Mode

Press OK to return to the CUSTOM STYLE display, then simplify the

style by clearing a part, etc.

■ Insufficient Memory To Store...............................................................

This message will be displayed if there is not enough memory to per-

form a store operation.

In this case it will be necessary to either delete a style you don’t need,

or simplify the style you are currently recording. Press CANCEL to re-

turn to the CUSTOM STYLE display and simplify the current style (by

clearing a part, etc.), or DELETE to delete one or more styles.

If you select the DELETE function, the “Select style to de-

lete” message will be displayed:

The amount of memory being used by

each style is displayed next to the style

name (in approximate kilobytes). You can

refer to this amount to judge how much

memory (out of the total 100 KB) will

become available when a particular style

is deleted.

Creating Your Own Styles

CVP-201

Use the MEMORY No. ▼ and ▲ buttons to select the style you

want to delete, then press OK to delete the style, or CANCEL to cancel

the operation.

If the Clavinova displays the “Can’t delete this style!” mes-

sage when you try to delete a style, it is because you have tried to delete

the style that your custom style was based on. If this happens, press OK

to return to the “Select style to delete” display, then select a dif-

ferent style to delete.

■ Exit Before Store...............................................................................................

If you press [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode before

storing the style, the Clavinova will display a message like the one

shown below:

Select a memory number and press YES to store the style and exit,

press NO to exit without storing the style, or press CANCEL to return to

the Custom Style mode.

■ Style Change Before Store.....................................................................

If you want to select a different source

style without storing the current style, exit

the Custom Style mode without storing

the style (see “Exit Before Store” above),

then re-enter the Custom Style mode.

If you attempt to select a different source style before storing the style

you’ve just edited, the following display will appear:

Select a memory number and press OK to store the style and select a

new source style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.

Creating Your Own Styles

CVP-201

You can load and play style files created in the Style File Format

either from optional Yamaha “Style File” disks, or from disks

containing custom style files you’ve created yourself.

Using Style Files

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original auto-accompaniment for-

mat, which has evolved through years of development and refinement.

The Style File Format features a unique conversion system that allows

you to play exceptionally high-quality accompaniments with a variety of

chord types. In addition to the internal styles, the Style File Format lets

you use other sophisticated styles from optional Style File disks, as well

as styles that were created and saved to disk in the Custom Style mode.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

DISK

CUSTOM

About the Yamaha Style File Format

Style files created for Clavinova models

prior to the CVP-201 may have slightly

different formats. If you try loading such

files, the data may not play back as

expected. (This also applies to the use of

CVP-201 style data by earlier-model

Clavinovas.)

Loading Styles from a Disk

Z Insert a disk............................................................................................................

If a disk containing both song data and

style files is inserted, the SONG PLAY

display will automatically appear. If this

happens, press the [SONG] button or the

[EXIT] button to return to the main dis-

play, then press the [DISK/CUSTOM]

button.

Insert a disk containing style files into the disk drive. The [DISK IN

USE] lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the

disk. When a Style File disk is inserted, the STYLE FILE LOAD display

(see step 2 below) will appear automatically.

If the disk is already inserted and the STYLE FILE LOAD display is

not showing, press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button to open the DISK/

CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the LOAD SINGLE button.

To load a set of four style files that was created by selecting ALL as

the memory number when the files were saved in Custom Style mode (see

page 82), press the ALL LOAD LCD button rather than the LOAD SIN-

GLE button.

CVP-201

X Select a style file...............................................................................................

• If a tempo is set prior to loading the

style, that tempo becomes the default

for the loaded style.

• Some styles are too large to preview

with the LISTEN function. In this case

the “Too much data for LISTEN func-

tion! Please load data.” message will

be displayed. If this happens, load the

style directly as in step 4.

• The Auto Accompaniment is automati-

cally turned on when the LOAD SIN-

GLE button is pressed, and the style is

played back automatically with the

Auto Accompaniment in C Major when

the LISTEN LCD button is pressed.

You can change the chord or try play-

ing on the keyboard while previewing a

style.

Select the desired style using the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.

You can preview the selected style by pressing the LISTEN LCD

button. (The LISTEN function is not available in the ALL LOAD dis-

play.) To stop listening, press the LISTEN LCD button again, or press

the [START/STOP] button.

• If the selected memory number already

contains a style, the name of that style

will appear above the MEMORY and

LOAD functions in the display. The

existing style will be overwritten when

a new style is loaded. (One pre-pro-

grammed temporary style is automati-

cally loaded into the [DISK/CUSTOM]

memory whenever the power is turned

on.)

Use the MEMORY LCD button to select the memory number to

which the selected style file is to be loaded (1 through 4), then press the

LOAD LCD button to load the style file.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select and load other style files.

Using Style

C Select a memory number and load the style.....................

It is not necessary to select a memory number when ALL LOAD is

selected in step 1. Simply press OK to load or CANCEL to abort.

If there is not enough memory to load the specified style file, the

“Not enough memory! Delete an unneeded style?” mes-

sage will be displayed. In this case it will be necessary to delete a style

you don’t need before loading the new style. Use the MEMORY No. ▼

and ▲ buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then

press DELETE to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort.

• The ALL LOAD display is as follows:

When ALL LOAD is executed, all data

in the four memories will be replaced

by new data.

• The amount of memory being used by

each style is displayed next to the style

name (in approximate kilobytes). You

can refer to this amount to judge how

much memory (out of the total 100 KB)

will become available when a particular

style is deleted.

CVP-201

Playing Loaded Style Files

Using Style Files

V Eject the disk when you’re done.....................................................

CAUTION

The [DISK IN USE] lamp will light while

the style is being loaded. NEVER

attempt to remove a disk while the

[DISK IN USE] lamp is lit.

The LISTEN, LOAD, [EXIT], and STYLE

buttons will not function while the style

data is being loaded (i.e., while the [DISK

IN USE] lamp is lit).

When you’ve finished with the Style File disk, press the disk drive

EJECT button to remove it and return to the normal play mode display.

You can return to the normal play mode without removing the disk by

pressing the [EXIT] button.

Loaded disk styles will be retained in

memory only until the power is turned off.

Once loaded, style files can be selected for playback by pressing the

[DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE ▲ and ▼ LCD but-

tons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the style you want

to play. The selected style can then be played in exactly the same way as

the preset styles (page 51).

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

CVP-201

The Registration feature lets you store complete panel setups

that you can recall whenever needed. A total of 20 setups (5

banks containing 4 memories each) can be registered in the

Clavinova’s memory.

CHAPTER 6: Registrations

Using Registrations

(Registering and Recalling Panel Setups)

Use the following procedure to store a panel setup as a registration in

the Clavinova’s memory.

Z Set up the controls as needed............................................................

For a list of the settings that are memorized by the Registration func-

tion, refer to page 11 of the Reference Booklet.

Storing a Panel Setup

Registration bank

• Range: A — E

• Basic setting: A

Use the [BANK +] and [BANK –] buttons to select the desired bank.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

➔ The selected bank is displayed in the upper left corner of main

display.

X Select a registration bank........................................................................

Registration bank

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

CVP-201

C Register the panel setup...........................................................................

Registration Memory

• Range: 1 — 4 (each bank)

• Basic setting: None

While holding down the [REGISTRATION] button, press one of the

buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH

SETTING corresponding to the registration memory where you want to

save the setup.

➔ The number of the selected registration memory appears next to

the bank name in the upper left corner of the main display. The

panel settings that were previously stored in the selected registra-

tion are cleared and replaced by the new settings.

• Pre-programmed settings are initially

stored in all registration memories

when the Clavinova’s power is first

turned on.

• By default, the registration settings are

preserved even when the Clavinova’s

power is turned off (see page 152).

You 5can also save individual registra-

tions (or complete sets of 20 registra-

tions) to floppy disk for future recall

(see page 139).

Recalling the Registered Panel Settings

Z Press the [REGISTRATION] button...............................................

➔ The [REGISTRATION] lamp lights.

X Select a bank........................................................................................................

Use the [BANK +] and [BANK –] buttons to select the bank that con-

tains the desired registration.

➔ The selected bank is displayed in the upper left corner of the main

display.

C Select a registration.

Press one of the buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRA-

TION/ONE TOUCH SETTING corresponding to the registration

memory you want to recall.

Registration number

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

Using Registrations

CVP-201

➔ The number of the recalled registration appears next to the

bank name in the upper left corner of in the main display.

A pencil icon will appear to the right of the registration number

in the display as soon as any change is made to the panel buttons or

settings. The pencil icon is displayed to remind you that the current

panel settings are different from those stored by the Registration

function.

• Registered panel settings are not recalled

when a bank is selected. The settings are

recalled only when one of the numbered

buttons ([1] through [4]) is pressed.

• When the LEFT PEDAL function is set to

REGISTRATION (see page 138), the left

pedal can be used to select the registration

memories in sequential order (A1 through

E4), letting you recall a different registration

each time the pedal is pressed. However,

other left pedal settings saved by the Regis-

tration function cannot be recalled in this

case.

You can use the Registration Freeze function to prevent certain panel

settings from being changed when a Registration is recalled. This allows

you to recall various registrations while using the Auto Accompaniment

without suddenly changing the style or volume settings.

Z Open the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display. .....................

Protecting Panel Settings

For a list of the settings in each freeze

category, see page 11 in the Reference

Booklet.

Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REGISTRATION].

➾

➔ The REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display appears.

Categories to be frozen are marked by an asterisk (*) in the menu

listing. Also, the ON setting (in the ON/OFF function over the middle

LCD button) is highlighted when a category to be frozen is selected.

Freeze categories

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

DIRECT ACCESS

Edit symbol

Using Registrations

The Clavinova’s pre-programmed factory

default panel settings can be stored in a regis-

tration memory to allow easy recall of the pre-

programmed panel settings. Using the REG-

ISTRATION function, register the factory

default settings (the preprogrammed settings

initially present when the Clavinova’s power is

first turned on) to [REGIST A-1] (see page

89). Now when you select [A-1] all panel

settings will be conveniently returned to their

factory default settings.

CVP-201

X Indicate the categories to be frozen.............................................

Freeze Categories

• Settings: ON, OFF

• Basic setting: ON (ACMP SETTING)

OFF (others)

Backup of last settings: ON

Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to

select a category, then press the ON/OFF button to mark or unmark the

selected category.

C Turn the Freeze function on or off.................................................

Press the FREEZE LCD button to freeze or unfreeze the categories

you marked in step 2.

FREEZE

• Settings: ON (highlighted),

OFF (unhighlighted)

• Basic setting: OFF

• Backup of last setting: ON

To exit the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display and return to the

main display, press [EXIT].

➔ The FREEZE function is highlighted when the marked categories

are frozen. When the Freeze function is off, the settings in all cat-

egories are not protected.

V Exit the display. ...................................................................................................

Repeat this step to mark or unmark other categories, as needed.

Using Registrations

CVP-201

CHAPTER 7: Song Control

Song Playback

The Clavinova can play back songs recorded using the Song

Record function (page 110), as well as song data included on

various commercially available software disks. You can also play

along on the keyboard as the songs play back. Moreover, when

song data software includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the

display during playback.

• See “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” (page 9)

for information on using floppy disks.

• The Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs recorded on a single disk.

Any songs exceeding this number will not be available for playback.

• Playback data is normally not output via MIDI. However, you can set

the Clavinova to output song data using the Song Transmission func-

tion in the FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display (page 150).

• In addition to songs you’ve recorded yourself, the CVP-201 can play

back commercially available disks of Yamaha DOC software, XG soft-

ware, and Disklavier PianoSoft as well as GM software. See “Playing

Other Types of Music Data” on page 104.

• Consult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is com-

patible with the Lyric Display function of the Clavinova.

Z Enter the Song Play mode. .................................................................

Gently insert the included “Music Software Collection” disk or a

disk containing songs you’ve recorded yourself into the disk drive.

Make sure to insert the disk face up in correct direction, as shown in

the illustration, until it clicks into place. The Song Play mode is auto-

matically called up when a song disk is inserted in the disk drive.

Song Playback

The Song Play mode is not automatically

engaged if the disk is inserted when one of

the disk-related FUNCTION displays (page

139) or the CUSTOM STYLE display (page

74) is showing.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

SON G

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

Sliding shutter

Label

The LCD screens used in this Owner’s Manual are for instuctional purposes only.

Song names, etc., will appear differently depending on the disk you use.

CVP-201

➔ The DISK IN USE lamp lights while the Clavinova reads and iden-

tifies the disk. Once the disk has been identified, the SONG PLAY

[MAIN] display (display page 1) appears and the [SONG] lamp

lights.

If a song disk has been inserted but the Song Play mode is not en-

gaged, press the [SONG] button.

➔ The [SONG] lamp lights. Press the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to

select the first page, if the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not

shown.

X Select a song number. ................................................................................

Select the desired song number for playback by using the SONG but-

ton, data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.

➔ The selected song number, name, current tempo and the file icon

which indicates the type of the file are displayed.

Song numbers 1 through 99 are dis-

played, including song numbers that

contain no song data. However, no song

names are displayed for song numbers

that contain no data.

Select “ALL” if you want all songs on the disk to be played in order.

Select “RANDOM” if you want all songs on the disk to be played at

random. For either selection “ALL” or “RANDOM” the songs will be

repeated until playback is stopped.

● File Icons

There are four icons (shown below) that indicate the type of the file.

• Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibil-

ity” (page 172) for information on file

formats.

• Icons are not shown for GM song

files or song data files recorded with

CVP models other than the CVP-109/

107/105/700/103/201, the CVP-98/

96/600, or the CVP-94/92.

Song Playback

Icons File Type

XG/SMF format file

DOC/ESEQ format file

Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft or XG/ESEQ file

Song data recorded with the CVP-201

Current voice for the keyboard

Tempo

Selected song

number/name

File icon

CVP-201

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the SONG PLAY

[LIST] display (display page 3), to view the entire list of the song names

in the disk. The desired song can be selected easily by using the data dial

or the [–] and [+] buttons. Up to eight song titles are shown in the display

at a time. If more songs are on the disk, the next eight titles will appear

when you scroll past the last title shown in the display.

When nothing appears in the song

name location…

This indicates that there is no song data

for this song number.

Repeat Playback from a Specific Song

If you first select ALL in the SONG PLAY

[MAIN] display, and then select a song in

the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display

page 3), all songs will be repeatedly

played back starting from the selected

song.

Repeat Playback of a Single Song

If you select a song in the SONG PLAY

[MAIN] display or in the SONG PLAY

[LIST] display (display page 3), and then

select 1 SONG in the SONG PLAY [RE-

PEAT] display (display page 4), only the

selected song will be played back repeat-

edly until stopped.

C Start and stop playback.............................................................................

Start playback of the selected song by pressing the [PLAY/STOP]

button.

Press the panel [PLAY/STOP] button to stop playback.

➔ Song playback stops.

You can also stop playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

To exit the Song Play mode, press [SONG] or [EXIT]. The lamp

turns off and the previous display appears.

Voice Selection During Playback

The voice you play from the keyboard

can be changed during song playback by

selecting a voice in the normal way (page

29). The voices of the 1/RIGHT and 2/

LEFT parts being played back can be

changed in the SONG PLAY [L&R

VOICE] display (page 98).

Please note that the song may not start

immediately after you press [PLAY/

STOP].

Turning off the Keyboard Guide Lamp

The keyboard guide lamps corresponding

to the notes being played by the 1/RIGHT

and 2/LEFT parts will light in real time.

These guide lamps can be turned off in

the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display

(display page 5). (See page 109.)

Turning Off the Lyric Display

Lyrics are shown in the display when

playing back software which contains

lyric data. If you want to stop the lyrics

from appearing, you can disable this

function in page 5 of the SONG PLAY

[GUIDE MODE] display.

Using the Pedal to Start/Stop Playback

When you set the Left Pedal Function to

START/STOP in the FUNCTION

[PEDAL] display (display page 3), the left

pedal will function like the [START/

STOP] button. (See page 138.)

Song Playback

➔ Playback of the selected song starts. Unless ALL or RANDOM has

been selected, the selected song will play through to the end, then

playback will stop automatically. The current measure number and

tempo will be shown in the display during playback.

You can also start playback of the selected song by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.

SON G REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

CVP-201

● Adjusting the Tempo

The playback tempo of the song can be changed as desired. (See page

25.) The preset tempo for the selected song can be restored at any time

by simultaneously pressing the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons.

Usually the tempo is indicated by numbers. However in case of the

free tempo software, “- - -” will appear in place of the tempo in the dis-

play, and the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond

to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of

the song has been played back. The increase or decrease of the tempo

based on the basic tempo is indicated by a percentage figure in the dis-

play when the tempo is changed (from -99 to +99 at maximum; the range

differs depending on the software).

The BEAT lamps (page 52) may not

flash during playback of free-tempo

software.

With some songs, the displayed meas-

ure numbers may not match those

marked on the score.

V Eject the disk........................................................................................................

When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the

disk drive’s EJECT button to remove it.

➔ The LCD display returns to the main display.

CAUTION

Never take out the disk while the DISK

IN USE lamp is lit or while a song is

being played back.

Volume Adjustment for Each Part

The volume of each part can be adjusted

in the MIXER display.

Adjusting the Level Balance of Song

Playback and the Keyboard Voices

Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control

(page 23) to adjust the volume.

When playing back a song recorded on

the CVP-109/107/105/700/103/201, the

Auto Accompaniment can be turned on

by pressing the [ACMP ON] button.

Song Playback

DISK IN USE

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

CVP-201

The 1/RIGHT (right hand), 2/LEFT (left hand) and ORCH (accom-

paniment) buttons in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display can be used to

turn playback of the corresponding parts on or off. The buttons are high-

lighted when the parts are turned on. For example, you can turn off the

right- and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard.

• Parts can be switched on and off dur-

ing playback.

• Parts not having any data cannot be

turned on. This applies when there is

actually no data in the assigned track

(page 98), or when the track assigned

to the 2/LEFT part is set to “TRK --

(OFF).”

The track assignment for each button can be changed in display page

6 of the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (page 98).

In the case of Yamaha Disklavier

PianoSoft files, DOC files and XG/ESEQ

files, the part indication does not appear

for the parts without data.

■ Turning Individual Accompaniment Parts On or Off

Normally, pressing the ORCH (accompaniment) LCD button turns all

orchestra parts (tracks 3 through 16) — or all parts other than 1/RIGHT

and 2/LEFT — on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on

or off individually in the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display

page 2).

Z Select the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] page.

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the SONG PLAY

[TRACK PLAY] display (display page 2).

➔ Tracks which contain data are indicated above the TRACK < and

> buttons. Tracks enabled for playback are indicated by a box sur-

rounding the track number. Tracks which do not contain data are

not displayed.

All track numbers appear whether, the

tracks contain data or not, when a Stand-

ard MIDI file song is selected (except

songs recorded on the CVP-109/107/

105/700/103/201, the CVP-98/96/600,

and the CVP-94/92).

Song Playback

In this example, 1/RIGHT is canceled.

Part Cancel

CVP-201

X Select the desired track for playback (PLAY/OFF, SOLO).

Select the track by using the TRACK < and > buttons, the data dial,

or the [–] and [+] buttons.

➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Turn playback on or off for the selected track by pressing the

rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback) or OFF.

When a track is muted, the box surrounding the track number disap-

pears. The voice used by the currently selected track is shown above

PLAY/OFF.

Select a track, then press and highlight the SOLO LCD button to hear

only the selected track. Press the SOLO LCD button again to cancel

the Solo function.

Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment

■ Assigning Tracks to

1/RIGHT1/RIGHT

1/RIGHT and

2/LEFT2/LEFT

2/LEFT.............................

Specific tracks can be assigned to the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT func-

tions in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display, allowing you to selectively

turn playback of assigned tracks on or off. TRK - - (OFF) can be as-

signed to 2/LEFT. The same track cannot be assigned to both parts.

1/RIGHT

• Settings: 1 — 16

• Basic setting: Depends on file type.

2/LEFT

• Settings: 1 — 16, -- (off)

• Basic setting: Depends on file type.

Select the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (display page 6) by

using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.

➾ Press the 1/RIGHT button or the 2/LEFT button to highlight the

corresponding function in the display, then use the data dial or [–]

and [+] buttons to assign the desired track.

You can also select the track by pressing the 1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT

button.

Tracks can only be assigned when play-

back is stopped at the top of the song.

Song Playback

The track assignments of DOC files and

Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files are

fixed, and therefore cannot be changed.

CVP-201

The playback voice can only be changed

when playback is stopped at the top of

the song.

■ Selecting Voices for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT Parts

The playback voices for the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts can be se-

lected in the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display.

Press L&R VOICE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corresponding function in

the display, then select the playback voice for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT

parts by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.

You can also select a voice by using the L&R VOICE ▼ or ▲.

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider can be used to control the

overall volume of song playback.

When you enter the Song Play mode, the song volume level is auto-

matically set to the volume level that was last set in the Song Play mode,

regardless of the slider’s position. After that, moving the slider will set

the volume to the corresponding level.

Overall Song Playback Volume Control

If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on

during playback of an original song that

was recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/

700/103/201, the [ACMP/SONG VOL-

UME] control will affect the level of the

Auto Accompaniment rather than that of

song playback.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Song Playback

100

CVP-201

Z Select the track to be changed. ........................................................

Select the desired track by pressing TRACK < or >. Selecting TO-

TAL will change the overall settings of the song rather than the settings

of individual tracks.

Press the rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback), OFF, or

SOLO for the selected track. Select SOLO if you want to play only the

selected track.

Changing Settings in the MIXER Display

Song Playback

To adjust the playback volume, voice, and pan settings, as well as the

reverb, chorus, and effect depth for individual tracks, press the [MIXER]

button while in the Song Play mode to call up the MIXER display.

Adjustment of Track Settings

You can use the MIXER display to set the parameters listed below.

See the indicated reference pages for descriptions of each parameter.

Parameters available in the MIXER display

● When track 1 — 16 is selected:

• VOLUME (See page 32.)

• VOICE (See page 29.)

• PAN (See page 32.)

• REVERB DEPTH (See page 43.)

• CHORUS DEPTH (See page 45.)

• EFFECT DEPTH (See page 48.)

● When TOTAL is selected:

• TEMPO (See page 25.)

• Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 42.)

• REVERB TYPE (See page 42.)

• CHORUS TYPE (See page 44.)

• EFFECT TYPE (See page 47.)

The Program Change Number (PRG#),

Bank LSB (BKL), and Bank MSB (BKM)

parameters, which are used to select

voices via MIDI, are displayed when

VOICE is selected.

Depending on the file type, some param-

eters cannot be changed. For such pa-

rameters, a “Fixed” indication is shown.

MIXER

FUNCTION

101

CVP-201

X Select the parameter to be edited..................................................

Press SELECT ▼ or ▲ to select the desired parameter.

Current value for

the selected track

Depending on the file type, voice

changes may only be possible for tracks

1 and 2.

C Edit the value or setting............................................................................

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the value or setting.

You can make changes to the parameters while the song is playing back,

letting you immediately hear the results of your edits.

• Selecting TOTAL and changing the

REVERB DEPTH value will also affect

the sound of your keyboard perform-

ance.

• The voices of tracks to which Auto

Accompaniment, rhythm, and harmony

data have been recorded can also be

changed.

• Volume range: 0 — 127

• If another song is selected, all settings

will return to the basic settings for the

song (or the settings used to record

the song).

• If the Auto Accompaniment is turned

on during playback of an original song

that was recorded on the CVP-109/

107/105/700/103/201, the MIXER

display will function as Auto Accompa-

niment Part Volume Control (page 65)

instead of Song Track Volume Control.

Parameter selected

for editing

Song Playback

Selected track is

highlighted.

The Clavinova has convenient repeat functions that let you repeatedly

play back the same song or sections within the song. This function is

useful when you want to practice a difficult phrase.

Select the desired mode from the available four Repeat modes from

the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4).

Repeat Functions

Four Repeat modes

• OFF (Repeat function is turned off)

• PHRASE (Phrase Repeat)

• 1 SONG (1 Song Repeat)

• AB mode (AB Repeat)

• The ALL or RANDOM playback mode

(in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display)

will be disengaged when any of the

Repeat modes are selected.

• Any previously set Repeat mode will

be reset to OFF when a different song

is selected.

102

CVP-201

■ Phrase Repeat......................................................................................................

When playing back Yamaha software that includes special phrase

marks, such as DOC files, you can select specific phrase numbers (as

indicated on the accompanying sheet music) and repeatedly practice only

the selected phrase. (Phrase Repeat can be used for the four songs for

which notation is provided in the included Music Book.)

If you select PHRASE by using the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ buttons,

the PHRASE display for selection of the phrase number will appear at

the right of the button. Press PHRASE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corre-

sponding function in the display, then select the phrase number by using

the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.

You can also select the phrase number by pressing PHRASE ▼ or ▲.

Once song playback is started, the selected phrase will be played back

repeatedly until playback is stopped.

• Parts can be turned on/off even during

the performance.

• The Guide function can also be used

simultaneously with Phrase Repeat.

• When Phrase Repeat is started, a

lead-in count automatically plays

before the phrase. However, for free-

tempo songs, a lead-in count is not

available.

■ 1 Song Repeat......................................................................................................

When 1 SONG is selected by pressing the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲

button, any song selected and played as described above will play repeat-

edly until stopped.

Lead-in count is not played.

■ AB Repeat.................................................................................................................

This function allows you to specify any section (between point A and

point B) of a song, letting you repeatedly play back the selected section

for practice.

When AB mode is selected by the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ buttons,

A ➔ and B will appear at the right of the buttons in the display to specify

points A and B.

• The specified A and B points will be

erased when a new song number or

another Repeat mode is selected.

• A lead-in count automatically plays

before the specified section A–B Re-

peat playback is started. However, for

free-tempo songs, a lead-in count is

not available.

• To specify the A point as the begin-

ning of the song, press A

➔

before

playback starts. In this case a lead-in

count is not available.

• Specifying only the A point results in

repeat playback between the A point

and the end of the song.

• The B point cannot be selected unless

an A point is selected.

Song Playback

100

103

CVP-201

While the song is playing back, press the A ➔ button once at the

beginning of the section to be repeated.

➾ Then, press the B button at the end of the section to be repeated.

Repeat playback of the specified section (from point A to point B)

will begin automatically.

The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song or

a different Repeat mode is selected. The same section can be played back

repeatedly as many times as you desire by using the [PLAY/STOP] but-

ton.

When both the A and B points have been specified, you can clear the

A and B points by pressing the A ➔ button, or just the B point by press-

ing the B button. You can then specify other A and B points within the

song.

Song Playback

101

■ Pause .............................................................................................................................

Press the [PAUSE] button during song playback to temporarily stop

song playback. Press [PAUSE] again or the [PLAY/STOP] button to

resume playback from the same point.

■ Rewind and Fast Forward........................................................................

Use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to rewind or fast forward to the

playback point of the song.

• While playback is stopped or paused, the [REW] and [FF] buttons

can be used to step backward or forward through the song a measure

at a time. Holding down either button continuously moves through the

song in the corresponding direction.

• During playback, the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move the

playback point of the song rapidly as long as the button is held. No

sound is produced during [REW] operation.

Other Playback Controls

Using the [REW] button may cause the

voice, tempo, and/or volume to change.

SON G

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

104

CVP-201

Playing Other Types of Music Data

■ About Compatible Software..................................................................

The CVP-201 can play back the following types of software.

• Sequence formats: SMF (format 0 and 1), ESEQ

• Voice allocation formats: GM System Level 1, XG, DOC

Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibility” (page 172) for information

on the voice allocation formats and sequence formats.

The internal tone generator of the CVP-201 automatically resets for

compatibility with either the Yamaha XG format (including GM System

Level 1) or the Yamaha DOC voice allocation (page 172), depending on

the playback data. (However, the selected voice allocation on the panel

will not change.)

■ Song Data Recorded on Other Instruments........................

Song data recorded on other Clavinovas (CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/

85A/87A/59S/69A/69/79A/89/92/94/96/98/600/109/107/105/700/103)

will normally be played back with the correct voices even though the

volume balance may be slightly different. However, data recorded using

the Auto Accompaniment function of the CVP-50/70 cannot be played

back properly.

Song data recorded on the Yamaha Disklavier can also be played back.

Regardless of the type of software, only

the following disk formats can be used:

3.5" 2DD 720 kilobyte format and 3.5"

2HD 1.44 megabyte format.

Song Playback

102

The Lyric Display function (page 109)

cannot be used with song data recorded

in SMF format 1.

105

CVP-201

The Clavinova has a special Guide function which allows you to

practice by using the appropriate disk software. The “piano roll”

display and the keyboard guide lamp indicate which keys you

should play, and when you should play them. You can even

practice at your own pace since the Clavinova pauses playback

of the accompaniment until you play the correct keys. (You can try

out the Guide function by pressing one of the GUIDE CONTROL

buttons during playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song in the

Demo mode.)

Guide Control

The Clavinova has three different Guide methods that can be selected

depending on your playing experience or preferences. Beginning players

should practice first with Easy Play, then go on to Next Note, then Sound

Repeat.

Guide Methods and Piano Roll

“FOLLOW LIGHTS” and “CueTIME”

software should be used with the Next

Note method, as the Easy Play and

Sound Repeat methods may not function

properly with such software.

■ Practicing the Timing: Easy Play.....................................................

Since the Easy Play method lets you practice only the timing of the

notes, you can play anywhere on the keyboard. The melody will play

back smoothly when you play with the correct timing. (The accompani-

ment plays back normally in tempo.)

■ Practicing the Notes: Next Note .......................................................

The Next Note method lets you check which notes to play by looking

at the piano roll display and the keyboard guide lamps. Since the

Clavinova waits to play the accompaniment until you play the correct

note, you can practice at your own pace.

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the timing in which to play, by

changing from lit-up to flashing.

If the guide lamps do not flash…

The guide lamps may not flash in the

case of a few songs because of a special

guide system. In case of such songs,

however, you can switch to the Next Note

method so that the lamps flash, if you

like. See the “Other Guide-related Func-

tions” on page 108.

If the guide lamps and piano roll are

transposed up or down…

The guide lamps and piano roll may be

transposed up or down by one or two

octaves for certain songs. The guide

lamps and piano roll will not indicate

notes exceeding the 88-key range of the

keyboard.

103

Keyboard guide lamps

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PL AY

NEXT NOTE

SOUN D

REPEAT

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

106

CVP-201

■ Practicing Phrase-by-Phrase with the Playback:

Sound Repeat

.......................................................................................................

In the Sound Repeat method, the Clavinova plays back a short phrase.

Listen to the phrase and practice.

As soon as you play the phrase correctly, the Clavinova will automati-

cally play the next phrase.

Number of Repeats

You can set the number of times the

phrase will be repeated in the SONG

PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display

page 5). (See page 109.)

The keyboard guide lamps can be turned

on or off as desired in the SONG PLAY

[GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).

(See page 109.)

● Piano Roll

To show the piano roll in the display, press any GUIDE CONTROL

button, then press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. A bar of

the same length as the note to be played scrolls down from the top of the

display toward the bottom. You should play the note at the time the bar

reaches the bottom of the display. In order to play the note with the cor-

rect duration, hold the note for as long as the bar remains in the display.

Piano Roll ON/OFF

The piano roll display can be turned on

or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE

MODE] display (display page 5). (See

page 109.)

Z Set up the desired song for practicing.....................................

Check that the disk is properly inserted in the disk drive before call-

ing up the Guide function.

Using the Guide Function

Before Practicing

Before starting to practice, play back the

entire song without canceling the part to

be practiced and listen to it carefully. This

will give you a clear idea of how the song

should be played, and will make your

practice sessions progress more

smoothly.

Auto Part Cancel

If you turn on the Guide function without

canceling playback of the part to be

practiced, 1/RIGHT part is guided (or the

2/LEFT part is guided when the 1/RIGHT

part contains no data). However, when

you cancel the part before turning on

Guide, the setting will be kept until the

song is changed.

Guide Control

➾ Select the song and cancel the part that you wish to practice your-

self from the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1).

104

107

CVP-201

X Select the Guide method. ........................................................................

Press one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons: [EASY PLAY], [NEXT

NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT].

➔ The lamp of the corresponding button lights.

Turning Off the Keyboard Guide

Lamps

The keyboard guide lamp can be turned

on and off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE

MODE] display. (See page 109.)

When the GUIDE CONTROL buttons

cannot be turned on…

The GUIDE CONTROL buttons can be

used only in the Song Play mode or

when the “4. GUIDE Demo” song is

selected in the Demo mode. Only one

Guide mode can be selected at a time.

C Practice the part................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback.

➔ The piano roll will appear. Practice along with the accompaniment.

Piano Roll On/Off

The piano roll display can be turned on or

off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]

display (display page 5). (See page 109.)

The correct melody plays back no matter

which note you play in the EASY PLAY

mode.

The Guide method can be changed

during playback. However, the Guide

method cannot be changed for songs in

which SPECIAL is indicated in the

GUIDE MODE location in SONG PLAY

[GUIDE MODE] (display page 5).

The [PAUSE] button cannot be used in

the Next Note or Sound Repeat methods.

V Stop your practice session. ..................................................................

The Guide function stops automatically when playback reaches the

end of the song. You can also stop song playback by pressing the [PLAY/

STOP] button.

To turn off the Guide function, press the appropriate button - [EASY

PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT] - so that the lamp turns

off.

• The keyboard guide lamps light corre-

sponding to the notes played by the 1/

RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts during song

playback, even when Guide is set to

off - unless the LAMP button is turned

off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]

display. The guide lamps indicate the

notes to be played by both the 1/

RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts when both

are turned on or off; when only one of

the parts is turned off, the lamps indi-

cate the notes to be played by the part

that is turned off.

• The guide part can be selected, the

piano roll and guide lamps can be

turned on and off, and the Guide func-

tion itself can be turned on or off during

playback.

Guide Control

105

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

SONG REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

108

CVP-201

• Playback tempo can be set to any

desired value after a song has been

selected by using the TEMPO [–] and

[+] buttons.

• The Guide function may not work

properly with software which was not

produced for independent left- and

right-hand playback.

• Since the Guide phrases used in the

Sound Repeat method are automati-

cally determined by the Clavinova,

they may not precisely match the

actual musical phrases. Also, the

phrases may become shorter when the

Guide function is used for both the left-

and right-hand parts.

Various settings related to the Guide functions can be made in the SONG

PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).

Other Guide-related Functions

The settings made in this display will also

be effective in the Guide function during

playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song in

the Demo mode.

■ GUIDE MODE.........................................................................................................

NORMAL is usually displayed as the setting of the GUIDE MODE

function in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. Change the set-

ting to ENSEMBLE by pressing the GUIDE MODE button; the part

which was set to Part Cancel in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (dis-

play page 1) can then be played with the regular Part Cancel function and

the other part (not set to Part Cancel) can be played with the Easy Play

function.

• The ENSEMBLE mode is effective only

for songs which have data in both the

[1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] parts.

• The ENSEMBLE mode cannot be used

when Next Note or Sound Repeat is

selected.

• The GUIDE MODE setting can only be

changed when playback is stopped at

the beginning of a song.

When Next Note is selected and SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE

MODE display, a special Guide method is engaged for the selected song.

To return the normal Next Note mode, press the GUIDE MODE button

so that the indication changes to NORMAL.

• The SPECIAL indication appears

automatically depending on the song

being played back. The SPECIAL

indication will not appear, even when

pressing the GUIDE MODE button,

when playing back songs that do not

feature the special method.

• When using the Easy Play or Sound

Repeat method, the respective method

is still active, even if the SPECIAL

indication is shown.

GUIDE MODE

• Settings: NORMAL, ENSEMBLE,

(SPECIAL)

• Basic setting: NORMAL or SPECIAL

(depends on song)

Guide Control

106

109

CVP-201

■ Setting the Sound Repeat Number.............................................

To set the number of times the phrase is repeated in the Sound Re-

peat mode, press the SOUND REPEAT button. When AUTO is se-

lected, only the notes which have not been played correctly are re-

peated; the Guide function will automatically go on to the next phrase

once the previous one has been played properly.

SOUND REPEAT

• Settings: AUTO, 2 — 10

• Basic setting: AUTO

■ Lyric Display ON/OFF................................................................................

To turn lyric display off, press the LYRICS button to set the func-

tion to OFF.

LYRICS

• Setting: ON, OFF

• Basic setting: ON

■ Piano Roll ON/OFF.......................................................................................

The piano roll display can be turned on or off by pressing the

PIANO ROLL button. When AUTO is selected, the piano roll will ap-

pear by turning on one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons. When this

function is set to ON, the piano roll is always shown during playback;

when it is set to OFF, the piano roll is not displayed.

■ Keyboard Guide Lamp ON/OFF......................................................

To turn off the keyboard guide lamps, press the LAMP button to set

the function to OFF.

Guide Control

107

• The Lyric Display function cannot be

used with song data recorded in SMF

format 1.

• If a song does not contain lyric data, the

LYRICS function will display a row of

dashes (- - -). The LYRICS function

cannot be selected when playing back

such songs.

PIANO ROLL

• Settings: AUTO, ON, OFF

• Basic setting: AUTO

The SOUND REPEAT setting can only be

changed when playback is stopped at the

beginning of a song.

When a song contains lyrics, the Lyric

Display function has priority over the Piano

Roll function. The Piano Roll will be dis-

played if you turn the Lyric Display function

off as described above.

110

CVP-201

The Clavinova features comprehensive song recording func-

tions that allow you to record your own performances to floppy

disks. Three recording methods are available: Quick Recording

(page 112), which lets you record quickly and easily; Track

Recording (page 115), with which you can record multiple

instrumental parts; and Chord Sequence (page 121), which lets

you step-record Auto Accompaniment chords.

Song Recording

● Structure of a Song

A song can be made up of several instrumental parts, each assigned to

a different track, as shown in the example below.

Sample song track chart

Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the

display during operation. Refer to “Messages” (page 165) for informa-

tion on the messages.

• Refer to “Handling the Floppy Disk

Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks”

(page 9) for information on using

floppy disks.

• Songs recorded by the CVP-201 are

saved as SMF (format 0) files.

Songs recorded using the [XG]

category voices are XG-compatible.

See page 172 for information on the

XG/SMF (format 0) format.

108

• Up to 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending on the

amount of data contained in each song.

• Before you can record songs on a new disk, the disk must be formatted

for use by the Clavinova (see page 111).

Track Part

1 Piano (right-hand)

2 Piano (left-hand)

3 Bass

4 Strings

9 Rhythm

10 Rhythm

16 Organ

(Up to a maximum of 16 tracks.)

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

SON G

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

111

CVP-201

Song Recording

Before you can record to the included blank disk, you will have to

format it. Commercially available blank disks must also be formatted

for use. You can use the Format function in the FUNCTION [DISK 5]

display (page 146) to re-format floppy disks that have already been

used for recording.

Z Insert a disk.........................................................................................................

Gently insert the included blank disk for recording into the disk

drive face-up and shutter end first, until it clicks into place.

➔ A few seconds after inserting the disk into the disk drive, a “Start

disk format?” message appears in the display. To start format-

ting, press the OK button. To cancel the format operation, press

CANCEL.

Recording Setup: Disk Format

The same display appears when inserting

blank unformatted disks, or disks of differ-

ent formats.

Format Types

2DD disks are formatted to 720 KB, while

2HD disks are formatted to 1.44 MB.

X Execute the format operation..........................................................

An “Are you sure?” message appears in the LCD display; press

YES to execute the operation, or NO button to cancel it.

A bar graph appears in the LCD display during formatting to indi-

cate progress of the operation. The display automatically returns to the

previous display when formatting is completed.

Shutter

Label side of disk

109

112

CVP-201

Z Insert a formatted disk................................................................................

Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” posi-

tion, then insert the disk face up with the shutter forward until it clicks

into place.

Quick Recording

➔ The DISK IN USE lamp stays lit until the Clavinova reads and rec-

ognizes the disk.

➾ If the Song Play mode is not automatically called up, press the

[SONG] button.

➔ The lamp lights and the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display appears. If

the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown, use the PAGE [<]

and [>] buttons to select display page 1.

The Song Play mode is not automatically

engaged if the disk is inserted when one

of the disk-related FUNCTION displays

(page 139) or the CUSTOM STYLE

display (page 74) is showing.

Using Style File Disks

When using Style File disks, first load the

desired data from the Style File disk

(page 86), then insert the recording disk.

X Select the song number to be recorded. .................................

Select the SONG function, then use the SONG button, the data dial,

or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the desired song number for record-

ing.

➾ Select a song number between 1 and 60.

Write protect tab closed

(unlocked — write enabled)

Shutter

Label side of disk

Song Recording

110

If you select a song number between 61

and 99, you will not be able to select the

Song Record mode in step 3. The

Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs

on a single disk, but it can only record

songs in song numbers up to 60.

The selected number is the location where the song will be recorded.

If a song name appears beside the song number, the selected song al-

ready contains data. Make sure that it doesn’t contain data you want to

keep before moving on to the next step! If you record to a song that con-

tains data, the existing data will be replaced by the new data.

113

CVP-201

C Select the Song Record mode...............................................................

Press the [REC] button.

➔ The [REC] lamp lights and the QUICK RECORD display (Record

mode page 1) appears.

Call up page 1 by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons if the lamp

is lit but the QUICK RECORD display is not shown.

Once you have entered the Record Mode, you can press [REC] or

[EXIT] at any time before step 6 to cancel recording without saving any data.

• The song number for recording can be

changed in the QUICK RECORD display.

• If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on

when you enter the Record mode, the

ACMP&RHY track will automatically be

set to REC.

VSelect the part to be recorded. ........................................................

In Quick Recording, three parts can be recorded: the right hand part

(1/RIGHT), the left hand part (2/LEFT) and the Auto Accompaniment

& rhythm part (ACMP&RHY). Press the appropriate button — 1/

RIGHT, 2/LEFT or ACMP&RHY — to set the corresponding part to

REC (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). The

PLAY (playback) setting can be selected only for parts which already

contain data.

The ACMP&RHY part can be set to REC automatically by pressing

the panel [ACMP ON] button. To record only the rhythm, leave

ACMP&RHY set to REC, then press the [ACMP ON] button so that

the lamp goes out.

Both 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT cannot be set to

REC at the same time.

Recording the Harmony Parts

The Clavinova will record harmony notes

when you record with the Harmony function

(page 69) turned on. If the harmony type is

set to Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country,

Octave, or 1+5, the harmony notes will be

recorded in the selected track. When any

other harmony type is selected, the harmony

notes will be recorded in tracks 6 through 8.

Recording in Dual/Split Mode

•

If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Dual

mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 3.

• If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Split

mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 5.

• If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Dual

mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 4.

• If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Split

mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 5.

• When the recording part is changed,

[HARMONY] and [SPLIT] are automati-

cally turned off.

Recording the Auto Accompaniment

• When recording Auto Accompaniment,

the rhythm is recorded to tracks 9

through 10, bass to track 11, and chordal

backing to tracks 12 through 16.

• The Chord Sequence function (page 121)

lets you record the Auto Accompaniment

without having to play chord parts in

tempo.

• When any part is set to REC, the remain-

ing capacity of the disk (in kilobytes) is

shown to the right of the tempo indicator

in the display. Empty 2DD and 2HD disks

should have about 690 KB (about 69,000

notes) and 1400 KB (about 140,000

notes), respectively.

•

When the ACMP&RHY part is set to REC,

the metronome will sound to provide a

timing guide before recording is started.

Song Recording

When a part is set to REC (recording enabled), the Synchronized

Start function is set to stand-by, and recording automatically starts

when you play the keyboard.

111

SON G REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

Songs Recorded on Other Instruments

•

The Clavinova may display the “Convert

to CVP song?” message (page 166) If you

attempt to record data to a song created

on another instrument. Press YES to

convert the song before recording.

• When a song is converted as described

here, it may not be possible to record

data in tracks other than tracks 1 or 2.

114

CVP-201

B Select the desired voices and style, etc..................................

Select the voices and accompaniment style and set the tempo in the

normal way, and other settings needed. (If you want to try out the se-

lected voices, style, tempo, or other settings, be sure to do so before en-

tering the Song Record mode in step 3, since the recording will start as

soon as you play the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button.)

When Using Style File Disks

When using Style File disks, make sure to

load the data from the Style File disk (page

86) before inserting the disk for recording.

The Auto Accompaniment sections —

INTRO, AUTO FILL, ENDING, and FADE

IN/OUT — can be also recorded. Press

the INTRO button before starting to

record, the AUTO FILL buttons while

recording, the ENDING button at the end

of recording, and the FADE IN/OUT

button at the beginning or ending of the

recording. When the ENDING button or

the FADE IN/OUT button is pressed at

the ending, recording stops automatically

after the ending pattern or fade out.

Recording Along with the Metronome

1. After selecting the voice, press the

[METRONOME] button, and set the

Beat parameter in the METRONOME

display.

➔

The metronome will start

sounding.

2. The recording starts as soon as you

play the keyboard. The metronome

sound is not recorded.

When a disk is not inserted…

• A song can be recorded to internal

memory if it is short enough. A maxi-

mum of approximately 2500 notes (26

KB) can be recorded; however, the

amount may be less if other functions

are used. The internally recorded song

will be deleted when the power is

turned off or when another song is

loaded. See “Recording Without a

Disk” (page 133) for more information.

N Start recording....................................................................................................

Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To

record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment in

the usual way (page 58), and finger chords in a manner appropriate to the

current accompaniment mode (pages 60 and 61).

Adjusting the Volume While Recording

You can use the [ACMP/SONG VOL-

UME] slider and the MIXER display to

adjust the volume of the Auto Accompa-

niment part while recording. Adjust the

keyboard part volume using the KBD

VOL function in the display.

If You Turn the Harmony Function or

Split Mode On While Recording…

• You can record harmony notes or left

range keyboard part while recording

the 1/RIGHT part.

• When the 2/LEFT part is being re-

corded, the Clavinova will not record

the harmony notes for harmony types

that are recorded to tracks 6 through 8

(see the sidebar on page 113), or the

left range keyboard part.

The keyboard guide lamps do not light up

during recording.

Song Recording

112

115

CVP-201

M Stop recording. ................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔ Recording stops. When the recorded data has been written to

disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display ap-

pears.

If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording

your keyboard performance, without the Auto Accompaniment and

rhythm. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop re-

cording.

If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the

[FADE IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the key-

board as well.

CAUTION

The Clavinova may continue to write

data to the disk for a short time after you

stop recording. DO NOT eject the disk

while the DISK IN USE lamp of the disk

drive is lit.

• When a song has been recorded, the

temporary name SONG *** (*** is the

number) will automatically be given to the

song. You can change the name as

desired. (See page 127.)

• The [ACMP ON] lamp automatically goes

out when recording of these parts has

finished.

• When recording is finished, the song

volume is automatically reset to the

maximum setting, regardless of the cur-

rent [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider

position.

< Play back the recording.........................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔ The recorded data will be played back.

During playback you can use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] but-

tons to control the playback, and use the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons to

change the tempo. You can also play along on the keyboard.

Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is

reached, or you can press the [PLAY/STOP] button again to stop it at

any time.

Track Recording (Multi-track Recording)

Song Recording

113

• When style changes have been recorded

in a song, playback may become slightly

sluggish at points where the style

changes, depending on the styles that

were used.

• Playback of songs recorded using both

the Dual mode (page 33) and the Full

Keyboard accompaniment mode (page

57) may also sound somewhat sluggish.

Z Set up the instrument for recording.........................................

The first three steps in the Track Recording process are exactly the

same as those for Quick Recording. (See page 112.)

X Select the TRACK RECORD page ................................................

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the TRACK RECORD

page (Record mode display page 2).

The 16 tracks appear above the TRACK < and > buttons. Tracks

which are enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the

track number, and tracks which are record-enabled are indicated by a

highlighted number. The numbers of tracks that do not contain data are

not displayed.

116

CVP-201

C Select the desired track for recording. ......................................

Press the TRACK < and > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+]

buttons to select the track.

• Track 10 (and 9, in some cases) can

only be used to record the rhythm

sound of the accompaniment style and

cannot be used to record keyboard

part. Also, the keyboard part should be

recorded on a track other than those

used for Harmony or Auto Accompani-

ment.

• When the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10)

or the Auto Accompaniment tracks (9

through 16) are set to REC, the metro-

nome will sound to provide a timing

guide.

• If the Auto Accompaniment and/or

Harmony are already on when the

Track Recording page is selected, the

corresponding tracks are automatically

record-enabled.

➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected tracks to REC (re-

cording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). When a track is

set to REC, the Synchronized Start mode is turned on. The Clavinova

will start recording when you begin to play on the keyboard.

PLAY can only be selected for tracks which contain data.When a

track is muted, the track number is displayed without a surrounding box.

Three separate tracks can be set to record simultaneously when re-

cording keyboard parts.

If you intend to record using the Dual or Split functions, two tracks

must be record-enabled.

If you intend to use both the Dual and Split functions simultaneously,

three tracks must be selected.

If the Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are turned on, the re-

cording track numbers are automatically fixed, as described below.

* If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on, tracks 9 through 16 are au-

tomatically set to record the Auto Accompaniment data. If the Har-

mony function is turned on and a harmony type (page 70) other than

Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country, Octave, or 1+5 is se-

lected, tracks 6 through 8 are automatically set to record the Harmony

data.

When the RHYTHM button is pressed, tracks 9 and 10 are automati-

cally selected for the rhythm data. Set tracks 9 and 10 to REC, PLAY, or

OFF using the rightmost LCD button.

Song Recording

114

117

CVP-201

V Set all performance features as required. ..........................

After setting the tracks to be recorded, set up all necessary perform-

ance features as required: voice, accompaniment style, tempo, reverb,

etc.

B Start recording.................................................................................................

Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To

record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment

in the usual way (page 58), and finger chords in a manner appropriate

to the current accompaniment mode (pages 60 and 61).

The current measure number is shown in the display as you record. The

parameters listed below will be recorded in addition to notes you play.

(Recorded parameters differ depending on the play styles and settings.)

Parameters Recorded for Each Track

• Notes

• Voice

• Keyboard volume

• Pan

• Right (damper) pedal

• Left pedal (page 138)

• Center (sostenuto) pedal

• Reverb depth

• Chorus depth

• Effect depth

• Keyboard part volume (main, second, left)

• Fade-in/out (converted into volume data)

• Scale tuning data (page 155)

Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song

• Tempo

• Reverb type

• Overall reverb depth

• Chorus type

• Effect type*

• Accompaniment style

• Section (Intro, Main A through D, Fill-In, Ending)

* The last recorded track effect takes priority.

Other Recorded Parameters

Accompaniment style data which is recorded but not listed

above includes:

• Accompaniment part volume (volume settings included in style

data, plus mixer levels set when recording)

Song Recording

115

If you want to re-record part of the song (for

example, if you’ve made a mistake in the

recording), you can easily do so with the

Punch-in/out Recording function (page 118).

Backing Up Your Data

Any time you have recorded some amount

of data, you should copy the data to an-

other song number for backup purposes

(see page 142 for information on the Copy

operation). Doing this prevents accidental

loss of important data, should you inadvert-

ently delete the data while recording.

118

CVP-201

N Stop recording. ................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔ Recording stops. The [REC] lamp goes out when the data has

been written to the disk, and the SONG PLAY display appears.

If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording

your keyboard performance without the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm.

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop recording.

If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the [FADE

IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the keyboard as well.

When recording is finished, the [ACMP/

SONG VOLUME] level is automatically

set to the maximum value, regardless of

the current slider position.

You can add a new track to your song by selecting a new record

track(s) and voice(s) for recording as described above. You can also play

back and monitor the previously recorded tracks while you record. By

repeating this process, you can assemble a complete song.

Adding New Tracks

If you record on a track that has already

been recorded, the previous material will

be erased and the new material will be

recorded in its place.

With the Punch-in/out Recording function, you can selectively re-

record specified sections of the song. Punch-in/out recording allows you

to start recording from any “punch-in” point within a previously re-

corded track and stop recording at any “punch-out” point, leaving intact

all recorded material up to the punch-in point and following the punch-

out point.

Punch-in/out Recording

Punch-in/out recording cannot be per-

formed on tracks which have been used

to record the Auto Accompaniment or

rhythm parts, or on tracks 6 through 8

when these tracks have been used to

record harmony parts (see sidebar on

page 113).

Z Play back the song..........................................................................................

Play back the song in order to locate the point where you want to

punch in (i.e., start re-recording).

Song Recording

116

SON G REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

119

CVP-201

X Pause before the punch-in point..................................................

Press the [PAUSE] button to pause play back a bit before the point

at which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before

the punch-in point so you’ll be able to grasp the timing before you

punch in.

C Turn on the Punch-in/out function.............................................

Press the [REC] button.

➔ The PUNCH IN/OUT display appears.

V Select a track. ....................................................................................................

Press the TRACK < or > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+]

buttons to select the track.

➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected track to REC (re-

cording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). PLAY can

only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted,

the track number is displayed without a surrounding box.

Auto Setting of Punch-in/out

If no other track is selected, the last re-

corded track is automatically selected for

Punch-in/out.

Song Recording

117

If you select a track that was used to record

an Auto Accompaniment or rhythm part, or

a track (6, 7, or 8) that contains a harmony

part (see sidebar on page 113), you will not

be able to set the track to REC.

PAUSE REW FF

SON G REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

120

CVP-201

B Select the punch-in mode........................................................................

Select the desired punch-in mode with the fourth LCD button. Two

modes are available, as described below.

1ST KEY

Recording begins as soon as the first key is played, after

Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).

PEDAL

Recording begins as soon as the left pedal is pressed, after

Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).

When the PEDAL punch-in mode is

selected, the left pedal is automatically

assigned for this function only (the nor-

mal pedal function is canceled).

N Select the punch-out mode....................................................................

Select the desired punch-out mode with the center LCD button. Two

modes are available, as described below.

REPLACE

When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out

point will be erased.

PCH.OUT

When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out

point will remain intact.

M Start playback and recording. .............................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback from

the current paused location.

To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the 1ST KEY mode is se-

lected, simply begin playing at the point from which you want to record.

To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the PEDAL mode is selected,

press the left pedal at the point from which you want to record.

When the PEDAL Punch-in mode is

selected, recording can be started di-

rectly by pressing the left pedal, without

first pressing the [PLAY/STOP] or

[PAUSE] button to start playback.

< Stop recording. ................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔ Recording stops. When the data has been written to disk, the

[REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display reappears.

When the PEDAL mode is selected,

recording can also be stopped by press-

ing the left pedal.

Song Recording

118

121

CVP-201

The Chord Sequence function lets you enter Auto Accompani-

ment data step-by-step according to chord names. You can use

this function to record the accompaniment part without having to

play the song in time with the rhythm or at a certain tempo.

➾ Select the RECORD EDIT display (page 3 of the Record mode

display) by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.

119

Chord Sequence

Z Set up the instrument for recording.........................................

Just as you did in steps 1 through 3 of Quick Recording, insert a

formatted disk, select a song number, then press the [REC] button to

enter the Record mode.

You cannot use the Music Database (page

67) or the Registration function (page 89)

while recording data with the Chord Se-

quence function.

X Turn on the Chord Sequence function. .................................

Press the CHORD SEQ. button in the RECORD EDIT display.

When Chord Sequence cannot be turned

on…

The chord sequence function cannot be

used when no disk has been inserted in the

disk drive.

SON G REC

PL AY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

122

CVP-201

Changing the Auto Accompaniment

Mode

Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned

off while the Chord Sequence function is

active. However, you can select an ac-

companiment mode (other than Full

Keyboard) in the ACCOMPANIMENT

MODE display by pressing [DIRECT

ACCESS] followed by the [ACMP ON]

button. The split point can also be

changed in this display.

• The Chord Sequence data will auto-

matically replace any previous data in

the Auto Accompaniment and rhythm

tracks that was recorded in the Quick

Record or Track Record modes.

• Up to 999 measures can be recorded

using the Chord Sequence function.

• The chord input resolution will be

automatically selected according to the

current style. For styles with 2/4, 3/4,

4/4, and 5/4 time signatures, one chord

can be entered on every 8th note or

8th-note triplet. For other time signa-

tures, one chord can be entered for

each measure.

Entering Accompaniment Style and

Section Changes

One style change or section change

(page 123) can be made at the beginning

of each measure (The Intro pattern can

only be entered at the beginning of a

song.). However, Auto Fill data can be

entered anywhere you desire.

C Move the cursor to the entry point. ...............................................

The display shows measures as a horizontal line with 8th-note divi-

sions.

To move the triangular cursor along the measure indication to the

point at which you want to enter a chord or style change, press one of the

CURSOR < or > buttons to highlight the function, then use the data dial

or [–] and [+] buttons.

You can also move the triangular cursor by pressing the CURSOR <

and > buttons.

Adjusting the Volume of Auto Accom-

paniment

You can also enter volume changes for

the Auto Accompaniment. Used judi-

ciously, these can help you create pro-

fessional-sounding dynamic changes in

the Auto Accompaniment of your song.

To do this, first enter the Auto Accompa-

niment part volume data from the MIXER

display; the volume event symbol

( )

will appear in the box at the right side of

the display. To actually record the vol-

ume data at the current position, press

the SET button in the CHORD SE-

QUENCE display. (An initial volume

event is automatically entered at the

beginning of a song.)

Chord Sequence

120

➔ The CHORD SEQUENCE display appears, the Auto Accompani-

ment is turned on, and the Fingered 1 accompaniment mode is

selected.

123

CVP-201

V Enter and set the chords and/or style changes...........

To enter a chord, either play the chord with appropriate fingering in

the left range of the keyboard (lower than the split point), or highlight

ROOT or TYPE in the LCD display and use the data dial or [–] and [+]

buttons.

You can also select the chord by pressing the ROOT and/or TYPE

buttons.

The names of chords entered using the

keyboard are also displayed by the ROOT

and TYPE functions.

➔ The name of the chord is displayed next to the keyboard icon in

the box at the right side of the display.

➾ To enter a style change (style, section and tempo) simply make

the appropriate selections in the normal way.

➾ Once the chord and/or style has been selected, press the SET

button.

➔ A black box appears above the line at the current position in the

measure indicator, indicating that the data has been recorded at

that position. The cursor automatically moves to the next posi-

tion.

The recorded data is also shown in the display: the time signature,

style name, and section appear at the upper left, and the chord name

and tempo in the box at the right side of the display.

Continue moving the cursor to other positions and enter chords and

style changes in this manner. You can always check the entered data

during the operation by playing back the sequence using the [PLAY/

STOP] button.

The data recorded by the Chord Sequence function is listed below.

Data Recorded by the Chord Sequence Function

• Accompaniment style

• Section (MAIN A/B/C/D, Intro, Ending, Auto-fill, Fade-in/out, Break)

• Chord name

• Tempo

• Auto accompaniment part volume (MIXER settings)

• Rhythm on/off

• ACMP/SONG volume (as an initial setting only)

A fade-out cannot be entered during a fade-

in.

Entering Rhythm-only Sections

You can also record the rhythm alone (with-

out accompaniment) to your song. To do

this, record a blank chord in the desired

measure by leaving the TYPE function set

to “ ---.”

Entering a Break

• A complete break can be created by

setting the chord type to “ ---” and setting

the rhythm sound to “OFF” (see

“RHYTHM ON/OFF” below).

• The “break fill” pattern triggered by the

left pedal (page 138) cannot be entered

using the Chord Sequence function.

• The Clavinova will normally play a fill-in

pattern as it switches between variations

(MAIN A through MAIN D). To have the

Clavinova change the style variation at

the start of a measure without playing a

fill-in pattern, press the button for that

variation twice before pressing SET.

• The measure number is shown to the left

of the measure indicator.

• For information on other useful editing

features, see “Other Chord Sequence

Functions,” below.

• The same chord cannot be entered twice

in a row. If the chord displayed by the

ROOT and TYPE functions is the same

as the last chord that was recorded, the

Clavinova will not record a chord change

when the SET button is pressed.

Chord Sequence

121

124

CVP-201

B Stop recording. ....................................................................................................

When all recording has been finished, select page 2 of the CHORD

SEQUENCE display, then press the END MARK and SET buttons and

input an “end mark” which determines the location of the ending. The

end mark will be displayed in the box at the right side of the display.

• The chord sequence data now resides

in tracks 9 through 16, and can be

played back in the normal way. Add

other tracks as desired by using the

standard track selection and recording

procedure. You can also record over

the Auto Accompaniment parts and

replace them with original material if

you like by using the standard track

selection and record procedure.

• The song recorded via the Chord

Sequence function can be modified

later by re-entering the Chord Se-

quence mode and making the desired

changes. However, keep in mind that

any data recorded over the Auto Ac-

companiment parts (with normal track

recording) will be replaced by the

preset accompaniment style data. (For

example, even if you’ve recorded your

own bass part, it will be erased and

replaced by the original bass pattern if

you correct the data in the Chord

Sequence display.)

Page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display contains a number of

versatile functions that help you enter chord sequence data more effi-

ciently.

Finally, press the [REC] button; the “Save recorded data?”

message will appear. Press YES to store the recorded data and automati-

cally leave the Chord Sequence function; the display returns to the

SONG PLAY display. To leave without saving the data, press NO. To

continue editing the sequence without saving the data, press CANCEL.

Other Chord Sequence Functions

■ ALL DELETE .................................................................

To delete all sequence data, press the ALL DELETE button. An “Are

you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation,

or NO to cancel.

■ DELETE .........................................................................

To delete the data at the current cursor location, press the DELETE

button. An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to ex-

ecute the operation, or NO to cancel.

122

Chord Sequence

125

CVP-201

■ END MARK ....................................................................

To enter an “end mark” at the current cursor location, press the END

MARK button followed by the SET button. An end mark signifies the end

of the song, and should always be entered to properly end each song. (An

end mark is unnecessary when ending with an Ending pattern or Fade-

out.) The cursor cannot be moved past an end mark. You can delete an end

mark by using the DELETE button, just as with other normal data.

End Mark

Unless an end mark is entered, the song

will end one measure after the last entered

data. If an Ending pattern or Fade-out is

input, the song will end at the last measure

of the Ending or Fade-out.

■ RHYTHM ON/OFF..........................................................

To turn the rhythm sound on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF but-

ton followed by the SET button. No rhythm sound is produced following

the location to which a “rhythm off” event is entered; the rhythm starts

sounding again from the location to which a “rhythm on” event is entered.

123

The rhythm on/off status is displayed in the

box at the right side of the display.

Chord Sequence

126

CVP-201

The Record mode has a number of other convenient editing

functions that provide even greater control over the song data.

The Record Edit functions include: Setup Memory, which lets you

save the Clavinova’s current panel settings as part of the cur-

rently selected song; Song Name, which lets you name a re-

corded song file; Track Edit, which gives you a variety of track-

related editing controls, such as Track Mix and Track Delete; and

Initial Edit, which lets you change the data at the beginning of a

song, such as voice, reverb, and effect settings.

You can select the Record Edit functions from the RECORD

EDIT display (Record mode display page 3) after selecting the

song you wish to edit.

124

Other Record Edit Functions

The Setup Memory function lets you save the current panel settings to

disk so that they will automatically be restored whenever you play back

the song being edited.

Z Set up the Clavinova to play the song. ......................................

Setup Memory

• For details regarding which settings

are saved by the Setup Memory func-

tion, see the Parameter Chart on page

11 of the Reference Booklet.

• The settings saved by the Setup

Memory function will be deleted if you

re-record the song data or use Initial

Edit function (page 130) to edit the

initial parameter settings.

Change the Clavinova’s functions to the settings you want it to use

when playing back the song you’re editing.

X Select the Setup Memory function.................................................

Use the PAGE [>] button to select the RECORD EDIT display (page

3 of the Song Record mode display) if necessary, then press the SETUP

MEMORY button.

➔ The “Save panel settings to disk?” message is displayed.

127

CVP-201

Z Enter the desired name..........................................................................

Use the > button to move the underline cursor to the desired char-

acter position in the file name display. (File names can be up to 12

characters in length).

➾ Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select and highlight

the character or mark you wish to enter.

Press the CH.SET button to enter the selected character to the cur-

rent cursor position and move to the next position. Continue entering

other characters or marks in this way.

To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK

button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the

cursor moves back to the deleted position.

To abort the Song Name operation and return to the RECORD

EDIT display, press the CANCEL button.

X Register the name........................................................................................

When the song file name is complete, press the OK button to regis-

ter it. The new name is registered as the current song file name. To

cancel the operation, press the CANCEL button.

This function is used to name song files recorded with the

Clavinova or to change existing names. To call up the Song Name

function, press the SONG NAME button in the RECORD EDIT dis-

play.

Song Name

The Song Name function cannot be used

when a disk has not been inserted in the

disk drive.

125

Other Record Edit Functions

➾ Press YES to save the current panel setup, or CANCEL to return

to the RECORD EDIT display.

➔ The Clavinova displays the “Don’t remove the disk!” mes-

sage and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then dis-

plays a “Completed!” message before it returns to the

RECORD EDIT page.

128

CVP-201

Z Specify the two tracks to be mixed. ..............................................

Press the TRK A and TRK B buttons to highlight the corresponding

functions, and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the numbers

of the two tracks to be mixed. The voices which are used for the selected

tracks are indicated above these functions in the LCD display.

X Specify the destination track. ..............................................................

Use the TRK C function to specify the track to which you want to

record the mixed data. You can also specify the track for the mixed data

by pressing the TRK C button to highlight the corresponding function,

then using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.

Any previous data in the destination track will be erased.

C Execute the Track Mix operation. .....................................................

Press the MIX button to begin execution of the Track Mix operation.

An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the

Track Mix operation or press NO to cancel.

When the operation is completed, the MIX function will be replaced

by the UNDO function, allowing you to undo the Track Mix operation

and restore the previous data.

Press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out) to exit the Track Mix

function.

You can also exit the Track Mix function by pressing the [EXIT] but-

ton.

• The original data will remain in tracks

A and B after the Track Mix function is

executed. If the old data is not needed,

you should delete it. (See “Track De-

lete,” below.)

• A bar graph indicating the progress of

the Track Mix operation will appear

while the data is being processed.

• You can check whether the results are

what you expected by starting and

stopping playback with the [PLAY/

STOP] button. (You should try this

before you do something that would

make it impossible to select the UNDO

function.)

• The Undo function cannot be used

once you’ve selected another track or

exited from this mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal memory (see

page 133).

Other Record Edit Functions

126

Press the TRACK EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT display to call

up the TRACK EDIT display. There are three pages in the TRACK EDIT

display: TRACK EDIT [MIX], TRACK EDIT [DELETE], and TRACK

EDIT [QUANTIZE].

■ Track Mix (TRACK EDIT page 1)

The Track Mix function combines the data from two specified tracks

and copies the result to a third specified track.

Track Edit

Track Copy

Only tracks containing data can be se-

lected by the TRK A and TRK B func-

tions. In addition, “---” (no track) can also

be selected for TRK B. In this case, the

data in track A will simply be copied to

track C.

For the Track Mix function, the selected

track voice and volume data, etc. (i.e., all

data except note data) in track A will be

effective for the destination track after the

mix operation.

129

CVP-201

X Execute the Delete operation...........................................................

Press the DELETE button. When the “Are You Sure?” message is

displayed, press YES to execute the Delete operation or NO to cancel.

The DELETE function will be replaced by the UNDO function af-

ter the Delete operation is executed. If the result is not what you ex-

pected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the deleted track.

To exit the Track Delete function, press the [REC] button (the lamp

goes out).

You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Delete func-

tion.

■ Track Delete (TRACK EDIT page 2)

The Track Delete function can be used to delete the data from any

specified track.

Z Specify the track to be deleted.................................

Press the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the function, then use

the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be deleted.

Only tracks containing data can be se-

lected.

• A bar graph indicating the progress of the

Track Delete operation will appear while

the data is being processed.

• You can check whether the results are

what you expected by starting and stop-

ping playback with the [PLAY/STOP]

button. (You should try this before you do

something that would make it impossible

to select the UNDO function.)

• The Undo function cannot be used once

you’ve selected another track or exited

from this mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal memory (see

page 133).

■ Track Quantize (TRACK EDIT page 3)

You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by aligning all

notes to specified beats with the Track Quantize function. For example,

you can accurately align the recorded notes to 8th- or 16th-note resolu-

tion.

Other Record Edit Functions

127

130

CVP-201

C Execute the Quantize operation. ......................................................

Press the QUANTIZE button. When the “Are you sure?” mes-

sage is displayed, press the YES button to execute the Quantize operation

or NO button to cancel.

The QUANTIZE function will be replaced by the UNDO function

after the Quantize operation is executed. If the result is not what you

expected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the quantized

track to what it was before performing the Quantize operation.

To exit the Track Quantize function, press the [REC] button (the

lamp goes out).

You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Quantize func-

tion.

• Only the note data and voice data are

quantized.

• A bar graph indicating the progress of

the Quantize operation will appear

while the data is being processed.

• You can check whether the results are

what you expected by starting and

stopping playback with the [PLAY/

STOP] button. (You should try this

before you do something that would

make it impossible to select the UNDO

function.)

• The Undo function cannot be used

once you’ve selected another track or

quantize size, or exited from this

mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal memory (see

page 133).

The Initial Edit function allows you to change the volume level of

each track or the initial data set for the entire song after you’ve finished

recording. The INITIAL EDIT display appears when you press the INI-

TIAL EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT display. All sixteen tracks are

displayed simultaneously in this display and the settings such as volume,

voices and reverb depth can be changed.

Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data)

• Any voice changes entered in the

middle of the original song will be

erased when the voice parameter is

changed in the Initial Edit mode.

• When editing some types of data, it will

not be possible to change certain

parameters (indicated as “Fixed”) or

change the voices for tracks other than

tracks 1 and 2.

128

Other Record Edit Functions

Only tracks containing data can be se-

lected.

X Specify the quantize “size.”................................................................

Press the LCD button below the note symbol to select the desired

quantize “size” as shown below.

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

Z Specify the track to be quantized................................................

Use the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the function, then use

the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be quantized.

131

CVP-201

Z Select the track to be edited.............................................................

Select the track whose parameters you wish to change by pressing

the TRACK < or > button. If TOTAL is selected, any changes will

affect the entire song rather than an individual track.

X Select the parameters to be changed.....................................

Select the parameters to be changed by pressing the SELECT ▼ or

▲ button.

The following parameters can be changed in the INITIAL EDIT

display. Refer to the indicated page for details on each parameter.

Parameters which can be changed with Initial Edit:

● When track 1 — 16 is selected:

• VOLUME (See page 32.)

• VOICE (See page 29.)

• PAN (See page 32.)

• REVERB DEPTH (See page 43.)

• CHORUS DEPTH (See page 45.)

• EFFECT DEPTH (See page 48.)

● When TOTAL is selected:

• TEMPO (See page 25.)

• Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 42.)

• REVERB TYPE (See page 42.)

• CHORUS TYPE (See page 44.)

• EFFECT TYPE (See page 47.)

• The Program Change Number (PRG#),

Bank LSB (BKL), and Bank MSB (BKM)

parameters, which are used to select

voices via MIDI, are displayed when

VOICE is selected.

Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display

129

Other Record Edit Functions

The current parameter value for the

selected track.

The parameter to

be changed.

The selected track

is highlighted.

C Change the settings...................................................................................

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the settings. You

can instantly check the effect of the changes, since the settings can be

changed during playback.

• If TOTAL is selected and the value of

the reverb depth is changed, the new

setting will also affect the keyboard

sound.

• The voices of the tracks to which Auto

Accompaniment, rhythm and/or Har-

mony data have been recorded, can

also be changed.

• The data may not be played back

accurately if you use the [REW] button

while editing the data.

132

CVP-201

B Exit the Initial Edit function. ..................................................................

To do this, press the [REC] button.

➔ The [REC] lamp goes out and the Initial Edit operation is com-

pleted.

You can also exit the Initial Edit function by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

If you do this after making any edits that you have not yet written to

disk, a “Write edited data?” message will be displayed. Press YES to

write the edited data and exit from the Initial Edit mode, NO to exit with-

out writing the data, or CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit mode and

continue editing.

130

Other Record Edit Functions

V Write the changes. .......................................................................................

When all the Initial Data changes have been made as desired, press

the WRITE button. When the “Are you sure?” message is displayed,

press the YES button to actually make the specified changes, or NO to

cancel.

When this is completed, the WRITE button will change to UNDO,

allowing you to undo the Write operation and restore the data of the ed-

ited track to what it was before you made any edits.

• All edited data for any number of

tracks within a single song can be

written in a one-time Write operation,

by pressing the WRITE button.

• You can check whether the results of

the Initial Edit operation are what you

expected by starting and stopping

playback with the [PLAY/STOP] but-

ton. (You should try this before you do

something that would make it impossi-

ble to select the UNDO function.)

• The Undo function cannot be used

once you’ve changed the setting again,

changed a different setting, or exited

from the Initial Edit mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal memory (see

page 133).

133

CVP-201

131

The Clavinova has about 26 KB of internal memory that you can

use to record a limited amount of song data — approximately

2,500 notes, if no other data is recorded — without using a floppy

disk.

About the CVP MEMORY Song

• Chord Sequence data (page 121) cannot

be recorded to internal memory.

• The Song Name (page 127) and Setup

Memory (page 126) functions cannot be

used when editing a song recorded to the

internal memory.

• You can use the Track Edit (page 128)

and Initial Edit (page 130) functions to

edit a song in the internal memory.

SONG PLAY [MAIN] display when playing back the CVP

MEMORY song.

When you enter the Song Play mode after recording a song in the

memory, the SONG function displays the letters CVP in place of a

song number. You can play this song back as you would any other

song that was recorded to disk (see page 93).

If you insert a song disk and select a song number when the inter-

nal memory contains song data, a “Delete CVP MEMORY?” mes-

sage will be displayed. Press YES to delete the song data from the

internal memory. The song data will also be erased from the internal

memory by turning the power off. If you wish to keep the recorded

data, use the Song Copy function (page 142) to copy the recorded

data to disk.

Song data recorded to internal memory will

be deleted when you load a style file. In this

case, no message is displayed.

Recording Without a Disk

If you enter the Song Record mode without inserting a disk, the

words CVP MEMORY will appear in the SONG display as shown

below, and the Quick Recording, Track Recording and Punch-in/out

Recording functions will become available.

134

CVP-201

The Function mode provides various advanced functions that,

for example, let you make various MIDI settings, or give you

greater, more convenient control over disk-related operations.

These sophisticated functions let you customize the Clavinova to

your own musical needs and preferences.

CHAPTER 8: The Utility Functions

Group Display Function Page

KEYBOARD

Tune 136

Transpose 136

Key Touch & Fixed Velocity 137

Voice Setting 137

PEDAL 3 Left Pedal & Glide Range 138

DISK

4 Registration & Setup Files 139

5 Song Copy & Disk Copy 142

6 Song Delete 144

7 Song Data Transform 145

8 Disk Format 146

MIDI

Send Channel (Keyboard) 147

Local Control 147

Synchronization 148

10 MIDI Filter 148

11 Receive Filter 149

MIDI Transpose 150

Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) 150

Song Transmission 151

Remote Keyboard 151

BACKUP

13 Backup 152

14 Recall 153

UTILITY

15 Micro Tuning 154

16 Scale Tuning 155

The following functions are available:

132

Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the

display during operation. Refer to the “Messages” section (page 165) for

information on the messages.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

DEMO

HELP

8BEAT

SWING/

JAZZ

BALL-

ROOM

TRAD/

WALZ

LATIN

COUNTRY

16BEAT DANCE

ROCK/

R&B

PIANIST

BALLAD

MUSIC

DATABASE

HARMONYDISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

CONTRAST

BEAT

EXIT

DIRECT ACCESS

PAGE

MIXER

FUNCTION

SONG

PAUSE REW FF

REC

PLAY/

STOP

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PLAY

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR

ORGAN

SYNTHE-

SIZER

STRINGS/

CHOIR

VOICE

ENSEMBLE

BASS

BRASS

SAX

FLUTE

PER-

CUSSION

DUAL

SPLIT

REVERB

EFFECT

234

BANK

REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN A

MAIN B

MAIN C

MAIN D

ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FIL L

INTRO

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

ACMP ON

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

REGIST-

RATION

ANCEL

FUNCTION

135

CVP-201

■ Using the Utility Functions.......................................................................

As the table on the preceding page shows, the utility functions are

divided among 16 display pages. Use the following procedure to display

the page containing a desired function.

Z Press the [FUNCTION] button.

You can also exit the Function mode by

pressing the [EXIT] button.

➔ The [FUNCTION] lamp goes out.

➔ The lamp lights and the most recently used page of the Function

mode display appears.

133

C Perform the desired operation.

Refer to Chapter 2 “Basic Operation” for instructions regarding the

selection and use of the various types of functions.

V Press the [FUNCTION] button when finished.

X Display the desired page.

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display the page that contains

the function you want to set.

MIXER

FUNCTION

PAG E

136

CVP-201

■ Tune ....................................................................................................................................

Keyboard

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1

TUNE

• Range:414.8 Hz — 466.6 Hz

(–102.1 — +101.62 cents)

• Basic setting: 440 Hz

The Tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch, allow-

ing you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments.

The frequency (in Hz) of A3 is displayed by the TUNE function. The

tuning can be adjusted up or down a maximum of approximately 26 Hz

(slightly over 100 cents) in 0.2-Hz steps.

Hz and Cents

• Pitch is measured in units of Hertz

(abbreviated Hz), which represents the

number of times the sound wave vi-

brates in a second.

• A cent is a unit of pitch equal to 1/100

of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone).

• Tune has no effect on the Drum Kit

voices.

• The XG Master Tune setting is effec-

tive when playing back songs contain-

ing XG Master Tune data.

■ Transpose ....................................................................................................................

TRANSPOSE functions

• Range:–24 — +24 semitones

(–2 — +2 octaves)

• Basic setting: 0

The Transpose functions make it possible to shift the pitch of the key-

board or song data in semitone units, allowing you to match the pitch of

the Clavinova to the range of other instruments or singers.

The Clavinova has two transpose functions: ALL and SONG. The

former transposes all notes played by the Clavinova, whereas the latter

transposes song data only. When you change the setting of the ALL func-

tion, the SONG setting is also adjusted by the same amount.

• The Transpose function does not affect

the Drum Kit voices.

• When playing back songs containing

XG Transpose data, the XG Transpose

data is effective only for the data play-

back sound. The value set on the

panel affects the keyboard sound.

• The values set here affect playback

data transmitted via MIDI.

• When a Transpose function is set to a

high value, notes played in the corre-

sponding range at the upper end of the

keyboard (e.g., C5 through C7 for a

value of +24) may not sound as ex-

pected. The same is true of notes at

the lower end of the keyboard when a

low Transpose value is set.

134

137

CVP-201

KEY TOUCH

• Settings: See table at left.

• Basic setting: NORMAL

FIXED VELOCITY

• Range: 1 — 127

• Basic setting: 76

■ Key Touch & Fixed Velocity ......................................................................

FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2

Velocity

• The amount of force applied to a key is

frequently referred to in this manual as

velocity

. This is because the Clavinova

determines the amount of force that

was applied to a key by measuring the

speed with which the key was de-

pressed.

• This function does not affect the actual

weight of the keys.

The Key Touch function determines how velocity affects the volume

of the voices played by the Clavinova’s keyboard. Select from four Key

Touch settings to tailor the keyboard response to the selected voice, type

of song, or your personal playing style. Press the KEY TOUCH button to

change the setting. The data dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used.

Key Touch Settings

NORMAL

This is the standard keyboard response and is used as the basic

setting.

SOFT

This setting lets you produce a relatively loud sound even when

playing the keys softly.

FIXED

This setting produces a uniform degree of loudness, no matter how

forcefully or softly you play the keys. Use the FIXED VELOCITY

function to set the loudness of notes produced by the keyboard.

HARD

This setting requires you to play the keys quite strongly to produce

maximum loudness

■ Voice Setting.............................................................................................................

VOICE SETTING

• Settings: AUTO, MANUAL

• Basic Setting: AUTO

This function determines whether the basic reverb, chorus, effect, and

other settings for each voice are automatically selected when a voice is

selected. Press the VOICE SETTING button to change the setting. When

it is set to AUTO, the basic settings for each voice are automatically se-

lected when the voice is selected; when it is set to MANUAL, the set-

tings do not change when voices are selected.

The following settings are automatically

selected when VOICE SETTING is set to

AUTO:

Function Page

Reverb ON/OFF 41

Reverb depth settings 42

Chorus depth settings 45

Effect ON/OFF 46

EFFECT TYPE 47

Effect DEPTH 48

Effect VARIATION 47

HARMONY TYPE 70

Harmony SPEED 71

Harmony VOLUME 71

OCTAVE settings 32, 34, 38

Keyboard

135

138

CVP-201

■ Left Pedal & Glide Range...........................................................................

Pedal

FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3

LEFT PEDAL

• Settings: See table at left.

• Basic setting: SOFT

LEFT PEDAL Settings

Setting Description

SOFT

The left pedal functions as the soft pedal (basic setting). (See

page 40.)

START/STOP

The left pedal functions as the [START/STOP] button. (See page

52.)

HARMONY

When the Harmony function is set to on, Harmony is applied

only while the left pedal is held down. (See page 69.)

REGISTRATION

The panel settings registered to the next Registration number

are recalled each time the left pedal is pressed. (See page 91.)

REG.FREEZE

The left pedal switches the Registration Freeze function on and

off; that is, it performs the same function as the FREEZE button

in the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display (page 91).

ENDING/RIT

The left pedal functions as the [ENDING] button. You can have

the song end ritardando (slow down gradually) by pressing the

left pedal twice in succession. (See page 56.)

BREAK

Pressing the left pedal during style playback produces a break

in the accompaniment and rhythm for as long as the pedal is

held. When the pedal is released, normal playback resumes

from the next measure. If you press the left pedal a second

time within one measure, normal playback resumes immedi-

ately.

BREAK FIL

Pressing the left pedal during style playback causes the

Clavinova to play a special “break fill-in” pattern. This pattern is

different from the fill-in patterns produced by the Auto Fill func-

tion. (See page 51.)

BASS HOLD

While the left pedal is pressed, the bass note played by the

Auto Accompaniment will be held even if the chord is changed.

This function does not work when FULL KEYBOARD is se-

lected as the accompaniment mode (page 61).

FADE IN/OUT

The left pedal performs the function same as the [FADE IN/

OUT] button. (See pages 55 and 56.)

EFFECT VARI

This function switches the effect variation on or off; that is, it

performs the same effect as the VARIATION button in the

EFFECT display (page 47).

GLIDE UP S

GLIDE UP M

GLIDE UP F

GLIDE DOWN S

GLIDE DOWN M

GLIDE DOWN F

Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to rise an amount

specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is

released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of

three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the se-

lected setting).

Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to drop an amount

specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is

released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of

three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the se-

lected setting).

If the left pedal is set to REGISTRATION,

the setting of the left pedal function in

Registration memory is not recalled.

136

GLIDE RANGE

• Settings: 1 — 12 (semitones)

• Basic setting: 1

This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal to control one of

various functions.

139

CVP-201

137

■ Registration & Setup Files........................................................................

You can use the functions on this page to load, save, delete, and re-

name data files containing registration data (page 89) or panel setup data.

Before executing one of these functions, make sure that the disk you

want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive.

Disk

FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4

Z Select the file type.

Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file type to

be loaded, saved, deleted or named.

REGISTRATION

A Registration file may contain the data for just one

registration, or a full set of twenty. Refer to page 11 in

the Reference Booklet for a list of settings registered

by the Registration function.

ALL SETUP

An All Setup file contains all panel setting data in the

list on page 11 in the Reference Booklet.

➾ If you select REGISTRATION as the file type, you can also use the

REGIST function to specify whether the operation will affect one

memory location or a full set of twenty.

When saving registration data, the REGIST setting specifies which

memory location(s) will be saved to disk. When loading data, the

REGIST setting specifies how the registration data will be loaded, as

shown below:

You can delete or rename any registra-

tion file on the disk, regardless of the

REGIST setting.

REGIST setting:

File contains: ALL A1 — E4

All

registrations

All registrations are loaded.

Only registration saved from

specified location is reloaded

(to original location).

One

registration

Selected registration file is

loaded into original location.

Selected registration file is

loaded into specified location.

140

CVP-201

X Select the file operation.

File operations cannot be performed

while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the

Song mode before attempting to

perform a file function.

Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file opera-

tion: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

C Press the START button.

➔ The file operation begins.

The subsequent steps for each file operation depend on the operation

you’ve selected. Refer to the corresponding instructions for each opera-

tion below.

■ LOAD.........................................................................................................................................

When you select LOAD, the Load function display will appear. The origi-

nal internal data will be replaced when you execute the Load operation. Be

sure to save all important data to disk (see below) before using the Load op-

eration.

138

Disk

First, select the desired file to be loaded. Press either of the two leftmost

LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.

➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to load

the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Load operation.

■ SAVE..........................................................................................................................................

When you select SAVE, the name entry function display for the file to be

saved will appear.

Press the > button to move the underline cursor, and select the character

position of the file name. (File names can contain up to twelve characters.)

➾ Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to highlight the characters to be

input.

141

CVP-201

Disk

139

Press the CH.SET button to input the selected characters at the current

underline position of the file name. Continue moving the cursor to other

characters or marks and entering them in this way.

To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK button.

The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the cursor moves

back to the deleted position.

To abort the name entry operation and return to the FUNCTION [DISK

1] display, press the CANCEL button.

When the file name has been completely entered, press the SAVE button

to execute the Save operation.

If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a “Same name!

Overwrite?” message will appear. Press the OK button to overwrite the origi-

nal file with the new file, or CANCEL to cancel the Save operation.

■ DELETE................................................................................................................................

When you select DELETE, the Delete function display will appear.

First, select the desired file to be deleted. Press either of the two leftmost

LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.

➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to de-

lete the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Delete operation.

First, select the desired file to be named. Press either of the two leftmost

LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.

➾ The name entry display will appear. Enter a new file name in the same

way as described above for the Save function.

➾ Pressing the OK button changes the current name to the newly en-

tered name. Press the CANCEL button to abort. If you enter a name

that already exists on the disk, a “Same name! Overwrite?” message will

appear. In this case, press the OK button to overwrite the original file

with the renamed file, or CANCEL to abort the Name operation.

■ NAME......................................................................................................................................

When you select NAME, the Name function display will appear.

142

CVP-201

■ Song Copy & Disk Copy..............................................................................

FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5

The Song Copy and Disk Copy functions

cannot be executed while the [RECORD]

lamp is lit. Exit the Song Record mode

before attempting to copy a song or disk.

The functions on this page allow you to copy song data recorded by

the Clavinova to a different song number on the same disk, or to a differ-

ent disk. You can also use the Disk Copy function to copy an entire disk.

•

You will not be able to select DISK1 – 1

as the copy function if the disk you

inserted is write protected (page 9).

• If the Clavinova’s memory contains

song data recorded without a disk

(page 133), CVP – DISK will automati-

cally be selected as the copy function.

If you want to keep the CVP MEMORY

song data, you can use this function to

copy it to a disk. (Insert the disk,

specify a destination song number as

described in step 3, then execute the

copy function as usual.) You can then

use the Song Delete function (page

144) to delete the CVP MEMORY

song. Once the song has been de-

leted, you will be able to use the other

copy functions.

First insert the disk containing the source song, or the disk to be cop-

ied.

➾ Press either of the leftmost two LCD buttons to select the copy

type. Three copy types are available.

Z Select a copy function.

X Select the source song.

If you selected DISK1 — 1 or DISK1 — 2 in step 1, press the SONG

➔ button, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a song

number from 1 to 99.

DISK1 – 1

This function allows you to copy a song to a different

song number on the same disk.

DISK1 – 2

This function allows you to copy a song to a different

disk.

DISK COPY

This function copies all the data from one disk to an-

other disk. (All data on the destination disk is erased

by this process.)

➔ The number and name of the selected song are displayed above

the third and fourth LCD buttons.

Disk

140

143

CVP-201

C Select the destination song number.

If you selected DISK1 — 1 as in step 1, press the SONG button, then

use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a destination song

number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be se-

lected.)

➔ If the destination song number already contains data, the name of

the song file will appear in the middle section of the display. In this

case, the original data of the destination song number will be re-

placed by the source song data when you execute the copy opera-

tion.

V Execute the copy operation.

The copy operation cannot be executed if

the same song number is selected as

both the source song and the destination

song for the DISK1 – 1 function. In this

case, a “Select a different number!”

message will appear.

Press the COPY button.

➔ The copy operation begins. If you are copying to the same disk, an

“Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to con-

tinue or the NO button to cancel.

If you are copying the data to a different disk (or copying an entire

disk), a “Number of disk exchanges (

****

**)” message appears to indicate

the number of times the disk will have to be changed. Press the OK

button to continue, or the CANCEL button to abort the operation.

When copying data between disks, follow the instructions in the dis-

play, inserting the source and destination disks as required.

If you are using the DISK1 – 2 function to copy a song to another

disk, the “Select destination song number” message will appear the

first time you insert the destination disk. Use the data dial or [–] and

[+] buttons to select a destination song number between 1 and 60.

(Song numbers above 60 cannot be selected.)

➾ If the destination song number already contains data, the song

name will appear in the display. In this case, the original data of

the destination song number will be replaced by the source song

data. Press the OK button to continue, or CANCEL to abort.

Copying Commercial Software

• Copying of commercially available

software is strictly prohibited, except

for your personal use.

• Some commercially available software

is purposely copy-protected, and can-

not be copied using these functions.

Data files (other than those made with

the CVP-109/107/105/700/103/201) that

have been copied once cannot be copied

a second time to another disk. Also,

additional data can be recorded only to

the right-hand/left-hand parts of the

copied DOC files.

Disk

141

144

CVP-201

■ Song Delete...............................................................................................................

FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6

The Song Delete function cannot be

executed while the [RECORD] lamp is lit.

Exit the Song Record mode before at-

tempting to delete a song.

You can delete unneeded song data from the disk in this display. Be

careful not to delete any important data on the disk; once the delete op-

eration is performed, it cannot be undone.

Z Insert the disk.

Insert the disk containing the song data to be deleted into the disk

drive.

X Select the song to be deleted.

Use the SONG ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] but-

tons to select the song to be deleted. The song data in the Clavinova’s

memory can be also deleted with this operation. To do this, select

CVP MEMORY instead of a song number (CVP MEMORY appears

only when the memory contains song data).

C Execute the delete operation.

Press the DELETE button.

➔ An “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press the YES button

to delete the selected song, or press the NO button to cancel the

operation.

Disk

142

145

CVP-201

■ Song Data Transform.......................................................................................

FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7

The Song Data Transform function can-

not be used while the [SONG] lamp is lit.

Exit the Song mode before attempting to

transform song data.

This function allows you to convert song data recorded on the CVP-

201 for playback on other Clavinova models or a Disklavier.

Z Insert the disk.

2DD Disks Only!

Only data saved on 2DD disks can be

converted. To transform song data that

has been saved on a 2HD disk or re-

corded in the Clavinova’s memory, use

the Song Copy function (page 142) to

copy the song to a 2DD disk before you

attempt to convert it.

Insert a 2DD disk containing the data to be converted in the disk

drive.

X Select a data format.

Data Format Compatibility

CVP-series Clavinovas other than the

models listed in the table at left can play

back song data recorded on the CVP-201

without conversion.

If you are planning to use your song data

on other instruments and want to ensure

that they will closely reproduce the sound

you achieved on the CVP-201, however,

we recommend using XG voices (see

page 30) for all tracks other than those

that play piano voices.

Use either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the target format

of the file (the type of instrument that will use the converted data).

The following three types are available:

CVP PERFORMANCE

This function converts data for playback on the

CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/87A/89, the DOM-

30, and the DOU-10.

PIANO FORMAT 1

This function converts data for playback on all

Disklavier models except the MX100A and the

MX100B.

PIANO FORMAT 2

This type converts the data for playback on the

Disklavier MX100A or MX100B.

C Select the song to be converted.

Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the song number of

the song to be converted.

➔ The number and name of the selected song are displayed above

the SONG function.

V Press the TRANSFORM button.

• The converted data is saved to a song

number between 1 and 60. (Song

numbers above 60 are not used.)

• The original data remains intact at the

original song number even after the

conversion has been executed.

• Recording or editing cannot be per-

formed on the converted songs.

➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button

to convert the selected song, or NO to cancel the operation. When

the conversion process is finished, a “Completed! SONG No.**”

message indicates the song number to which the data was saved.

If CVP PERFORMANCE was selected in Step 2, the characters “C)”

are appended to the beginning of the original name. If one of the other

formats was selected, the characters “P)” are appended.

Disk

143

146

CVP-201

■ Disk Format..............................................................................................................

Floppy disks must be correctly formatted before the Clavinova can

use them for data storage. If you insert a new, unformatted disk (or a disk

that has already been initialized in a different format) in the disk drive,

the Clavinova will automatically ask you whether it should format the

disk. (See page 111 for details.)

The Clavinova also has a Disk Format function that can be used to

reformat disks that have already been formatted for use by the Clavinova.

The reformatting operation deletes any data that may have been saved on

the disk.

Z Insert the disk to be formatted.

Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” posi-

tion, and insert the disk into the disk drive face up with the shutter for-

ward until it clicks into place.

FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8

CAUTION

Formatting a disk erases all the data

on the disk. Before you format a disk,

make sure it doesn’t contain any data

that you want to keep.

X Execute the format operation.

Press the START button.

➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute

the format, or NO to cancel.

A bar graph indicates the progress of the formatting process. Once the

disk has been formatted, the Clavinova can use it to store songs and

other data.

Disk

144

Format Types

2DD disks are formatted to hold 720 KB

of data; 2HD disks are formatted to hold

1.44 MB of data.

The Disk Format function cannot be used

while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the

Song mode before attempting to format a

disk.

147

CVP-201

■ Send Channel (Keyboard).........................................................................

MIDI

FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9

SEND CH

• Settings: OFF, 1 — 16

• Basic setting: See table at left.

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels (1 through 16) of the

transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data

transfer. The SEND CH function lets you set the MIDI transmit channels

for the keyboard parts.

Part Explanation Basic Setting

LEFT Left voice in Split mode (see page 36) 3

RIGHT1 Main voice 1

RIGHT2 Second voice in Dual mode (see page 33) 2

You can set each keyboard part to transmit on a separate channel. If

you set a part to OFF, the MIDI data for that part will not be transmitted.

● MIDI Reception

The Clavinova always receives MIDI data in the “Multi Timbre” mode. This is a mode in which the

Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1 through 16) by an

external MIDI device. This means that you can produce the sound of a full band or ensemble on the

Clavinova by using a computer or MIDI sequencer.

■ Local Control ..........................................................................................................

LOCAL

• Settings: ON, OFF

• Basic setting: ON

The term “local control” refers to the control of the internal tone gen-

erator by the keyboard. You will normally play the Clavinova with the

Local Control function set to ON.

Turning off the local control separates the keyboard from the tone

generator, so that the Clavinova will not output any sound when you play

the keyboard. Since keyboard performance data is still output via the

MIDI jacks, however, you can use this setting when you want to play an

external MIDI tone generator from the Clavinova’s keyboard without

sounding the internal voices.

To turn the local control on or off, press the LOCAL button. The data

dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used.

145

148

CVP-201

■ Synchronization....................................................................................................

MIDI

SYNC.

• Settings: INT. (internal clock),

EXT. (external clock)

• Basic setting: INT.

The playback tempo of a song or style is normally controlled by the

Clavinova’s internal clock. When you want the Clavinova’s playback

tempo to be controlled by an external sequencer or rhythm machine, you

should set the synchronization function to use an external clock. You

might use this function, for example, to play the Auto Accompaniment of

the Clavinova in perfect synchronization with an external sequencer.

To switch the synchronization from an internal clock to an external

clock (or vice versa), press the SYNC. button. The data dial and the [–]

and [+] buttons cannot be used.

■ MIDI Filter.................................................................................................................

The FUNCTION [MIDI 2] display contains MIDI filter settings that

can be used to enable or prevent the transmission and reception of certain

types of MIDI data.

FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10

● Program Change Messages

PROGRAM

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF

• Basic setting: Tx&Rx

Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change num-

bers received from an external keyboard or another MIDI device. For

example, the Clavinova can change voices in response to MIDI program

change messages received from a connected MIDI sequencer. (These

messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) The voices of con-

nected external MIDI devices can also be changed by program change

messages transmitted from the Clavinova. (Program change messages are

transmitted when changing voices on the panel of the Clavinova.)

Depending on your particular MIDI setup, you may find that this fea-

ture is convenient in some cases and not in others. Set the PROGRAM

function to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of program

change messages.

Bank MSB and LSB messages can be

transmitted and received even when

PROGRAM is set to OFF.

146

149

CVP-201

● Control Change Messages

CONTROL

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF

• Basic setting: Tx&Rx

Control change messages are used for various non-keyboard perform-

ance controls, such as the damper pedal, or for expressive control of the

sound of a connected MIDI device, such as effects and volume. For ex-

ample, the Clavinova can respond to control change messages transmit-

ted from an external MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the

keyboard-played voices.) Similarly, an external MIDI device can be con-

trolled by sending control change messages from the Clavinova to that

device. (Control change messages are transmitted when operating the

damper pedal, etc., on the Clavinova.)

Set CONTROL to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of

control change messages.

The control change data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in de-

tail on page 14 in the Reference Booklet.

● System Exclusive Messages

SYS EX.

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF

• Basic setting: Tx&Rx

System exclusive messages are used for more advanced or detailed

MIDI control, or for controls related to specific manufacturer’s devices.

Set SYS EX. to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of sys-

tem exclusive messages.

The system exclusive data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in

detail on page 16 in the Reference Booklet.

● Start/Stop Commands

START/STOP

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),

OFF

• Basic setting: OFF

A device that transmits the Start/Stop command can start and stop the

rhythm or sequence data performance of a receiving device via MIDI.

For example, you can transmit the Start/Stop command from an external

MIDI sequencer to start and stop the Auto Accompaniment or song play-

back on the Clavinova. Also, an external MIDI sequencer or rhythm ma-

chine can be started and stopped by starting and stopping the Auto Ac-

companiment on the Clavinova.

Set START/STOP to ON to enable the transmission and reception of

Start/Stop commands.

FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11

■ Receive Filter...........................................................................................................

RECEIVE FILTER

• Settings: ON, OFF (x 16)

• Basic setting: ON (x 16)

The Receive Filter function lets you prevent the Clavinova from re-

ceiving channel-specific MIDI messages — such as note data and control

changes — on certain MIDI channels.

This function is useful, for example, when you want to control some of

the Clavinova’s voices exclusively from an external sequencer, and others

using only the Clavinova’s keyboard or its built-in Auto Accompaniment

and Song mode functions. (You can also have the Clavinova ignore chan-

nels carrying messages that are intended for another instrument connected

to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal.)

By default, the Clavinova will receive messages on all 16 channels. Use

the following procedure to enable or disable the reception of a channel:

MIDI

147

150

CVP-201

■ Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) ............................

SEND CH (ACMP&RHY)

• Settings: OFF (not transmitted),

9–16ch (transmitted)

• Basic setting: OFF

SEND CH (HARMONY)

• Settings: OFF (not transmitted),

6–8ch (transmitted)

• Basic setting: OFF

When the ACMP&RHY function is set to 9—16ch, the performance

data for the rhythm and accompaniment parts is transmitted via the MIDI

[OUT] terminal over MIDI channels 9 through 16.

If the HARMONY function is set to 6–8ch, the notes added by the

harmony types listed below are transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal

over MIDI channels 6 through 8.

Z Select the channel.

Use the CHANNEL < and > LCD buttons to select the number of

the channel you want to enable or disable.

➔ An underline cursor is displayed below the selected channel

number.

X Press the rightmost LCD button.

➔ When the selected channel is enabled, ON is highlighted and the

channel number is enclosed in a solid box. When it is disabled,

OFF is highlighted, and the channel number is displayed without a

surrounding box.

MIDI TRANSPOSE

• Settings: ON (enabled),

OFF (disabled)

• Basic setting: ON

The MIDI Transpose function determines whether the Transpose set-

ting in the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] display (page 136) will affect

the MIDI data received by the Clavinova.

The Clavinova will normally transpose the data it receives. Press the

MIDI TRANSPOSE button to switch this function on or off.

■ MIDI Transpose ......................................................................................................

FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12

MIDI

148

151

CVP-201

• When transmitting rhythm, accompani-

ment, or harmony part data via MIDI,

do not select the MIDI channels used

by these parts as the send channels

(page 147) used to transmit the data

for your keyboard performance. Doing

so may result in your keyboard per-

formance data being mixed with the

Auto Accompaniment or Harmony

data.

• If ACMP&RHY or HARMONY is turned

on, the data for the corresponding

part(s) will be transmitted via MIDI,

even if the RIGHT1 send channel

(page 147) has been turned off.

■ Song Transmission............................................................................................

SONG

• Settings: OFF (not transmitted),

ON (transmitted)

• Basic setting: OFF

When the SONG function is set to ON, the Clavinova will transmit

song data via the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Select this setting when you

want an external tone generator to sound in response to song data played

back by the Clavinova.

The transmission of song data is turned off by default.

■ Remote Keyboard...............................................................................................

REMOTE KBD

• Settings: OFF (not received),

1 — 16 (receive channel)

• Basic setting: OFF

MIDI data received over the channel set with the REMOTE KBD

function will affect your keyboard performance. The received data also

can be recorded. Select OFF to prevent external MIDI data from affect-

ing your keyboard performance. The following data types can be re-

ceived:

• Key ON/OFF

• Control Change (performance data; only those listed below)

#1 Modulation

#7 Volume

#11 Expression

#64 Sustain Pedal

#66 Sostenuto Pedal

#67 Soft Pedal

#123 All notes off

MIDI data received by the remote key-

board function cannot be output via the

MIDI [OUT] terminal.

#0 BANK Select MSB*

#32 BANK Select LSB*

#6 Data Entry MSB

(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)

#96 Data Increment

(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)

#97 Data Decrement

(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)

#100 RPN LSB

(Pitch Bend Range only)

#101 RPN MSB

(Pitch Bend Range only)

• Program Change (voice change data)*

• Pitch Bend

Note: Items marked with an asterisk are used to change the main voice.

MIDI

149

Harmony types transmitted on channels 6 through 8:

• Echo • Tremolo • Trill • Strumming

• Add Jazz Gtr • Add Brass • Add Strings • In The Forest

* See page 69 for details on the Harmony function.

Notes added by other harmony types are always transmitted on the

RIGHT1 channel (page 147), regardless of this setting.

The rhythm, accompaniment, and harmony parts can be recorded by a

computer or external sequencer when these functions are turned on.

152

CVP-201

■ Backup............................................................................................................................

Backup

FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13

Backup functions

• Settings: ON, OFF

• Basic settings: ON (REGISTRATION)

OFF (all other groups)

This function allows you to set the backup of various parameter

groups on or off. When set to on, the corresponding settings will not be

reset to the basic settings (default settings) when power is turned off.

Press the ▼ or ▲ button or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to

select the desired group, then use the rightmost LCD button to set the

selected group to backup on/off. The (“*”) mark at the beginning of the

group name indicates that the backup setting of the group is turned on.

The settings of groups whose backup settings are set to off will return to

the basic settings (default settings) when the power is turned off.

Backup is used for the following groups on the Clavinova.

Group Description

VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings

REVERB/EFFECT Reverb, chorus, and effect settings

TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning

PEDAL Pedal function settings

ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings

SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode

REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings

MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings

Permanent Settings

The following settings are always backed

up:

• Help language

• Song volume

• Backup ON/OFF

Refer to page 11 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific

parameters in each group.

Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a

week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters

will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer

than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are main-

tained, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week.

150

153

CVP-201

■ Recall................................................................................................................................

This function can be used to recall the initial factory settings (basic

settings) for a group of parameters, or for all parameters at once.

Press the ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to

select the group you want to recall, then press the START button.

FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14

➔ An “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press the YES

button to recall, or NO to cancel.

The following parameter groups of the Clavinova can be recalled.

Group Description

VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings

REVERB/EFFECT Reverb, chorus, and effect settings

TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning

PEDAL Pedal function settings

ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings

SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode

REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings

MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings

ALL All of the above settings

Permanent Settings

The factory settings of the following

parameters are not recalled:

• Help language

• Song volume

• Backup ON/OFF

However, these and all other settings can

be reset to the initial factory values by

turning the power on while holding down

the rightmost key on the keyboard (C7).

When this is done, the “Back up data

erased and replaced by factory data”

message appears to indicate that all

backed up data has been erased and the

factory settings have been recalled. After

this message is displayed for a few sec-

onds, the main display will appear.

Refer to page 11 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific

parameters in each group.

Backup

151

154

CVP-201

The Micro Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each

key of the keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to a disk and

loaded whenever necessary. The currently loaded custom tuning can be

turned on or off at any time by using the leftmost LCD button in this

display.

Utility

FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15

■ Micro Tuning Setup............................................................................................

Z Select a key.

Press the key to be tuned.

➔ The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key will

appear in the display.

X Set the tuning.

TUNE

• Range: –100 cent — +100 cent

–1 — +1 semitone

• Basic Value: 0 cent (all keys)

Press the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] to

tune the pitch of the selected key. If you set the parameter at the

leftmost LCD button to ON, you can play the key being tuned in or-

der to check the sound during this operation. The normal tuning of ±0

cents for the selected key can be instantly recalled by simultaneously

pressing both the TUNE ▼ and ▲ buttons.

C Repeat steps 1 and 2.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the required keys have been tuned.

■ Micro Tuning Files...............................................................................................

The custom tuning can be named and saved to disk as a tuning file.

Tuning files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they are

no longer needed.

Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.

Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk

drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or

rename a tuning file, the inserted disk should contain the file in ques-

tion.

152

155

CVP-201

X Select the desired file operation.

Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file

operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

C Press the START button.

After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the

selected file operation appears.

The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140

through 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file

operation.

This feature allows you to select from various tuning (temperament)

configurations, when selecting PRESET in this display. By selecting

USER, you can create your own user scale, in which the tuning you set

for a single octave takes effect for the entire keyboard. The created tun-

ing can be saved to disk for future recall.

■ Preset Scale..............................................................................................................

This function lets you select from various pre-programmed tunings or

temperaments.

Until equal temperament — the most commonly used tuning at

present — was accepted, various tunings have been created over the

years for use with the particular music and instruments of the era. This

feature lets you play in historically authentic tunings, and get a better

feeling for the music of the corresponding eras.

The Clavinova contains the following seven temperaments:

LOAD See page 140.

SAVE See page 140.

DELETE See page 141.

NAME See page 141.

FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16

• EQUAL

• PURE(MAJOR)

• PURE(MINOR)

• MEANTONE

• PYTHAGOREAN

• WERCKMEISTER

• KIRNBERGER

Utility

153

The Scale Tuning function does not

affect the pitch of song data played back

by the Clavinova.

156

CVP-201

C Set the tuning.

TUNE

• Range: -64 cent — +63 cent

• Basic Value: 0 (all keys)

Z Select PRESET with the leftmost LCD button.

➔ The following display appears:

X Select a scale.

Press the SCALE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the parameter, then use the data

dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the temperament type.

When selecting temperaments other than equal (EQUAL) tempera-

ment, the central key (reference pitch for the temperament) must be set.

This allows you to produce the proper temperament in the desired key.

C Select the central key.

KEY

• Settings: C, C

, D, E

, E, F, F

, G, A

A, B

, B

• Basic setting: C

Press the KEY button to highlight the parameter, then use the data

dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the central key.

■ User Scale Setup .................................................................................................

This function allows you to individually tune each key within an oc-

tave. The setting made for one key is automatically assigned to the same

key in all other octaves.

Z Select USER with the leftmost LCD button.

➔ The following display appears:

X Press the key to be tuned.

➔ The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key

appears.

Utility

154

Set the pitch by pressing the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons, or by using the

data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can play the key being tuned to

check the sound during this operation. The default tuning of ±0 cents

can be instantly recalled for the selected key by simultaneously press-

ing the TUNE ▲ and ▼ buttons.

V Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the required keys have been tuned.

157

CVP-201

LOAD See page 140.

SAVE See page 140.

DELETE See page 141.

NAME See page 141.

■ User Scale Files...................................................................................................

The custom scale can be named and saved to disk as a user scale file.

User scale files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they

are no longer needed.

Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.

Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk

drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or

rename a user scale file, the inserted disk should contain the file in

question.

X Select the desired file operation.

Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file

operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

C Press the START button.

After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the

selected file operation appears.

The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140

through 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file

operation.

Utility

155

158

CVP-201

The Clavinova is equipped with jacks that let you connect a variety of audio devices. You

can connect headphones, a stereo system, or PA equipment for audio output, as well as

input from a tone generator or other instrument.

Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting audio equipment, as fail-

ing to do so can result in damage to speakers and other problems.

CHAPTER 9: Connections

Audio Connections

Recommended Headphones:

Yamaha HPE-160 headphones

Headphones

To use headphones, connect them to

one of the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/

4" phone jacks) located below the left

end of the keyboard. The Clavinova’s

built-in speaker system is automatically

shut off when a pair of headphones are

connected. Two people can enjoy listen-

ing to the Clavinova together by con-

necting two pairs of headphones to the

two jacks.

PHONES

You can connect the Clavinova to a wide range of audio equipment by

using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks, which are located at the left end

of the unit on the rear panel.

■ AUX IN Jacks...........................................................................................................

Audio Input and Output

CAUTION

Never connect the Clavinova’s AUX

OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks, either

directly or via external audio equip-

ment. Such connections could result

in a feedback loop that will make nor-

mal performance impossible, and may

even damage the Clavinova.

The volume of the audio signal input at

the AUX IN jacks is affected by the

[MASTER VOLUME] slider.

The sounds of other instruments or

tone generator modules can be output

through the speaker system of the

Clavinova by connecting audio cables to

the AUX IN jacks as shown here.

Use the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack for

monophonic input. For stereo input, con-

nect the left channel output to the AUX

IN [L/L+R] jack, and the right channel

output to the AUX IN [R] jack.

Tone Generator

AUX IN

L/L

156

CAUTION

159

CVP-201

■ AUX OUT Jacks ....................................................................................................

By connecting audio cables to the

AUX OUT jacks as shown here, you can

output the sound of the Clavinova to a

stereo system, amplifier, mixing console,

or recording equipment. Since the AUX

OUT jacks provide output at a fixed

level, you will need to use the controls

on the connected equipment to adjust the

overall volume of the sound from the

Clavinova.

Use the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack for

monophonic output. For stereo output,

connect the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack to

the left channel input, and the AUX OUT

[R] jack to the right channel input.

AUX OUT

L/L

Stereo System

Audio Connections

157

160

CVP-201

Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI terminals on the Clavinova to

other MIDI devices. The Clavinova’s MIDI terminals are located at the

left of the unit on the rear panel.

Tone generators or other devices to be controlled by the Clavinova can

be connected to the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Devices that will control the

Clavinova should be connected to the MIDI [IN] terminal. If you have a

personal computer or sequencer that will control the Clavinova, you may

want to connect it to both the [IN] and [OUT] terminals to allow two-way

communication. In this case, any other instruments to be controlled by the

same device can be connected to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal.

You can use the MIDI terminals to connect your Clavinova to a wide range of MIDI devices,

including personal computers, sequencers, tone generators, and so on. In addition, the Clavinova

features a [TO HOST] connector that lets you connect it directly to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/

AT, or other compatible personal computer without the use of a special MIDI interface.

Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting computers or MIDI equipment, as failing to

do so can result in damage to equipment.

Connecting MIDI Equipment

MIDI Sequencer Tone Generator

THRU

OUT

MIDI

[TO HOST] or MIDI?

• If you simply want to connect your

Clavinova to a personal computer, it

may be more convenient to use the

[TO HOST] terminal, as your computer

won’t need a special MIDI interface to

make that connection.

• The MIDI terminals are particularly

convenient when you want the

Clavinova to function as part of a more

extensive MIDI setup.

You can connect the Clavinova to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/AT,

or compatible personal computer using the [TO HOST] connector, which

is located at the left of the unit on the rear panel. If you do, be sure to set

the adjacent [HOST SELECT] switch to the appropriate setting for your

computer model.

Connecting to a Host Computer

• Turn off both the Clavinova and the

computer before connecting the cable.

• When the Clavinova is connected to a

host computer, turn on the computer

first, then the Clavinova.

• Disconnect the cable when not using

the [TO HOST] terminal. If it is left

connected, the Clavinova may not

function properly.

Data Connections

158

CAUTION

HOST SELECT

MIDI

Mac

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your

Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific

models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Home Page:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

When you use the MIDI termi-

nals, set the [HOST SELECT]

switch to the MIDI position. The

MIDI terminals will not transmit or

receive data if this switch is set to

any other position.

You can set the Clavinova’s

MIDI parameters using pages 9

through 12 of the FUNCTION dis-

play (see page 147 through 150).

161

CVP-201

Data Connections

■ Connecting to an Apple Macintosh or Compatible Com-

puter

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the modem or printer

port on your Macintosh (whichever port your MIDI software is using for MIDI

data communication) using a standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable.

Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the “Mac” position.

You may also have to make other MIDI interface settings on the computer

side, depending on the type of software you use (refer to your software owner’s

manual). In any case, the clock speed should be set to 1 MHz.

2 (HSK i)1

1 (HSK 0)2

5 (RxD-)3

MINI DIN

8-PIN

4 GND4

3 (TxD-)5

8 (RxD+)6

7 (GP i)7

6 (TxD+)8

MINI DIN

8-PIN

● “Mac” Cable Connections

• 8-pin system peripheral cable

• Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps

Apple Macintosh

compatible computer

Set to the “Mac”

position.

HOST SELECT

MIDI

Mac

TO HOST

■ Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ................................

If your system doesn’t work

properly with the connections

and settings listed above, your

software may require different

settings. Check your software

operation manual: if it requires

a 31,250 bps data transfer rate,

set the [HOST SELECT] switch

to “PC-1.”

Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port on

your IBM computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cross

cable. Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the “PC-2” position.

Refer to your software owner’s manual for information on any settings you

might have to make on the computer side.

8 (CTS)1

7 (RST)2

2 (RxD)3

4 5 (GND)

3 (TxD) 5

MINI DIN

8-PIN

D-SUB

9-PIN

● “PC-2” Cable Connections

• 8-pin mini DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cable

• Data transfer rate: 38,400 bps

IBM-PC/AT compatible

computer

Set to the “PC-2”

position.

HOST SELECT

MIDI

Mac

TO HOST

● Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)

To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s

TO HOST jack, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha

CBX driver for Windows). You can download this driver from the fol-

lowing XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:

http://www.yamaha-xg.com

● Connector Pin Numbers

678

D-SUB 9-PIN

MINI DIN 8-PIN

159

CVP-201

162

APPENDICES

Effect Type Lists

160

The tables in this appendix contain descriptions of the various

reverb, chorus, and effect types that are available for use on the

CVP-201.

Reverb Type List

Type Description

HALL1

Concert hall reverb effects

HALL2

HALL3

HALL4

ROOM1

Small room reverb effects

ROOM2

ROOM3

ROOM4

STAGE1

Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument

STAGE2

PLATE1

Simulated steel plate reverb effects

PLATE2

Chorus Type List

Type Description

CHORUS1

CHORUS2

CHORUS3

CHORUS4

CHORUS5

FLANGER1

FLANGER2

FLANGER3

FLANGER4

Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness

to the sound

Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking

off and landing

163

CVP-201

Effect Type Lists

161

Effect Type List

Type Description

HALL1

HALL2

HALL3

HALL4

ROOM1

ROOM2

ROOM3

ROOM4

STAGE1

STAGE2

PLATE1

PLATE2

EARLY REF1

EARLY REF2

GATE REVERB Simulation of a gated reverb

REVERSE GATE Simulation of a gated reverb played back in reverse

CHORUS1

CHORUS2

CHORUS3

CHORUS4

CHORUS5

FLANGER1

FLANGER2

FLANGER3

FLANGER4

SYMPHONIC

PHASER Modulation effect created by cyclical phase shifting

ROTARY SP1

ROTARY SP2

ROTARY SP3

ROTARY SP4

ROTARY SP5

TREMOLO1

TREMOLO2

GTR TREMOLO Tremolo effect that is suitable for guitar sounds

AUTO PAN

Concert hall reverb effects

Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness

to the sound

Early reflection components of the reverb effect

Simulated steel plate reverb effects

Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument

Small room reverb effects

Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking

off and landing

Multi-stage versions of the modulation provided by a

celeste-type effect

Modulation effects that simulate rotary speakers

Cyclical volume modulation effects

Effects that cyclically move the sound from right to left

and front to back

CVP-201

164

162

Effect Type List

AUTO WAH

DELAY LCR Three delay sounds: L (left), R (right), and C (center)

DELAY LR L and R delays with two feedback delays

ECHO L and R delays with independent feedback for L and R

CROSS DELAY Two delays (L and R) with crossed feedback

DIST HARD

DIST SOFT

EQ DISCO Disco-oriented equalizer effect

EQ TEL

Equalizer effect that simulates sound heard over the phone

Cyclical wah effects; useful for electric guitar sounds,

etc.

Effect Type Lists

Effects that add distortion with an edge to the sound;

useful for electric guitar sounds, etc.

165

CVP-201

This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as selection of a style

or Music Database setup) that cannot be performed during playback.

➾ Stop song playback, or exit the Song Play mode, then perform the operation again.

This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as copying or deletion

of song data) that cannot be performed in the Song Record mode.

➾ Stop recording, or exit the Song Record mode, then perform the operation again.

A button that does not have a function in the current mode has been pressed.

This prompt appears when you press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button (page 21).

➾ Press the panel button that corresponds to the settings you want to display. (Be

sure to press the second button while this message is showing.)

This message appears if you press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by a panel button that

does not correspond to a Direct Access display. (See page 21.)

➾ Press [DIRECT ACCESS] again, then press a panel button that corresponds to a

Direct Access display.

This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as song data conver-

sion) that cannot be performed during recording or playback.

➾ Stop song recording or playback, or exit the Song Record or Song Play mode, then

perform the operation again.

This prompt appears when there is no disk in the disk drive.

➾ Put the proper disk in the drive and attempt the operation again.

This prompt appears when you attempt to rename or convert a song that doesn’t contain

any data.

➾ Select a song that contains data, or insert a disk with song data into the floppy disk

drive.

This message appears when you attempt to load, rename, or delete a file, and no file of

the specified type can be found on the disk in the disk drive.

➾ Create a file or insert a disk with a proper file.

This message appears if you try to save a custom style to disk (page 82), but have se-

lected a memory number that doesn’t contain any style data.

➾ Create a custom style, or select a memory number that contains custom style data.

This message appears when a new or improperly formatted disk has been inserted into

the disk drive. (See page 111.)

➾ Press OK if you want to format the disk. Press CANCEL if you want to abort the

formatting process.

This message appears when you attempt to record or perform other file operations using a

disk whose write-protect tab is in the “protect” position.

➾

Set the write-protect tab to the “write-enable” position (page 112), then try the opera-

tion again. If the operation still cannot be performed, the disk itself has internal write

protection, making it impossible to perform recording or file operations on the disk.

163

Messages

● General (Panel Operation)

● General (Direct Access)

● General (Disk-related)

CVP-201

166

An error occurred while writing to (as in recording or storing files) or reading from the disk.

➾ Try the operation again after pressing the OK button. If the error occurs a second

time, the disk or the disk drive unit may be faulty. If you suspect the drive to be at

fault, refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.

This message appears when you attempt to record over parts or perform other operations

on song files that are incompatible or do not allow such operations. Depending on the

song file type, operations such as additional recording, copying, deleting, etc. may not be

possible using the CVP-201.

This appears for a few seconds when a time-consuming operation such as Format, Song

Copy, etc., is finished.

This message is displayed while data is being transferred between the Clavinova and the

disk.

➾ The message disappears automatically when the operation is finished.

When operations such as Song Delete or Format are selected, this prompts you to confirm

whether you want to go ahead with the operation or not.

➾ Press YES to execute the operation. Press NO to return to the previous display.

The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data.

➾ Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary data in the disk (page 144), or

use a disk that has more available space. If this message appears during song

recording, recording will stop and any data recorded up to that point will be saved

automatically.

This message appears when you try to create more files than the disk is capable of stor-

ing. You can record up to 60 song files on a 2DD or 2HD disk. A 2DD disk can hold about

107 files (of various types), and a 2HD disk can hold up to about 219 files.

➾ Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary files from the disk (page 144),

or use a disk that has more available space.

A file with the same name already exists.

➾ Press the OK button if you wish to overwrite the original file with new data, or press

CANCEL to abort the operation.

This message appears when you try to execute other operations while reading data from

the disk or saving data.

➾ Wait until the data read/write operation is completed, then perform the operation

again.

● General (Memory-related)

This message appears when the Clavinova’s memory has become full while recording a

song in the internal memory (page 133). If this happens, recording will stop and any data

recorded up to that point will be saved automatically.

This message is also displayed if the Clavinova’s memory becomes full when recording

data in a custom style (see page 84).

Messages

164

This message appears when you attempt to record over or edit the data of commercially

available software or data recorded on instruments other than the CVP-109/107/105/700/

103/201 or the CVP-94/92/98/96/600.

➾ Press YES to convert the data for recording or editing on the CVP-109/107/105/

700/103/201. Press NO if you don’t want to convert the data.

It may not be possible to record to tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 of songs con-

verted in this manner.

This message appears while the Clavinova is storing the data of a song recorded to the

internal memory after it has been edited using the Track Edit or Initial Edit functions.

➾ Complete the data write operation, then perform the other operation.

167

CVP-201

● Custom Style Mode

This message appears when you execute an operation, such as playback of disk software,

that will cause the Clavinova to delete data recorded to the internal memory.

➾ Press YES to delete the data recorded to the internal memory, then perform the

desired operation. Press the NO button if you want to keep the data.

This message appears if you try to select one of the following functions while editing song

data that has been recorded to the internal memory: Chord Sequence (page 121), Setup

Memory (126), or Song Name (page 127).

➾ Use the Song Copy function (page 142) to copy the song to a disk, delete the CVP

MEMORY song (page 144), then perform the desired operation using the data on

the disk.

This message appears for a few seconds when the Custom Style mode is engaged.

(See page 74.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the time signature of the

custom style. (See page 75.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the number of measures in

a section of the custom style. (See page 75.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to perform an operation that can only

be performed after the part has been deleted. (See page 76.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you store a custom style (page 79). It also ap-

pears if you try to change styles before you’ve stored the custom style (page 85).

➾ Select OK to store the custom style. Press CANCEL to return to the previous dis-

play without storing data.

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to exit the Custom Style mode before

storing the custom style. (See page 85.)

➾ Select YES to store the custom style. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CAN-

CEL to return to the previous display.

This message appears when the previous version of the custom style cannot be recalled

because the time signature has been changed. (See page 80.)

If you attempt to save a custom style to disk before storing it in memory, this message

prompts you to store the style before proceeding. (See page 83.)

This message appears if there is not enough internal memory capacity available to store

the custom style. (See page 84.)

This message appears if the style selected for deletion in the display shown above is the

source style on which the style currently being edited was based.

➾ Press OK to return to the preceding display, and select a different style for deletion.

This message appears when DELETE is selected in the display shown above.

➾ Select the style to be deleted and press the OK button. Press CANCEL if you do

not want to delete the style.

Messages

165

CVP-201

168

● Song Copy & Disk Copy

This message appears before you start a Song Copy or Disk Copy operation to inform you

of the number of times the disks must be exchanged. (See page 143.)

This message prompts you to insert the destination disk when copying data from one disk

to another. (See page 143.)

This message appears when you try to copy data from a 2DD disk to a 2HD disk — or vice

versa — using the Disk Copy function (page 142).

➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then perform the operation again from the

beginning. Make sure the destination disk you insert is the same type (2DD or

2HD) as the source disk being copied.

This message appears if you insert the source disk when prompted to insert the destina-

tion disk while using the Disk Copy function (page 143) to copy data from one disk to an-

other.

➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again

from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful

not to confuse the source and destination disks.

● Style File Load

This message appears if you attempt to load a Style file when the memory capacity is not

sufficient to hold the specified file. (See page 87.)

Some Style files are too large to be handled by the LISTEN function. (See page 87.)

➾ Load the Style file, then use the normal playback methods to hear the style in

question.

● Chord Sequence

This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Chord Sequence function

while recording.

➾ Press YES to store the recorded data. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CAN-

CEL to return to the Chord Sequence function without storing.

This message appears during Chord Sequence recording when you attempt to enter an

accompaniment style or section change at a position other than the beginning of a meas-

ure.

➾ Record the style or section change in question at the beginning of the measure.

(See page 122.)

● Other Record Edit

This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Initial Edit function without

writing the data to disk.

➾ Press YES to save the edited data. Press NO to exit without saving. Press CANCEL

to return to the Initial Edit display without saving.

This confirmation prompt appears when you execute the Setup Memory function (page

126) to save the current panel settings with the song being edited in Song Record mode.

➾ Select YES to save the panel settings. Press CANCEL to return to the RECORD

EDIT 2 display without saving.

Messages

166

169

CVP-201

● Hardware-related

● Song Data Conversion

When you first insert the destination disk while copying a song from one disk to another

disk, this message prompts you to specify the song number to which the song is to be

copied. (See page 143.)

This message prompts you to insert the source disk when copying data from one disk to

another. (See page 143.)

This message is displayed if you insert a disk other than the specified disk (source or

destination) when prompted to exchange disks while using the Disk Copy function (page

143) to copy data from one disk to another.

➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again

from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful

to insert the correct disk as specified.

This message indicates that you have selected the same song number as both the source

and the destination when copying a song within a disk. (See sidebar, page 143.)

➾ Change the destination song number.

This message appears if you attempt to convert song data that has been saved on a 2HD

disk. (See page 145.)

➾ Press OK and copy the song data to be converted to a 2DD disk, then perform the

data conversion using the 2DD disk.

Following conversion of the song data, this message displays the song number to which

the data was saved.

This message appears when the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is

not properly connected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the

MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active.

➾ Turn off both the Clavinova and the host computer. Check the cable connection and

the position of the HOST SELECT switch (page 160), then turn on the computer

first, followed by the Clavinova.

The Clavinova will retain data protected by the Backup function (page 152) as long as it is

used regularly. If the instrument is not turned on for a week or longer, however, the data

may be lost. This message appears when the Clavinova is turned on after data has been

lost. It also appears when you recall all factory data (page 153.)

Messages

167

CVP-201

170

Problem

The Clavinova does not turn on.

A click or pop is heard when the

power is turned on or off.

Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s

speakers.

The display is too bright or too dark

to read.

The keyboard volume is low com-

pared to that of the Auto Accompa-

niment or song playback.

The volume of the Auto Accompa-

niment or song playback is low

compared to that of the keyboard.

The overall volume is low, or no

sound is heard.

The damper pedal has no effect, or

the sound continuously sustains

even when the damper pedal is not

pressed.

Style or song playback does not

start.

When the keyboard is played, not

all of the notes sound.

Solution

Securely insert the female plug into

the socket on the Clavinova, and the

male plug into a proper AC outlet.

This is normal, and is no cause for

concern.

Turn off the mobile phone, or use it

further away from the Clavinova.

Adjust the contrast of the display

using the [CONTRAST] control.

(See page 11.)

Increase the overall keyboard level in

the main display (page 23), or use the

VOLUME function in the appropriate

KEYBOARD display (pages 32, 34,

or 37) to raise the volume of the key-

board part in question.

Raise the [ACMP/SONG VOL-

UME] level.

Raise the part or track level(s) in the

appropriate MIXER display (page

65 or 100).

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level.

Unplug the headphones.

Turn the Local Control function on.

(See page 147.)

Securely insert the pedal cord plug

into the proper jack. (See page 34

in the Reference booklet.)

Set the MIDI Sync function to INT.

(See page 148.)

Since the configuration of the tone

generation system is such that later

notes have priority, previous notes

may occasionally be cut off. (See

“Specifications” in the Reference

Booklet for details about the simul-

taneous polyphonic capacity.)

Cause

The Clavinova has not been plugged

in properly.

Electrical current is being applied to

the instrument.

The noise may be due to interference

caused by the use of a mobile phone

in close proximity to the Clavinova.

The brightness may be affected by

the surrounding temperature.

Either the overall keyboard volume

or the independent volume level of

the keyboard part is set too low.

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] is

set too low.

The volume level of one or more

accompaniment parts or song tracks

is set too low.

The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low.

Headphones are connected.

The Local Control function is turned off.

The pedal cord plug is not connected.

The MIDI Sync function is set to EXT.

The Clavinova’s total simultaneous

polyphonic capacity (maximum

number of notes) has been exceeded.

Troubleshooting

168

171

CVP-201

The Auto Accompaniment does not

play back.

The desired chord is not recognized

or output by the Auto Accompani-

ment.

The maximum of 60 songs cannot

be recorded.

Some tracks do not play back when

playing back data.

The Auto Accompaniment is not

turned on.

The keys are not being played cor-

rectly.

The keys are not being played ac-

cording to the selected accompani-

ment mode.

The memory capacity is full because

the playing time of one or more

songs is long, or many functions

were used.

Playback of the track(s) is turned off.

Press the [ACMP ON] button to

turn on the Auto Accompaniment.

Refer to the Fingering Chart (page

12 of the Reference Booklet).

Check the accompaniment mode,

and play the keys according to the

selected mode. (See page 59.)

Delete unnecessary songs (page

144) or record to a new disk.

Turn on playback for the tracks that

you want to hear. (See pages 97 and

100.)

Problem SolutionCause

Troubleshooting

169

CVP-201

172

MIDI and Data Compatibility

■ MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a worldwide

standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible

musical instruments and equipment to share musical information

and control one another.

• Depending on the MIDI device, the transmittable/receivable data

differs, and only data which is commonly recognized among the

connected MIDI devices can be transmitted or received. You can

check whether your instrument supports certain data types by

referring to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the owner’s

manual for that instrument. The MIDI Implementation Chart for

the CVP-201 is found on page 30 in the Reference Booklet.

MIDI Terminals

● Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence format.”

• Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the

disk matches that of the MIDI device.

[Common Sequence Formats]

SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two

types: Format 0 or Format 1.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most

commercially available software is recorded as Format 0.

• The CVP-201 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format

1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17 chunks).

• Song data recorded on the CVP-201 is automatically re-

corded as SMF Format 0.

ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s

MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments.

This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.

• The CVP-201 is compatible with ESEQ.

● Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called

“program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice

allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.”

• Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allo-

cation format of the song data matches that of the compat-

ible MIDI device used for playback.

[Main Voice Allocation Formats]

GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level

1, as is most commercially available software.

• The CVP-201 is compatible with GM System Level 1.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format,

and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more

voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over

voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into

the future.

• The CVP-201 is compatible with XG.

• Song data recorded on the CVP-201 using voices in the

[XG] category is XG-compatible.

DOC

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instru-

ments.

This is also a common format used with various Yamaha soft-

ware.

• The CVP-201 is compatible with DOC.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions

above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depend-

ing on the specifications of the devices and particular data re-

cording methods.

MIDI Cable

Connect MIDI devices with special MIDI cables.

• MIDI settings can be made in the MIDI pages of the Func-

tion mode display. (See pages 147 through 150.)

• Further information on MIDI and its applications is available

in various music books and magazines.

■ Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility:

whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded

by CVP-201, and whether or not the CVP-201 can playback com-

mercially available song data or song data created for other instru-

ments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may

be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have

to perform some special operations before the data can be played

back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the

information below.

● Basic Check Points

The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the

items below.

• Disk Format

• Sequence format

• Voice allocation format

● Disk format

Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with

various devices, including computers. Different devices have

different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first

configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.

This operation is called “formatting.”

• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided,

double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density),

and each type has different formatting systems.

• CVP-201 can record and playback with both types of floppy

disks.

• When formatted by the CVP-201, a 2DD disk stores up to

720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to 1.44 MB

(megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44 MB” indi-

cate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indi-

cate the format type of disk.)

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used

is compatible with the format of the disk.

This terminal transmits the MIDI data.

This terminal

receives the MIDI

data.

OUT

THRU

MIDI

Data received via the

MIDI IN terminal is re-

transmitted unchanged

through this terminal.

170

173

CVP-201

Index

Accompaniment Mode ....................57, 59-61

accompaniment styles ................ see “styles”

All Setup files ....................................139-141

audio connections .............................158-159

Auto Accompaniment ............................57-72

Backup .....................................................152

basic settings .............................................19

beat .................................................26, 74-75

channels, MIDI ..........................147, 150-151

Chord Assistance ..................................62-64

chord indication .....................................60-61

Chord Sequence ...............................121-125

chorus ...................................................44-45

chorus, Custom Style ............................81-82

chorus, Song .....................................100-101

Chorus Type List ......................................162

computer ...........................................160-161

contrast ......................................................11

controls .................................................12-13

convert, song data ...................................145

Custom Style.........................................73-88

CVP MEMORY (song) .............................133

damper pedal .....................................40, 138

data dial .....................................................17

deleting, Chord Sequence .......................124

deleting, data files ....................................141

deleting, Style Files ....................................83

deleting, tracks .........................................129

Demo Play ............................................14-15

detune ........................................................35

Direct Access .............................................22

Disk Copy..........................................142-143

disk drive ......................................................9

Disk Format......................................111, 146

Disk functions....................................139-146

display pages .............................................19

Dual.......................................................33-35

Easy Play .........................................105, 107

Effect Type List .................................163-164

effects ...................................................46-48

effects, Song .....................................100-101

end mark ..........................................124, 125

ending pattern .......................................55-56

Fade In.......................................................55

Fade Out ....................................................56

fast forward ..............................................103

file icons .....................................................94

fill-in patterns.........................................51-52

filter, MIDI Filter.................................148-150

fingering (chords) ...................... 60-61, 62-64

Fixed Velocity........................................... 137

floppy disks ..................................................9

formatting, Disk ................................111, 146

free tempo ..................................................96

Function ............................................134-135

function, resetting..................................19-20

functions in normal rectangles ..............20-21

functions in rounded rectangles .................16

Glide Range .............................................138

Guide ..........................................15, 105-109

guide lamps..............................................109

Guide Mode .............................................108

Harmony ...............................................69-71

headphones .......................................11, 158

Help.......................................................27-28

host computer ...................................160-161

highlighted items ........................................16

Initial Edit ..........................................130-132

introduction pattern ....................................54

key cover....................................................10

Key Touch ................................................137

keyboard guide lamps..............................109

keyboard percussion..................................31

LCD, changing a value...............................17

LCD, selecting a function ...........................16

Left Pedal .................................................138

left voice................................................36-39

loading, data files .....................................140

loading, style files..................................86-88

Local Control ............................................147

lyrics ...................................................15, 109

main display ...............................................16

main voice .................................29-32, 33, 36

memory, recording to ...............................133

menu display ..............................................18

messages..........................................165-169

messages, Custom Style ......................84-85

metronome ............................................25-26

Micro Tuning .....................................154-155

MIDI equipment........................................160

MIDI Filter .........................................148-149

MIDI functions ...................................147-151

MIDI terminals ..........................................160

MIDI Transpose .......................................150

Mixer, Auto Accompaniment .................65-66

Mixer, Song .......................................100-101

multi-track recording .........................115-118

Music Database ....................................67-68

music stand ................................................10

naming, Custom Style ...........................78-79

naming, data files .....................................141

naming, Song ...........................................127

Next Note .........................................105, 107

octave ............................................32, 34, 38

One Touch Setting .....................................72

pages, display ............................................19

pan32, 35, 38

pan, Custom Style.................................81-82

pan, Song..........................................100-101

panel controls........................................12-13

part, recording .......................................76-78

part, track assignment...........................98-99

Part Cancel ...........................................97-98

part levels.................................. 65-66, 81-82

pause .......................................................103

Pedal functions ........................................138

pedals ..................................................38, 40

Pianist styles ........................................49, 58

Piano Roll.................................106, 107, 109

playback, Auto Accompaniment......58, 60-61

playback, Custom Style .............................84

Playback, demo songs ..........................14-15

playback, Song ...................................93-104

playback, styles.....................................51-56

playback, style files ....................................88

power .........................................................11

practicing...........................................105-107

preset scale.......................................155-156

Punch-in/out Recording ....................118-120

171

CVP-201

174

quantizing....................................78, 129-130

Quick Recording ...............................112-115

Recall .......................................................153

Recall Section ............................................80

recalling, registration.............................90-91

Receive Filter ....................................149-150

Record Edit functions ........................126-132

recording, Chord Sequence ..............121-125

recording, Custom Style........................73-80

recording, Song.................................110-120

recording, without a disk ..........................133

Registration ...........................................89-92

Registration file .................................139-141

Registration Freeze...............................91-92

Remote Keyboard ....................................151

Repeat ..............................................101-103

Reverb ..................................................41-43

reverb, Custom Style ............................81-82

reverb, Song .....................................100-101

Reverb Type List ......................................162

rewind ......................................................103

Rhythm On/Off .........................................125

saving, Custom Style ............................82-83

saving, data files ...............................140-141

saving, Initial Edit .....................................132

Scale Tuning .....................................155-157

second voice .........................................33-35

section.............................................74-75, 80

Send Channel ...........................147, 150-151

Setup files .........................................139-141

Setup Memory...................................126-127

setup procedure .........................................10

soft pedal ...........................................40, 138

software ...................................................104

song, Chord Sequence .....................121-125

Song Copy ........................................142-143

Song Data Transform...............................145

Song Delete .............................................144

Song Name ..............................................127

Song Play............................................93-104

Song Record .....................................110-120

Song Transmission ..................................151

sostenuto pedal..........................................40

Sound Repeat ..........................106, 107, 109

Split .......................................................36-39

Split Point .......................................36, 39, 64

stereo position.................................see “pan”

storing, Custom Style ............................79-80

storing, Registration ..............................89-90

Style Clear .................................................80

style file .................................................86-88

styles, custom .......................................73-88

styles, playback.....................................51-56

styles, selecting.....................................49-50

Synchronization (MIDI) ............................148

Synchronized Start.....................................53

Synchronized Stop .....................................62

Tap Start ....................................................53

tempo ...........................................25, 96, 100

terminals and jacks ...............................12-13

time signature .................................26, 74-75

Track Delete.............................................129

Track Edit ..........................................128-130

Track Mix .................................................128

Track Recording................................115-118

Track Quantize..................................129-130

tracks, adding...........................................118

tracks, song structure...............................110

Transform.................................................145

Transpose ........................................136, 150

troubleshooting .................................170-171

Tune .................................................136, 156

user scale..........................................156-157

velocity .....................................................137

Voice Setting............................................137

voices, selecting........................29-30, 76, 99

volume ..................................................23-24

volume, metromome ..................................26

volume, part .............................. 65-66, 81-82

volume, song..............................................99

volume, track.....................................100-101

volume, voices ...............................32, 34, 37

Index

172

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted

by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio

frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instruc-

tions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful

to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC

regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in

all installations. If this product is found to be the source of inter-

ference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and

“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker

or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the an-

tenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type

of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Divi-

sion, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed

by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(class B)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals

in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

(2 wires)

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE

BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES,

INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA

BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU

FOND.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.

(polarity)

173

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic prod-

uct, basic precautions should always be followed. These pre-

cautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions,

Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, in-

cluding connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are

manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact

your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable)

instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the

name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic

found in the Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug

(one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the

plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the

problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete

outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power sup-

plies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any

power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners

manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by

Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where any-

one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or

connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is

not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the

minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE:

The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling

capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electri-

cian.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in loca-

tions that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instruc-

tions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be

assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products

should be installed in locations that do not significantly con-

tribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this prod-

uct close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and

other devices that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam-

ples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,

sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from

the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for ex-

tended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when

there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm

activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualified service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de-

scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing

should be referred to qualified service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing

sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT

operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a

level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or

ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-

sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the

product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are de-

signed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that

benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are

well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

174

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America,

Keyboard Division

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panama S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Home Keyboard Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: 971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3486-0011

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria

3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-3273

[CL] 21

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

V780550 1??PO???.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia

Clavinova Web site (English only)

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual IMPORTANT Check Your Power Supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Model _____________________________________ Serial No. __________________________________ 92-469- ➀ (bottom) Purchase Date ______________________________ PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. ■ Using the bench (If included) • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. ■ Saving data • Internal backed-up data (see page 152) is retained for about 1 week after the power is turned off. If the period is exceeded, the data will be lost. Be sure to turn the power switch on for a few minutes at least once a week. The data could be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk (see page 139). • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. 1 (1)B-7 CVP-201 3 Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Accessories ● Music Software Collection Disk (and Music Book) This disk features sample songs that you can play back on your Clavinova. ● Floppy Disk Use this blank disk to record your performances. ● Owner’s Manual This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova. ● Reference Booklet This manual contains lists of voices, styles, and parameters, etc., as well as specifications and assembly instructions for your Clavinova. ● Bench A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchaser’s personal use is prohibited. ● Trademarks: • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. The Panel Logos The logos printed on the Clavinova panel indicate standards/formats it supports and special features it includes. GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the Clavinova’s XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song files. Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices. Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide highquality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The Clavinova uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Custom Style feature. XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The Clavinova is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The Clavinova is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) 2 4 CVP-201 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Features of the Clavinova ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● Easy-to-use LCD Display The LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand control of the Clavinova’s operations (page 16). ● Wealth of Rich, Realistic Voices The CVP-201 has a wide variety of authentic and dynamic voices, including 195 original voices, 480 XG voices, and 12 drum/SFX kits. These include exceptionally natural-sounding piano, strings and brass voices, and the particularly expressive “SweetTrumpet” voice. Moreover, you can play realistic drum and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard (page 31). ● Playback of Song Disks The Clavinova can play back various commercially available song disks. With the appropriate disk software, you can play the piano part of the song yourself along with a full orchestra or backing band (page 93). If the software contains lyrics, you can display them on the Clavinova’s LCD. ● Special Guide Functions for Easy Learning With the appropriate disk software, the LCD display and guide lamps help you learn songs by showing you when and where to play the proper notes. The three-step system helps you to master each song quickly and easily (page 105). ● Fun, Dynamic Automatic Accompaniment The Auto Accompaniment of the Clavinova gives you full, exciting instrumental backing in your favorite music styles, according to the chords you play (page 57). There’s even a wide selection of “Pianist” styles that allow you to enjoy solo piano accompaniment (page 58). Choose from 160 accompaniment styles, or create your own custom styles (page 73). ● Easy Access to a Variety of Musical Enjoyment The Clavinova offers several ways to change panel settings without a lot of fuss. You can use the One Touch Setting feature to select from four sets of voice, effect, and other settings appropriate to each accompaniment style (page 72). Or access the Music Database to choose from 463 sets of style and voice settings, selectable by title or style (page 67). You can even save your current setup for instant recall later using the handy Registration function (page 89). ● Easy-to-use Recording Features You can record songs using a variety of methods, depending on your keyboard expertise and preference. Choose from the Quick Recording, Track Recording, and Chord Sequence Recording functions (page 110). ● Convenient TO HOST Terminals for Direct Connection to Computers The Clavinova can be used as a high-quality sound source to play back music software for computers. It can also be used as a master keyboard, to enter performance data and create music with a computer (page 160). “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Home Page: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ 3 Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ CVP-201 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Table of Contents CHAPTER 1: Getting Ready About This Manual 8 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks 9 Setting Up the Clavinova 10 Music Stand ..................................................................................... 10 Key Cover ........................................................................................ 10 Turning the Power On and Off ......................................................... 11 Headphones ..................................................................................... 11 Other Connections ........................................................................... 11 Panel Controls and Terminals 12 Playing the Demo Songs 14 CHAPTER 2: 23 Adjusting the Overall Volume ........................................................... 23 Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume ............................... 23 Setting the Keyboard Volume .......................................................... 23 Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels ............................... 24 Using the Metronome 25 Using the Metronome ....................................................................... 25 Changing the Metronome Settings .................................................. 26 Using the Help Mode 27 CHAPTER 3: Voices Selecting Voices 33 Selecting the Second Voice ............................................................. 33 Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode ........................................... 33 Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice ................... 34 Exiting the Dual Mode ...................................................................... 35 Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode 36 CHAPTER 4: Reverb and Other Effects Reverb 41 Turning the Reverb On or Off .......................................................... 41 Changing the Reverb Settings ......................................................... 41 44 Voice Effects 46 Turning the Effects On ..................................................................... 46 Changing the Effect Settings ........................................................... 46 CHAPTER 5: Accompaniment Styles (Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment) Selecting Accompaniment Styles 49 Selecting a Style .............................................................................. 49 Playing the Accompaniment Styles 51 Varying the Style .............................................................................. 51 Starting the Accompaniment Style ................................................... 52 Stopping the Accompaniment Style ................................................. 55 Playing with the Auto Accompaniment 57 Using the Auto Accompaniment ....................................................... 57 Starting the Auto Accompaniment ................................................... 58 Stopping the Auto Accompaniment .................................................. 58 Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings .................................. 59 Adjusting Individual Part Levels ....................................................... 65 67 Music Database ............................................................................... 67 Harmony .......................................................................................... 69 One Touch Setting ........................................................................... 72 Creating Your Own Styles 73 Recording a Custom Style ............................................................... 73 Other Custom Style Functions ......................................................... 80 Playing Back Your Custom Styles ................................................... 84 Messages in Custom Style Mode .................................................... 84 Using Style Files 86 About the Yamaha Style File Format ............................................... 86 Loading Styles from a Disk .............................................................. 86 Playing Loaded Style Files ............................................................... 88 4 6 40 Damper Pedal (Right) ...................................................................... 40 Sostenuto Pedal (Center) ................................................................ 40 Soft Pedal (Left) ............................................................................... 40 Other Auto Accompaniment Functions 29 Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display ....................... 29 Selecting Voices from the Main Display ........................................... 30 Keyboard Percussion ....................................................................... 31 Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice ....................... 31 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode Using the Pedals Changing the Chorus Settings ......................................................... 44 16 Selecting a Function ........................................................................ 16 Changing a Setting .......................................................................... 17 Changing a Setting in a Menu Display ............................................. 18 Displaying a Different Page ............................................................. 19 Resetting a Function’s Value ........................................................... 19 Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles .................................. 20 Exiting to the Main Display ............................................................... 21 Using the Direct Access Function .................................................... 21 Adjusting the Volume Selecting the Left Voice ................................................................... 36 Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode ........................................... 36 Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice ......................... 37 Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously ........................ 39 Exiting the Split Mode ...................................................................... 39 Chorus Basic Operation Using the LCD Display Controls ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ CVP-201 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Disk CHAPTER 6: Registrations Using Registrations(Registering and Recalling Panel Setups) 89 Storing a Panel Setup ...................................................................... 89 Recalling the Registered Panel Settings .......................................... 90 Protecting Panel Settings ................................................................. 91 CHAPTER 7: Song Control Song Playback 93 Song Playback ................................................................................. 93 Part Cancel ...................................................................................... 97 Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment ...... 98 Overall Song Playback Volume Control ........................................... 99 Adjustment of Track Settings ......................................................... 100 Changing Settings in the MIXER Display ....................................... 100 Repeat Functions ........................................................................... 101 Other Playback Controls ................................................................ 103 Playing Other Types of Music Data ............................................... 104 Guide Control FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4 ......................................... 139 FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5 ......................................... 142 FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6 ......................................... 144 FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7 ......................................... 145 FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8 ......................................... 146 MIDI Song Recording 110 Recording Setup: Disk Format ....................................................... 111 Quick Recording ............................................................................ 112 Track Recording (Multi-track Recording) ....................................... 115 Adding New Tracks ........................................................................ 118 Punch-in/out Recording ................................................................. 118 Chord Sequence 121 Other Chord Sequence Functions ................................................. 124 Other Record Edit Functions 126 Setup Memory ................................................................................ 126 Song Name .................................................................................... 127 Track Edit ....................................................................................... 128 Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data) ............................................. 130 Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display ................................ 131 Recording Without a Disk 147 FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9 ......................................... 147 FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10 ....................................... 148 FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11 ....................................... 149 FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12 ....................................... 150 Backup 152 FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13 ................................ 152 FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14 ................................ 153 Utility 154 FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15 ....................... 154 FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16 ....................... 155 CHAPTER 9: Connections 105 Guide Methods and Piano Roll ...................................................... 105 Using the Guide Function .............................................................. 106 Other Guide-related Functions ....................................................... 108 139 Audio Connections 158 Headphones ................................................................................... 158 Audio Input and Output .................................................................. 158 Data Connections 160 Connecting MIDI Equipment .......................................................... 160 Connecting to a Host Computer ..................................................... 160 APPENDICES Effect Type Lists 162 Messages 165 Troubleshooting 170 MIDI and Data Compatibility 172 Index 173 133 About the CVP MEMORY Song ..................................................... 133 CHAPTER 8: The Utility Functions Keyboard 136 FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1 ............................. 136 FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2 ............................. 137 Pedal 138 5 FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3 ........................................ 138 CVP-201 7 CHAPTER 1: Getting Ready About This Manual ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ This section explains the notation conventions that are used throughout this manual. ■ Square brackets [ ] ............................................................................................ Square brackets enclose the names of panel buttons, sliders, and connectors as they appear on your Clavinova. For example, the DEMO button is expressed as [DEMO] in this manual. DEMO HELP ■ Bold characters .................................................................................................... Bold type represents items shown in the LCD display, as well as the corresponding LCD buttons (i.e., the buttons directly below, or to the left or right of, these items). For example, the phrase “Select RIGHT1 VOICE” means that you should press the button directly below the “RIGHT1 VOICE” label at the bottom of the display. ■ Arrows in Operation Explanations .................................................. Different types of arrows are used to distinguish the steps of an operation from its results. Operation steps ♥➾♣ …indicates that you should do ♥, then do ♣. Operation results ♥➔♠ 6 8 …indicates that doing ♥ results in ♠. CVP-201 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks ● Precautions Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. ● Compatible Disk Type 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. ■ Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks ............. To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. DISK IN USE ○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head ...................................................................................... ● Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. ● To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. ● Never open or close the key cover while a disk is extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position). The key cover may contact the disk,– possibily damaging the disk or even the disk drive. ● Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. ■ About the Floppy Disks ................................... To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the FDD is stopped (check if the [DISK IN USE] lamp is off). Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. DISK IN USE lamp DISK IN USE To handle floppy disks with care: ● Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. ● Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. ● Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. ● Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. ● Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. ● Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). Data backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk Copy function on page 142. 7 Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. CVP-201 9 Setting Up the Clavinova ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Music Stand ■ To raise the music stand: ........................................................................... Z Pull the stand up and toward yourself as far as it will go. X Flip down the two metal supports at the left and the right on the rear of the music stand. C Lower the music stand so that it rests on the metal supports. ■ To lower the music stand: ......................................................................... Z Pull the music stand toward yourself as far as it will go. X Raise the two metal supports until they are flat against the rear surface of the stand. C Gently lower the music stand backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION • Do not try to use the music stand in a half-raised position. Also, when lowering the stand, let the stand all the way down before releasing it. Key Cover ■ To open the key cover: .................................................................................. Z Lift the cover slightly (not too much). X Slide the cover open. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. ■ To close the key cover: ................................................................................. Z Slide the cover toward you. X Gently lower the cover over the keys. CAUTION • Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the cover and main unit. • Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the instrument when the cover is opened, and may be impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. 8 10 CVP-201 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Setting Up the Clavinova Turning the Power On and Off Z Connect the power cord. Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the bottom panel of the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet. In some areas, a plug adapter may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. X Press the [POWER] switch. The main display appears in the LCD display. (Initially, the voice Grand Piano and the accompaniment style 8 Beat 1 are selected.) The power lamp below the lower left end of the keyboard also lights. POWER CONTRAST C Adjust the LCD. If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [CONTRAST] knob at the left of the LCD. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN V Adjust the volume. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. ● When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again. Both the LCD display and the power lamp below the left end of the keyboard will turn off. Headphones PHONES Standard stereo phone jacks Connect a set of stereo headphones (optional) to the [PHONES] jack. When headphones are connected, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Since the Clavinova has two PHONES jacks, two sets of headphones can be used simultaneously, allowing two people to enjoy listening to the performance. Other Connections MIDI IN AUX IN R OUT THRU AUX OUT L/L+R R L/L+R PEDAL HOST SELECT PC-1 Mac TO HOST 9 PC-2 MIDI Your Clavinova is equipped with a variety of jacks and terminals that let you connect it to other audio and MIDI equipment. These connectors are located at the left end of the unit on the rear panel. You can connect other instruments that you want to play through the Clavinova’s speakers to the AUX IN jacks, or output the Clavinova’s sound to external speakers using the AUX OUT jacks. Use the MIDI terminals if you want the Clavinova to control — or be controlled by — another MIDI instrument. There’s even a TO HOST terminal that lets you connect the Clavinova directly to a personal computer. Be sure to turn the power off when connecting or disconnecting other equipment. See the instructions in Chapter 9 of this manual for details. CVP-201 11 Panel Controls and Terminals AUX IN R L AUX OUT L/L+R L/L+R R x MIDI IN OUT THRU PEDAL HOST SELECT PC-2 MIDI J K 1 2 MAX z 7 STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B MIN PIANIST & * MUSIC DATABASE w 4 SWING/ JAZZ HELP LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ 9 METRONOME DISK HARMONY 6 CUSTOM ACMP ON INTRO ANCEL A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING RESET 8 FADE IN/OUT 0 ! @ # $ % ^ r START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP ( ) q y CONTRAST TEMPO BEAT AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MIN TO HOST PC-1 Mac 5 DEMO ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX : 3 VOLUME MASTER VOLUME ○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION MIXER PAGE u e t DIRECT ACCESS i o C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 PHONES H * TEMPO [–], [+] ............................................. page 25 Volume Section 1 [MASTER VOLUME] .................................... page 23 2 [ACMP/SONG VOLUME ] ............................ page 23 Special Mode Control Section 3 [DEMO] ......................................................... page 14 4 [HELP] .......................................................... page 27 Accompaniment Style Section 5 STYLE buttons ............................................. page 6 [DISK/CUSTOM] ........................................... page 7 [MUSIC DATABASE]..................................... page 8 [HARMONY] ................................................. page 49 73 67 69 Auto Accompaniment Section 9 [ACMP ON] ................................................... page 57 0 [INTRO] ......................................................... page 54 ! [MAIN A] ....................................................... page 51 @ [MAIN B] ....................................................... page 51 # [MAIN C] ....................................................... page 51 $ [MAIN D] ....................................................... page 51 % [ENDING] ...................................................... page 55 ^ [FADE IN/OUT] ..................................... pages 55, 56 Metronome Section & [METRONOME] ............................................ page 25 CVP-201 Display Control Section w [CONTRAST] ................................................ page 11 e [BEAT] lamps ................................................ page 52 r [FUNCTION] ............................................... page 136 t[MIXER] ......................................................... page 24 y LCD display .................................................. page 16 u PAGE [<], [>] ............................................... page 19 i [DIRECT ACCESS] ...................................... page 21 o LCD buttons .................................................. page 18 p [EXIT] ............................................................ page 21 Q Data dial ....................................................... page 17 W [–], [+] ............................................................ page 17 Song Control Section E [SONG] ......................................................... page 94 R [PLAY/STOP] ................................................ page 95 T [REC] .......................................................... page 113 Y [PAUSE] ...................................................... page 103 U [REW] ......................................................... page 103 I [FF] ............................................................. page 103 10 12 Start/Stop Section ( [TAP] ............................................................. page 53 ) [SYNCHRO] .................................................. page 53 q [START/STOP] ...................................... pages 52, 55 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Panel c v SONG CONTROL Q E Y SONG PLAY/ STOP PAUSE REW R U FF T I PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS 1 2 GUIDE CONTROL EXIT p EASY PLAY W NEXT NOTE s b VOICE REC SOUND REPEAT O P a SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR j 4 BANK d XG REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 Controls and Terminals BANK S DISK IN USE DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT g D f h REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING k l ; A G CVP-201 F POWER F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 Guide Control Section O [EASY PLAY] .............................................. page 105 P [NEXT NOTE] ............................................. page 105 a [SOUND REPEAT] ..................................... page 106 L [PEDAL] .............. page 34 in the Reference Booklet : MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] ........................... page 160 z [HOST SELECT] ........................................ page 160 x [TO HOST] .................................................. page 160 Voice Section s VOICE buttons .............................................. page d [DUAL] .......................................................... page f [SPLIT] .......................................................... page g [REVERB] ..................................................... page h [EFFECT] ...................................................... page Pedals c Soft pedal ..................................................... page 40 v Sostenuto pedal ........................................... page 40 b Damper pedal ............................................... page 40 29 33 36 41 46 Registration/One Touch Setting Section j [1] through [4] ....................................... pages 72, 90 k [BANK –] ....................................................... page 89 l [BANK +] ....................................................... page 89 ; [REGISTRATION] ......................................... page 90 A [ONE TOUCH SETTING] ............................. page 72 S [DISK IN USE] lamp ....................................... page 9 D Floppy disk drive (3.5”) .................................. page 9 F [POWER] ...................................................... page 11 G Keyboard guide lamps ................................ page 109 11 Connectors H [PHONES] ................................................... page 158 J AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] .................................... page 158 K AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] ................................ page 159 CVP-201 13 Playing the Demo Songs ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova features a total of 50 demo songs: 4 feature songs, 24 special pieces showcasing the voices, and 22 pieces showcasing the styles. Listen to them all and hear what the Clavinova can do. Z Call up the Demo Play mode. .............................................................. Press [DEMO]. The lamps of the STYLE button and VOICE button flash continuously, and the DEMO display appears. DEMO HELP X Select the desired play mode. ............................................................ Select the desired play mode by pressing the rightmost LCD button. The following three modes are available: ALL All the songs play back continuously in order, starting from the selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped. RANDOM All the songs play back randomly, starting from the selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped. SINGLE Only the selected song plays back. When the song is finished, playback stops automatically. C Select the song and start playback. ............................................. When you select a song, the demo automatically starts playing in the selected play mode. There are three ways to select a demo song, as described below: (A) To listen to one of the featured demo songs, press one of the buttons under the numbers 1 through 4 in the display. • You can also start the demo playback, beginning with the first feature song, by pressing [START/STOP] or [PLAY/ STOP]. • For a complete list of the Clavinova’s demo songs, refer to page 7 of the Reference Booklet. ➔ The current song number is highlighted during playback. CVP-201 12 14 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ (B) To listen to a voice demo, press the VOICE button corresponding to the desired voice category. ➔ Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category. The lamp of the corresponding VOICE button flashes. Playing the Demo Songs There are two demo songs for each voice category. To skip to the second song, press the flashing button a second time. VOICE PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS (C) SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT To listen to a style demo, press the STYLE button corresponding to the desired style category. ➔ Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category. The lamp of the corresponding STYLE button flashes. There are two demo songs for each style category. To skip to the second song, press the flashing button a second time. STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT SWING/ JAZZ LATIN BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ DISK HARMONY CUSTOM V Adjust the volume. .......................................................................................... Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume. The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control cannot be used. B Stop the demo playback. .......................................................................... To stop playback, press either [START/STOP] or [PLAY/STOP], or the LCD button corresponding to the song that’s currently playing. N Exit the Demo mode. .................................................................................... To change songs during playback: Press the LCD button, VOICE button, or STYLE button of another song; the song then changes. When ALL or RANDOM is selected as the play mode, the Clavinova will play other songs when the selected song is finished. To exit the Demo mode, press [DEMO] again (or press [EXIT]). 13 ● Playing Along with the Demo Songs You can play the keyboard while a demo song is playing back. You can also change the tempo (page 25) and use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] buttons. When you play 3. Lyric Demo, the Clavinova will display the lyrics so you can sing (as well as play) along. Also, you can use the Guide function (page 105) while the Clavinova is playing 4. GUIDE Demo. You cannot change the voice selection while the demo is playing, however. Demo song data is not output through the [MIDI OUT] terminal; however, your keyboard performance data is output. CVP-201 15 CHAPTER 2: Basic Operation Using the LCD Display Controls ○○○○○○○○○ You will refer to the LCD display frequently as you operate your Clavinova. This section consists of a short tutorial that will help you learn how to read the LCD display and use the related controls. Selecting a Function Many of the Clavinova’s functions are displayed at the bottom of the LCD. The main display shown below contains two functions: KBD VOL and RIGHT1 VOICE. These items are displayed in rounded rectangles, which means they represent settings that can be changed. Before you can change a function’s setting, however, you have to select it first. In the main display, the RIGHT1 VOICE function is highlighted, indicating that this function is currently selected. To select a function, press and quickly release the LCD button directly below that function. For example, you can select KBD VOL by pressing the leftmost LCD button. Main display Remember, the main display is the display that appears first when you turn the power on. Highlighted items Selected items are highlighted (i.e., white letters on a dark background). LCD buttons The five LCD buttons under the LCD display represent different functions, depending on the contents of the display. Press to select. CVP-201 14 16 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Using the LCD Display Controls Changing a Setting There are several ways to change a function’s value. Here are two of the main ways: ■ Using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons ................................. Once you have selected a function, you can change its setting with the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. Since you have just selected KBD VOL, try turning the dial or pressing the [–] button until it reads 0. The KBD VOL function sets the keyboard volume. When you set it to 0, you will find that the keyboard won’t produce any sound, no matter how high you set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider! You can press the [–] and [+] buttons repeatedly to change the value a little, or hold them down to change it quickly. Refer to page 23 for details on the KBD VOL function. ■ Using the LCD buttons .................................................................................. You can also increase a setting by simply pressing and holding the corresponding LCD button. For now, since you’ll want to hear your keyboard later on, press and hold the leftmost LCD button until the value for KBD VOL is back up to 127. This is why you should release the LCD button quickly when you select a function: you could end up raising its value when you want to lower it! Hold down to increase. 15 Once you’ve got the keyboard volume back where it belongs, you can learn about a couple of other ways to change settings. CVP-201 17 Using the LCD Display Controls ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Changing a Setting in a Menu Display You can use either of the methods described previously to change the current voice selection. Just press RIGHT1 VOICE and hold the button down, or use the data dial or the [+] button to scan through the options. Try listening to a few of the voices while you’re at it… The problem with this method is that it can be hard to find the voice you’re looking for — after all, the Clavinova has more than 600 voices! So you’ll probably want to use a menu display to see what your choices are. Try pressing the [PIANO] button now. PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR Voice A voice is one of the sounds the Clavinova uses to make music. SYNTHESIZER When you press one of the VOICE buttons, the LCD displays a new set of functions listing the voices of that type. You should now be looking at a menu of piano voices. Refer to page 29 for more details about selecting voices. ■ Using the LCD buttons ................................................................................................. Each piano voice in this display is listed as a separate function in a rounded rectangle. This means that you can use the LCD buttons to select voices, just like you did to select the KBD VOL and RIGHT1 VOICE functions at the beginning of this tutorial. Press an LCD button to select the corresponding voice. ■ Using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons ................................................ There is another way to select voices in this display. You can use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the selection. Press [–] or turn the data dial counterclockwise to select a voice to the left; press [+] or turn the dial clockwise to select a voice to the right. Menu displays You will use menu displays for only two purposes: to select a voice, as shown here, or to select an accompaniment style (page 49). Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a voice. Keep in mind that you can use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select functions only when viewing a menu display. In other displays, these controls will change the value of the currently selected function instead. Try selecting different piano voices in this display before you move on to the next step. CVP-201 16 18 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Using the LCD Display Controls Displaying a Different Page As you were trying out the piano voices in the preceding step, you may have been surprised to see all the voice names suddenly replaced by an entirely different set of voices. Specifically, this occurs when you select the rightmost voice in the display (Midi Grand), then turn the data dial clockwise or press the [+] button. This happens because the CVP-201 has more piano voices than it can fit in the display. When one of the Clavinova’s features includes more functions than will fit in the display, the functions are divided among two or more display pages. The VOICE SELECT Piano display consists of two display pages, as shown below: Display pages Some displays are divided into two or more pages, indicated by a series of overlapping boxes in the upper right corner of the display. The number in the topmost box is the number of the current display page. PAGE Use the PAGE buttons to switch between pages. When a display is divided into pages, you can use PAGE buttons to change pages. Try it: press the [<] button to see page 1, or the [>] button to see page 2. Once you have displayed the desired page, you can use the LCD buttons select a voice in that page as described in the preceding step. Refer to page 138 for details about the functions on the FUNCTION [PEDAL] display page. Resetting a Function’s Value After you have changed a function’s value, you may find you want to restore its basic setting. To demonstrate this, we’ll have to look at another of the Clavinova’s displays. Press the [FUNCTION] button. FUNCTION MIXER 17 This button calls up one of the Clavinova’s FUNCTION displays. You can use this display to tune and transpose the keyboard. The TUNE function in this display corresponds to two LCD buttons labeled ▼ and ▲. You can use these buttons to tune the keyboard up or down. Press and hold the ▼ button (or use the data dial or the [–] button) to tune the keyboard down as far as it will go. Basic settings • The functions of the Clavinova are set to certain standard values or standard conditions when the instrument is shipped. These settings and conditions are called the basic settings. • A function’s basic settings are generally noted in the sidebar together with the possible settings for that function. • You can also use the Recall function (page 153) to restore basic settings at any time. Refer to page 136 for details on the TUNE and TRANSPOSE functions. CVP-201 19 Using the LCD Display Controls ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ If you play a few notes, you’ll notice that your Clavinova is flat by quite a bit. Now, let’s assume that you want to reset the keyboard to the standard 440.0 Hz. You could use the ▲ button (or the data dial, or the [+] button) to return the value to its basic setting — but there’s an easier way: When a function has a basic setting, you can reset it to that value by pressing both the ▲ and ▼ buttons (or both the [–] and [+] buttons) simultaneously. Try doing this now. There are some functions whose settings cannot be returned to the basic value by pressing the ▲ and ▼ buttons (or [–] and [+] buttons) simultaneously. When you’ve got the keyboard back in tune, you’re ready to go on to the next operation. Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles If you look at the upper right corner of the LCD, you’ll notice that the FUNCTION display consists of several display pages. Press the PAGE [>] key once to open the next page, which is titled FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2]. We’ll use the functions on this page to discuss the next operation. In addition to the FIXED VELOCITY function, which is selected in this display, the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] page has two functions in normal rectangles: KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING. Such functions cannot be selected; instead, pressing the corresponding LCD button changes the setting directly without selecting the function. CVP-201 18 20 The FIXED VELOCITY function is described on page 137. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Using By pressing the LCD button under KEY TOUCH, for example, you can set the Clavinova’s response to how hard you play. The value displayed in the rectangle switches from NORMAL to SOFT, then FIXED, then HARD — but the FIXED VELOCITY function remains selected. The VOICE SETTING function determines whether reverb, chorus, effect, and other settings are automatically selected when a voice is selected. It works a little differently: when you press the LCD button, the highlighted setting switches between AUTO and MANUAL. Still, FIXED VELOCITY remains selected. the LCD Display Controls For more details on the KEY TOUCH function, refer to page 137. For more details on the VOICE SETTING function, refer to page 137. There are other sorts of functions that are displayed in non-rounded rectangles, like the ones you used to select a demo song in Demo mode (see page 14). The important thing to remember about these functions is that you don’t select them, you execute them. Now we’re ready to return to the main display. First, however, set the KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING functions back to NORMAL and AUTO, respectively. Exiting to the Main Display To exit the current display, press the [EXIT] button. EXIT The main display should show the name of the last piano voice that you selected in the VOICE SELECT Piano display. You can usually use [EXIT] to get back to the main display. In some cases, however, this button will return you to a previous setting display instead. When this happens, pressing [EXIT] again will get you back to the main display. Using the Direct Access Function The last function we need to discuss is Direct Access. The [DIRECT ACCESS] button lets you jump directly to pages with particularly useful settings. When you press [DIRECT ACCESS], the “Press a button to display corresponding settings” message will appear in the LCD display. 19 DIRECT ACCESS CVP-201 21 Using the LCD Display Controls ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ This message will remain onscreen for about three seconds. Press the button corresponding to the settings you want to display before the message disappears. Here is a list of pages you can access with Direct Access: [DIRECT ACCESS] plus: [HARMONY] [ACMP ON] [METRONOME] Any VOICE button [DUAL] [SPLIT] [REVERB](4) [EFFECT](4) [REGISTRATION] Displays: HARMONY ACCOMPANIMENT MODE METRONOME KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] (1) KEYBOARD [RIGHT2](2) KEYBOARD [LEFT](3) KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] KEYBOARD [LEFT] REVERB REVERB DEPTH EFFECT EFFECT DEPTH REGISTRATION [FREEZE] See page: 69 59 26 31 31 31 34 37 41 43 46 48 91 You can also press an appropriate button while holding down the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. (1) When RIGHT1 VOICE is selected in the main display. (2) When RIGHT2 VOICE is selected in the main display. (3) When LEFT VOICE is selected in the main display. (4) Selects whichever page was most recently displayed. ● A Word about Messages For ease of operation, the Clavinova displays various messages (like the message displayed by the Direct Access function as described above) that either prompt you to the next operation, ask for confirmation, or inform you that the last operation is not effective, valid, or appropriate. When such messages appear, follow the instructions as shown. For details about each message, please refer to the “Messages” section on page 165. ● Saving Your Changes Now that you’ve started learning how to change the Clavinova’s settings, you may be wondering whether it will remember the changes you’ve made even after you’ve turned the power off. The answer is yes — but you need to tell it which settings you want it to remember. By default, the Clavinova will not remember most of your setting changes. You have two ways to tell it which settings you want to remember: • You can register your settings with the Registration function (page 89). Once you have registered your settings, you can restore them at any time by pressing a couple of buttons. • You can instruct the Clavinova to remember certain settings when the power is off, and recall these settings when you turn the power back on. To do this, you need to change the settings of the Backup function (page 152). CVP-201 20 22 Adjusting the Volume ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova has two sliders that let you adjust the overall volume and the accompaniment or song playback volume. There are also settings that you can use to adjust the keyboard volume and the volume of each part of the automatic accompaniment or song. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME MAX ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL MIN MIN Adjusting the Overall Volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the overall volume of the Clavinova. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN • The [MASTER VOLUME] slider also determines the output level of the signal at the [PHONES] jack. • Signals input to the AUX IN jacks are also affected by the [MASTER VOLUME] setting; however, signals output via the AUX OUT jacks are not. Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to set the playback volume of the automatic accompaniment and songs. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN This control has no effect on the volume of your keyboard performance. Setting the Keyboard Volume 21 Select KBD VOL in the main display, then use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the keyboard volume. CVP-201 23 Adjusting the Volume ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels Call up the MIXER display by pressing [MIXER]. In the Mixer display, the volume of Automatic Accompaniment and individual parts of a song can be adjusted. Press [MIXER] again (or [EXIT]) to return to the previous display. There are two types of mixer display, as shown below. ● Automatic Accompaniment Mixer This MIXER display appears when you’re not using the Song mode. See “Adjusting Individual Part Levels” (page 65) for details. ● Song Mixer This MIXER display appears in the Song mode. See “Adjusting Individual Track Levels” (page 100) for details. CVP-201 22 24 Using the Metronome ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova features a convenient metronome that is ideal for practicing. The procedure for setting the metronome tempo can also be used to set the playback tempo for the Auto Accompaniment (page 49) and Song (page 93) modes. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO 16BEAT MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM METRONOME AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Using the Metronome You can start the metronome and set the tempo from any display, including the main display. ■ Starting and Stopping the Metronome ....................................... To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button. TEMPO METRONOME RESET ➔ The [METRONOME] lamp lights, and the metronome starts keeping time (indicated by the flashing of the BEAT lamps). • The metronome can also be used during playback in Auto Accompaniment (page 49) or Song mode (page 93). • The metronome cannot be used when playing disk software that was recorded in free-tempo (see page 96). CONTRAST BEAT Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. Tempo • Range: 32 — 280 • Basic setting: Depends on style. ■ Adjusting the Tempo ....................................................................................... The current tempo, indicated at the left edge of the display, depends on the selected style (see page 49). To change the tempo, press the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons. TEMPO METRONOME RESET Slower Faster ➔ The tempo indication in the main display is highlighted, and the tempo changes. You can either press TEMPO [–] or [+] buttons briefly to change the tempo value by one, or hold down the button to change it continuously. When the tempo is highlighted in the display, you can also use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to set the tempo. 23 Restoring the Basic Tempo You can restore the preset tempo for the currently selected style by simultaneously pressing both TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons. During Style or Song Playback… • If a style or song is started while the metronome is playing, the metronome will continue to sound along with the style or song. • The metronome uses the time signature of the style or song instead of the BEAT setting during style or song playback. • The metronome stops when the style or song stops. CVP-201 25 Using the Metronome ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Changing the Metronome Settings You can change the metronome’s time signature and volume using the settings in the METRONOME page. ■ Displaying the Metronome Settings .............................................. To display the METRONOME page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [METRONOME]. DIRECT ACCESS ➾ TEMPO METRONOME RESET ➔ The METRONOME display appears. ■ Setting the Beat (Time Signature) .................................................... Use the BEAT ▼ and ▲ buttons to change the time signature. (If the BEAT function is highlighted, you can also change its settings with the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.) When NORMAL is selected, the metronome ticks steadily at the current tempo with no accented beats. When BEAT is set to 2, 3, 4, or 5, the metronome ticks off measures with the selected number of beats, playing a bell sound on the first beat of each measure. BEAT • Settings: NORMAL, 2 — 5 • Basic setting: NORMAL ■ Setting the Metronome Volume ........................................................... Use the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons to change the metronome volume. (If the VOLUME function is highlighted, you can also change its settings with the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.) VOLUME • Range: 0 — 127 • Basic setting: 64 The volume of the metronome is determined by both the VOLUME function and the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider (except in Song mode, in which case the volume of the metronome is not affected by the slider). If you use the slider, the playback volume for the Automatic Accompaniment (page 50) will also be affected. CVP-201 24 26 Using the Help Mode ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Help mode provides convenient explanations of the main functions of the Clavinova. You can select help topics from a menu displayed on the LCD, or press a button on the panel to get help information related to that control. HELP VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Z Call up the Help mode. ............................................................................... While the Help mode is active, no other operations can be performed. Press the [HELP] button. DEMO HELP ➔ The Help menu display appears. X Select the language if necessary. ................................................... Select the desired language for help (ENGLISH, JAPANESE, GERMAN, FRENCH, or SPANISH) by pressing the fourth LCD button. The selected language is always backed up even after the power is turned off. C Select a help topic. ......................................................................................... Use the SELECT ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons to select one of the following eight menu items. Help Topics • Basic Operations • Demo Songs • Voices • Styles • Accompaniment • Song Playback • Song Recording • Functions 25 ➔ The selected menu is highlighted. ➾ Press the LCD button under ENTER to enter your selection. ➔ The first page of the selected help information is displayed. CVP-201 27 Using the Help Mode ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ V Turn the pages and read the help information. ................. Use the fourth LCD button to advance the page. You can also press the third LCD button if you want to go back and read the previous page. B Exit the Help topic. .......................................................................................... Press the LCD button under EXIT to return to the Help menu. You can select another menu item or panel button and read through other help topics. N Exit the Help mode. ........................................................................................ To exit the Help mode and to go back to the main display at any time, simply press [HELP]. DEMO HELP CVP-201 26 28 3: Voices CHAPTER Selecting Voices ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova features a wealth of rich, authentic voices, including piano, strings and brass instruments. It also features a Keyboard Percussion function that lets you play the realistic drum and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard. VOICE VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT HELP SWING/ JAZZ INTRO BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE SONG CONTROL TEMPO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG PIANO REC PIANO E. PIANO FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE SOUND REPEAT 1 2 GUITAR SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT METRONOME DISK RESET FUNCTION HARMONY MIXER PAUSE REW BASS PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL ● Voice Types • Clavinova Voices : 195 • XG Voices : 480 • Drum/SFX Kits : 12 * For a list of the voices, see page 3 in the Reference Booklet. * The Clavinova’s voices are divided into twelve groups, corresponding to the twelve VOICE buttons on the panel. Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display Z Select the voice group. ............................................................................ Select the desired voice group by pressing the appropriate VOICE button. ➔ The VOICE SELECT display appears. Exiting the Display To return to the main display, press [EXIT]. 27 VOICE PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT Backing Up the Selected Voice • When the power is turned ON, the Grand Piano voice is selected automatically. However, if the Backup function (page 152) is set to ON, the last selected voice will automatically be selected. • The last selected voice in each group can be retained in memory, even after turning off the power, when the Backup function (page 152) is set to ON. CVP-201 29 Selecting Voices ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ X Select the voice. ................................................................................................. Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate LCD button. The data dial and [–] and [+] buttons can be also used. Each VOICE SELECT display consists of two or more pages. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the various pages. C Play the selected voice. ............................................................................. Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Automatic Voice-related Settings Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited reverb, chorus, effect, and other settings for that particular voice. You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected by using the VOICE SETTING function (page 137). Selecting Voices from the Main Display You can also select a voice using the RIGHT1 VOICE function in the main display. Z Select the RIGHT1 VOICE function. .............................................. If the RIGHT1 VOICE function is not already highlighted, press the fourth LCD button to highlight it. X Select the voice. .................................................................................................. Select the voice using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can also hold down RIGHT1 VOICE to advance the voice selection continuously. (When selecting a voice in this way, the voice can be selected not only from a certain voice group but from all voices.) About Ensemble Voices The Clavinova’s ensemble voices are rich, dual-like voices that you can play without entering the Dual mode (page 33.) Press the [Ensemble] button to display a menu of ensemble voices. C Play the voice. ....................................................................................................... Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. CVP-201 28 30 About XG Voices Yamaha’s XG format is a major new enhancement to the GM (General MIDI) System Level 1 format. It provides for more instrument sounds and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects. XG also ensures compatibility with future instruments and software. • Press the [XG] button to display a menu of XG voices. • Press another VOICE button while holding down the [XG] button to display a list of XG voices in the corresponding category. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Selecting Voices Keyboard Percussion The Clavinova has ten drum kits and two SFX kits , found on pages 3 and 5 of the [PERCUSSION] voice group. When one of the drum or SFX kits is selected, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys. See the drum/SFX kit list on page 8 in the Reference Booklet for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit. • When a drum kit is selected, only the keys with drum or percussion symbols printed above them will sound. • When an SFX kit is selected, keys other than those which have been assigned a special effect sound will not produce any sound. • The Transpose (page 136), Tune (page 136) and Octave (pages 32,34 and 38) functions do not affect the drum/SFX kits. VOICE GUITAR BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display page to change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the RIGHT1 VOICE function. The settings you make in this page affect any voices you select using the RIGHT1 VOICE function. Different settings cannot be made for each voice. ■ Displaying the Main Voice Keyboard Settings .................. Z If you are playing in Dual mode or Split mode, make sure RIGHT1 VOICE is selected in the main display. X Press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any of the VOICE buttons. ➔ The KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display appears. You can switch between the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] page and the [RIGHT2] (page 34) or [LEFT] (page 37) displays using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons. VOICE 29 DIRECT ACCESS ➾ PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT CVP-201 31 Selecting Voices ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Setting the Volume of the Main Voice ........................................... You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] page to change the volume of the main voice. To adjust the overall keyboard volume, use the KBD VOL function in the main display (page 23) instead. Z Press the VOLUME button. ➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted. X Adjust the volume of the main voice. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold down the VOLUME button to increase the volume. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. VOLUME • Range: 0 — 127 • Basic setting: 127 ■ Setting the Octave of the Main Voice ........................................... The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets you adjust the pitch of the main voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press the OCTAVE button. ➔ The value changes each time you press the button. ■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Main Voice .................... The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets you adjust the stereo position of the main voice. Z Press the PAN button. OCTAVE • Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower) –1 (1 octave lower) 0 (no octave shift) +1 (1 octave higher) +2 (2 octaves higher) • Basic setting: 0 Some voices have octave settings that are selected automatically when the voice is selected. (Such settings are not displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You can prevent the octave setting from changing when a voice is selected by setting the VOICE SETTING function (page 137) to MANUAL. PAN • Settings: L — — R • Basic setting: (center) ➔ The PAN function is highlighted. X Adjust the stereo position. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. CVP-201 30 32 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode ○○○○○○○○○○ The Dual mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two different voices simultaneously in a layer. This makes it easy to create exceptionally rich and thick tonal textures. You can also set the volume, octave, and stereo position for the second voice, and detune the second voice from the main voice to create a thicker sound. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG DUAL CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Selecting the Second Voice Z Select the main voice. .................................................................................. Select a voice in the normal way (page 29), then press [EXIT] to return to the main display. X Call up the Dual mode. ................................................................................ To call up the Dual mode, press the [DUAL] button. ➔ The RIGHT2 VOICE function appears in the lower right corner of the LCD display, and the current second voice is displayed to the right of the main voice (after the plus sign). VOICE PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT C Select the second voice. ........................................................................... Select the second voice in the same manner as described for the main voice (page 29). To select the second voice, the RIGHT2 VOICE function must be highlighted. Second Voice • Range: All voices • Basic setting: StringsSlow Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode 31 To change the main voice while playing in Dual mode, select the RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal manner. If you use the VOICE buttons to select a voice while either the tempo or the KBD VOL function is highlighted, the voice you select will be used as the main voice. CVP-201 33 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page to change the volume, octave, pan and detune of the voice selected using the RIGHT2 VOICE function. The settings you make in this page affect any voices you select using the RIGHT2 VOICE function. Different settings cannot be made for each voice. ■ Displaying the Second Voice Keyboard Settings ............ Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [DUAL]. VOICE DIRECT ACCESS ➾ NTHEZER ORGAN PERSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT ➔ The KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display appears. If the RIGHT2 VOICE function is selected in the main display, you can also display the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page by pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any one of the VOICE buttons. You can switch between the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page and the [RIGHT1] (page 31) or [LEFT] (page 37) displays using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons. ■ Setting the Volume of the Second Voice ................................... You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page to change the volume of the second voice. To adjust the overall keyboard volume, use the KBD VOL function in the main display (page 23) instead. Z Press the VOLUME button. ➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted. X Adjust the volume of the second voice. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold down the VOLUME button to increase the volume. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. ■ Setting the Octave of the Second Voice .................................... The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets you adjust the pitch of the second voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press the OCTAVE button. ➔ The value changes each time you press the button. CVP-201 OCTAVE • Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower) –1 (1 octave lower) 0 (no octave shift) +1 (1 octave higher) +2 (2 octaves higher) • Basic setting: 0 Some voices have octave settings that are selected automatically when the voice is selected. (Such settings are not displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You can prevent the octave setting from changing when a voice is selected by setting the VOICE SETTING function (page 137) to MANUAL. 32 34 VOLUME • Range: 0 — 127 • Basic setting: 127 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode ■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Second Voice ........... The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets you adjust the stereo position of the second voice. Z Press the PAN button. ➔ The PAN function is highlighted. PAN • Settings: L — — R • Basic setting: (center) X Adjust the stereo position. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. ■ Detuning the Second Voice .................................................................... The DETUNE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page lets you detune the pitch of the second voice slightly from that of the main voice, to produce an even richer sound. Z Press the DETUNE button. ➔ The DETUNE function is highlighted. DETUNE • Range: 0 — 10 • Basic setting: 5 X Adjust the detune depth. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the detune depth, or hold down the DETUNE button to increase the detune depth. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. Exiting the Dual Mode Press the [DUAL] button to exit Dual mode. ➔ The [DUAL] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer plays in Dual mode. 33 VOICE NTHEZER ORGAN PERSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT CVP-201 35 Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode ○○○○○○○ The Split mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two different voices with each hand. For example, you can play the bass with your left hand and the piano with your right hand. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG SPLIT CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Selecting the Left Voice Z Select the main voice. ................................................................................... Select a voice in the normal way (page 29), then press [EXIT] to return to the main display. The voice you select will be played by the right range of the keyboard. X Call up the Split mode. ................................................................................. To call up the Split mode, press the [SPLIT] button. ➔ The LEFT VOICE function appears in the bottom center of the LCD display, and the current left voice is displayed to the left of the main voice (before the slash). Also, the keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the split point lights. VOICE PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT Split point The split point is the key that divides the right and left sides of the keyboard. You can change the split point using the SPLIT POINT function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display page (page 39). You can use the Single Finger, Multi Finger, Fingered1, or Fingered2 modes (page 59) of the Automatic Accompaniment function while playing in Split mode. In this case, pressing the keys in the left range will play the Automatic Accompaniment voices as well as the left voice. C Select the left voice. ........................................................................................ Select the left voice in the same manner as described for the main voice (page 29). To select the left voice, the LEFT VOICE function must be highlighted. Left Voice • Range: All voices • Basic setting: Acous.Bass 1 Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode To change the main voice while playing in Split mode, select the RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal manner. CVP-201 34 36 If you use the VOICE buttons to select a voice while either the tempo or the KBD VOL function is highlighted, the voice you select will be used as the main voice. Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode ○○○○○○○○○ Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display page to change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the LEFT VOICE function. You can also select the keyboard range that is affected by the pedals, as well as the split point that separates the right and left ranges, using the functions in this page. The settings you make in this page affect any voices you select using the LEFT VOICE function. Different settings cannot be made for each voice. ■ Displaying the Left Voice Keyboard Settings ..................... If the LEFT VOICE function is selected in the main display, you can also display the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page by pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any one of the VOICE buttons. Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [SPLIT]. ➔ The KEYBOARD [LEFT] display appears. VOICE DIRECT ACCESS ➾ NTHEZER ORGAN PERSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT You can switch between the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page and the [RIGHT1] (page 31) or [RIGHT2] (page 34) displays using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons. ■ Setting the Volume of the Left Voice ............................................ You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page to change the volume of the left voice. To adjust the overall keyboard volume, use the KBD VOL function in the main display (page 23) instead. Z Press the VOLUME button. ➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted. X Adjust the volume of the left voice. 35 Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold down the VOLUME button to increase the volume. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. VOLUME • Range: 0 — 127 • Basic setting: 127 CVP-201 37 Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode ○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Setting the Octave of the Left Voice .............................................. The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you adjust the pitch of the left voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press the OCTAVE button. ➔ The value changes each time you press the button. ■ Setting the Stereo Position of the Left Voice ....................... The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you adjust the stereo position of the left voice. Z Press the PAN button. OCTAVE • Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower) –1 (1 octave lower) 0 (no octave shift) +1 (1 octave higher) +2 (2 octaves higher) • Basic setting: +1 Some voices have octave settings that are selected automatically when the voice is selected. (Such settings are not displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You can prevent the octave setting from changing when a voice is selected by setting the VOICE SETTING function (page 137) to MANUAL. PAN • Settings: L — — R • Basic setting: (center) ➔ The PAN function is highlighted. X Adjust the stereo position. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. ■ Setting the Range Affected by the Right and Left Pedals ......................................................................................................................... The PEDAL function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you specify which ranges of the keyboard will be affected by the damper and glide functions controlled by the left and right pedals when playing in Split mode. Press the PEDAL button. ➔ The value changes each time you press the button. CVP-201 See page 138 for a list of the functions that can be controlled by the left pedal. 36 38 PEDAL • Settings: R (right only) L (left only) L+R (both) • Basic setting: R ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode ■ Changing the Split Point ............................................................................ You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display to set the split point at any desired key position. In Split mode, the left voice is played by all keys to the left of (and including) the split point. The basic setting of the Split Point is F#2. SPLIT POINT • Settings: Any key of the keyboard • Basic setting: F#2 F 2 Left range C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 Right range Z Press the SPLIT POINT button. ➔ The SPLIT function is highlighted. X Change the split point. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the split point, or hold down the SPLIT POINT button to move the split point to the right. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. ➔ The keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected Split Point lights, and the key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function. C3 Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously The [DUAL] and [SPLIT] buttons can be turned on simultaneously. When you do so, the right range of the keyboard will play both the main voice and the second voice. When both the Dual and Split modes are turned on, the name of either the second voice or the left voice will be displayed together with the main voice in the main display. Exiting the Split Mode Press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split mode. ➔ The [SPLIT] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer plays in Split mode. 37 PERSSION ENSEMBLE XG SPLIT EFFECT CVP-201 39 Using the Pedals ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova has three pedals. Damper Pedal (Right) The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the keys. • Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held. Sostenuto Pedal (Center) If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. • Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG] groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal. • Certain voices, such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS], sustain continuously when the sostenuto pedal is pressed. Soft Pedal (Left) Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play. You can also assign one of many other functions to this pedal; for example, you can use it to start/stop the Automatic Accompaniment, or use it to play Fill Ins. See page 138 for details. CVP-201 38 40 The effect of the soft pedal may differ slightly depending on the selected voice. 4: Reverb and Other Effects CHAPTER Reverb ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a performance space — anything from a room in a jazz club to a concert hall. The Clavinova lets you choose from a variety of reverb effects; you can also set the depth of any reverb effect to your preference. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO REVERB VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Turning the Reverb On or Off To apply reverb to the keyboard part(s), press the [REVERB] button. Reverb ON/OFF Basic setting: Depends on voice. VOICE PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT The setting of the [REVERB] button has no effect on Song mode or Auto Accompaniment playback. ➔ The lamp lights. To turn the reverb off, press [REVERB] again. ➔ The lamp turns off. Because the basic setting of the [REVERB] button depends on the voice, the reverb may turn on or off automatically when you select a different voice. Changing the Reverb Settings You can change the reverb type and depth using the REVERB and REVERB DEPTH display pages. ■ Displaying the Reverb Settings ......................................................... Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB]. 39 DIRECT ACCESS ➾ E STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT CVP-201 41 Reverb ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ➔ The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently). X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the REVERB page and the REVERB DEPTH page. If you press the [>] button while the REVERB DEPTH page is showing, the CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer to the other sections of this chapter for details on chorus and other effect settings. ■ Changing the Reverb Type ..................................................................... You can change the reverb type using the REVERB display. Use the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the reverb type, or select the TYPE function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. ➔ The selected reverb type is highlighted. Because the basic setting of the reverb type depends on the accompaniment style, the reverb type may change automatically when you select a different style. Reverb Type • Settings: See table on page 162. • Basic setting: Depends on style. • The reverb type selection affects all voices played by the keyboard or Auto Accompaniment. Different settings cannot be made for each part. • Depending on the selected voice, the depth of the effect may sound stronger or weaker, even though the same reverb type is selected. • The reverb effect cannot be applied to the sounds input through the AUX IN [R] and [L/L+R] jacks. • It is also possible to apply reverb effects to the keyboard voices using the [EFFECT] button. See the Effect Type List on page 46 for details. • If both the [REVERB] and [EFFECT] buttons are turned on, both effects will be applied. ■ Setting the Total Depth ................................................................................ The overall depth of the selected reverb effect can be set using the TOTAL DEPTH function in the REVERB display. TOTAL DEPTH • Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.) • Basic setting: 64 Z Select the TOTAL DEPTH function. ➔ The TOTAL DEPTH function is highlighted. CVP-201 40 42 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Reverb X Set the total depth of the reverb effect. You can change the setting using the TOTAL DEPTH ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons. To reset the value to the basic setting of 64, simultaneously press either the TOTAL DEPTH ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons. • The TOTAL DEPTH setting globally affects all voices. Different settings cannot be made for each voice. • You can also set the reverb depth separately for the rhythm and accompaniment parts, and for each keyboard part. (See the next operation.) ■ Setting the Reverb Depth for Each Part .................................... The settings in the REVERB DEPTH display (page 42) let you set the reverb depth separately for the rhythm and accompaniment parts, as well as the parts you play from the keyboard. Z Select a part. Press the LCD button corresponding to RHYTHM to set the reverb depth for the drum part, or ACMP to set it for all other accompaniment parts. Select LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the reverb depth for the corresponding keyboard part. • You can also select several parts at once and adjust their settings simultaneously. ➔ The selected function is highlighted. X Set the reverb depth. Set the reverb depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [–] and [+] buttons. 41 Because the basic settings of the LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 functions depend on the voices selected, a reverb depth setting may change automatically when you select a different part. RHYTHM and ACMP • Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.) • Basic setting: 64 LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 • Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.) • Basic setting: Depends on voice. The amount of reverb that is applied to a part depends on both the part depth and TOTAL DEPTH settings. If one of the settings is 0, no reverb will be applied to that part even if the other setting is 127. CVP-201 43 Chorus ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova’s chorus effects let you modify the voices you play from the keyboard, adding warmth for an even richer sound. Flanger effects add pronounced modulation, for a spacy futuristic quality. You can choose from a variety of chorus and flanger effects, and set the depth of the effect added to each keyboard voice. Changing the Chorus Settings Unlike the reverb (page 41) and other effects (page 46), which can be turned on or off using the appropriate panel buttons, the chorus feature is always considered to be “on.” How chorus is applied to any given voice depends on the current chorus type and depth settings. You can change these settings using the functions in the CHORUS display page. The settings of the CHORUS display have no effect on Song mode or Auto Accompaniment playback. ■ Displaying the Chorus Settings ........................................................ Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB]. ➔ The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently). X Press the PAGE [>] button once or twice, as needed. Press PAGE [>] twice if the REVERB page was displayed, or once if the REVERB DEPTH page was displayed. ➔ The CHORUS page is displayed. • You can also press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by [EFFECT], then use the PAGE [<] button to display the CHORUS page from either the EFFECT page or the EFFECT DEPTH page. • Refer to the other sections of this chapter for details on reverb and other effect settings. ■ Changing the Chorus Type ..................................................................... You can change the chorus type selection in the CHORUS page. Use the CHORUS ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the chorus type, or select the CHORUS function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. CVP-201 42 44 Chorus Type • Settings: See table on page 162. • Basic setting: Depends on style. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Chorus ➔ The selected chorus type is highlighted. Because the basic setting of the chorus type depends on the accompaniment style, the chorus type may change automatically when you select a different style. ■ Setting the Chorus Depth for Each Part ................................... • The chorus type selection affects all keyboard parts. Different settings cannot be made for each part. • Depending on the selected voice, the depth of the effect may sound stronger or weaker, even though the same chorus type is selected. • It is also possible to apply chorus effects to the keyboard voices using the [EFFECT] button. See the Effect Type List on page 46 for details. The other settings in the CHORUS page let you set the chorus depth separately for each part you play from the keyboard. Z Select a part. Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the chorus depth for the corresponding keyboard part. You can also select several parts at once and adjust their settings simultaneously. ➔ The selected function is highlighted. X Set the chorus depth. Set the chorus depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. Chorus Depth functions • Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.) • Basic setting: Depends on voice. You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [–] and [+] buttons. 43 Because the basic settings of the chorus depth functions depend on the voices selected, a chorus depth setting may change automatically when you select a different voice. Since the chorus feature is always on, you should set a chorus depth of 0 for any parts that you don’t want affected by the chorus effect. CVP-201 45 Voice Effects ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova has a variety of effects besides reverb and chorus that you can use to enhance the sound of the voices or create wild, special effects. You can adjust the depth of the effect as desired. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG EFFECT CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING START/STOP FADE IN/OUT TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Turning the Effects On To apply the effect to the keyboard parts, press the [EFFECT] button. Effect ON/OFF Basic setting: Depends on voice. VOICE PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT ➔ The lamp lights. To turn the effect off, press [EFFECT] again. ➔ The lamp turns off. Because the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button depends on the voice, the effect may turn on or off automatically when you select a different voice. The [EFFECT] lamp will not light if the effect depth (page 48) is set to 0. When the effect system is also used by an accompaniment style or song, the effect being applied to the keyboard part(s) may automatically be turned off when you start the Auto Accompaniment or select the song for playback, depending on the effect type selected by the style or song. If this happens, you may be able to apply the effect to the keyboard part(s) by pressing the [EFFECT] button - again, this depends on the selected effect type. If you do so, the effect will not be applied to voices played by the Auto Accompaniment or song. Changing the Effect Settings You can change the current effect type and depth using the EFFECT and EFFECT DEPTH display pages. ■ Displaying the Effect Settings ............................................................. \ Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [EFFECT]. DIRECT ACCESS ➾ STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT If you press the [<] button while the EFFECT page is showing, the CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer to the first two sections of this chapter for details on reverb and chorus settings. ➔ The LCD displays either the EFFECT page or the EFFECT DEPTH page (whichever was used most recently). CVP-201 44 46 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Voice Effects X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the EFFECT and EFFECT DEPTH pages. ■ Changing the Effect Type .......................................................................... You can change the effect type selection in the EFFECT page. Select an effect type using the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons, or highlight the TYPE function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. To reset the effect type to its basic setting, simultaneously press the EFFECT TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons. ➔ The selected effect type is highlighted. Because the basic setting of the effect type depends on the voice, the effect type may change automatically when you select a different voice. Effect Type • Settings: See table on page 163. • Basic setting: Depends on voice. • The effect type selection affects all keyboard parts. Different settings cannot be made for each part. • When the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button is ON for two or three voices selected in Dual and/or Split mode, the Clavinova will automatically select the most appropriate effect type and set the effect depth (page 48) for each part to an appropriate level. • Depending on the selected voice, the depth of the effect may sound stronger or weaker, even though the same effect type is selected. • If both the [EFFECT] and [REVERB] buttons are turned on, both effects will be applied. ■ Varying the Effect ............................................................................................. Each of the Clavinova’s effect types has a variation that can be selected using the VARIATION function in the EFFECT page. To vary the effect produced by the selected effect type, press the LCD button under VARIATION. VARIATION function • Settings: OFF, ON • Basic setting: Depends on voice. ➔ The value displayed by the VARIATION function switches between OFF and ON, and the effect changes. 45 The way in which the effect changes depends on the effect type (see the table on page 163). Also, because the basic setting of the VARIATION function depends on the voice, the setting of this function may change automatically when you select a different voice. CVP-201 47 Voice Effects ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Setting the Effect Depth for Each Part ....................................... The settings in the EFFECT DEPTH page let you set the effect depth separately for each part you play from the keyboard. Z Select a part. Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the effect depth for the corresponding keyboard part. ➔ The selected function is highlighted. X Set the effect depth. Set the effect depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. Effect Depth functions • Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.) • Basic setting: Depends on voice. You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the [–] and [+] buttons. Because the basic settings of the effect depth functions depend on the voices selected, an effect depth setting may change automatically when you select a different voice. CVP-201 46 48 CHAPTER 5: Accompaniment Styles (Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment) Selecting Accompaniment Styles ○○○○○○ The Clavinova has a wide variety of musical “styles” that you can use for simple percussion accompaniment, or as the basis of a fully orchestrated accompaniment — including bass and rhythm parts — using the Auto Accompaniment feature (page 57). There is also a selection of “Pianist” styles that let you play with piano accompaniment when you activate the Auto Accompaniment. STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT SWING/ JAZZ LATIN BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ DISK HARMONY VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL CUSTOM ● Style Types • Rhythm styles: 125 • Pianist styles: 35 • Custom styles: 4 * For information on the styles, see the Style List on page 10 in the Reference Booklet. * The Clavinova’s styles are divided into eleven groups, corresponding to the eleven STYLE buttons on the panel. * The PIANIST styles and Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style group do not include drum sounds. Use the Auto Accompaniment (page 58) to play these styles. Selecting a Style Z Select an accompaniment style group. ..................................... Select the desired style group by pressing the appropriate STYLE button. STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT SWING/ JAZZ LATIN BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ DISK HARMONY Disk and Custom Styles The [DISK/CUSTOM] button lets you use styles on optional Style File Disks (page 86) or your original styles (page 73) . CUSTOM ➔ The corresponding STYLE SELECT display appears. 47 • The last selected style in each group can be retained in memory, even after turning off the power, when the Backup function (page 152) is set to ON. • When the power is turned on, the 8 Beat 1 style is automatically selected. However, if the Backup function (page 152) is set to ON, the last selected style will be selected instead. • Accompaniment styles cannot be selected in the Song Play mode page 93. CVP-201 49 Selecting Accompaniment Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ X Select a style. .......................................................................................................................... Select the desired style by pressing the appropriate LCD button. Accompaniment Tempo • Whenever you select a style, the preset tempo for that style is also selected (unless you change the style during playback, in which case the current tempo is maintained). • Adjust the tempo as described on page 25. PAGE You can also select a style using the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. Each STYLE SELECT display consists of more than one page. Use the PAGE >] buttons to switch between pages. [<] and [> Accompaniment Volume Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to adjust the playback volume, as described on page 23. C Return to the main display ....................................................................................... Press [EXIT] to return to the main display. EXIT CVP-201 48 50 Playing the Accompaniment Styles ○○○○○○ You will use the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons and the START/ STOP buttons to select style variations and control style playback. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT INTRO AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN A VOLUME MASTER VOLUME MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO 16BEAT MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX START/STOP FADE IN/OUT ENDING MAIN D ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Varying the Style Each of the Clavinova’s styles has four variations, corresponding to the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons labeled as [MAIN A], [MAIN B], [MAIN C], and [MAIN D]. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT Use these buttons to select style variations. Main A is generally the most rudimentary form of the style; the other variations are more or less lavish embellishments on the same basic theme. By judiciously switching between variations as you play, you can add variety and make the performance more interesting. ■ Selecting a Variation ........................................................................................ You can select a style variation before you start playing the style. To select a variation, simply press the corresponding button. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT ➔ The button’s lamp lights. The Clavinova will begin playing the selected style variation when you start the style using one of the methods described in the next section. ■ Playing Fill-in Patterns .................................................................................. 49 If you select a different style variation while the style is playing, the Clavinova will play an automatic fill-in pattern as it switches to the new variation. The fill-in pattern, like the main pattern, is different for each variation. Fill-in patterns A “fill-in pattern” is a embellishment of the basic rhythm, usually played at the end of a musical phrase as an exciting transition into the next segment. CVP-201 51 Playing the Accompaniment Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ To change the variation while the style is playing, press the button corresponding to the new variation. ➔ The button’s lamp flashes as the Clavinova plays the fill-in pattern. Generally speaking, the Clavinova will start the fill-in pattern soon after you press the button. If you select a variation after the last eighth note of a measure, however, it will begin the fill-in pattern from the start of the next measure. Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to pause the style or play a special fill-in pattern by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 138) to BREAK or BREAK FIL. ➔ When the fill-in pattern is finished, the button’s lamp lights steadily as the Clavinova plays the main pattern. The auto fill-in feature provides an exciting transition as you switch from one variation to another. If Main A is playing and you press [MAIN B], for example, the Clavinova will play Fill-in B, then start playing Main B. You can also play fill-in patterns without selecting a different variation. Just press the button for the variation that is playing. The Clavinova will play the fill-in for that variation, then return to the main pattern. ■ More Fun With Fill-ins .................................................................................... ● Changing the Fill-in It is possible to switch variations while a fill-in pattern is playing. The Clavinova will switch to the fill-in pattern for the new variation, then continue with the new main pattern as usual. ● Repeating the Fill-in If you hold down the flashing button, or press it after the last eighth note of the measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the fill-in pattern will be repeated. ● Canceling the Fill-in If you press the flashing button earlier than the last eighth note of the measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the Clavinova will stop playing the fill-in pattern and continue with the main pattern. Starting the Accompaniment Style There are several ways to start the accompaniment style, as described below: ■ Standard Start ......................................................................................................... This is the simplest way to start a style. If necessary, select a variation as described on page 51, then press the [START/STOP] button. START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP ➔ The lamp lights and the style starts. CVP-201 Beat Indicator During style playback, the leftmost beat lamp (red) flashes on the first beat of each measure, and the other lamps (green) flash for each successive beat. The current tempo and measure number are shown at the left edge of the main display. 50 52 Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to start and stop the style by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 138) to START/ STOP. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing the Accompaniment Styles ■ Synchronized Start ............................................................................................ This method lets you start the style by simply playing a note or chord on the keyboard. Z Set the Synchronized Start function. If necessary, select a variation as described on page 51, then press the [SYNCHRO] button. START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP ➔ The lamp lights, and the red [BEAT] lamp flashes in time with the current tempo. • If the [SYNCHRO] button is pressed while a style is playing, style playback stops and Synchronized Start is automatically set to stand-by. • When you play the keyboard in Split mode (page 36) or use the Auto Accompaniment in a mode other than FULL KEYBOARD (page 61), only the left-hand section of the keyboard will trigger a synchronized start. X Start playing. When you are ready, play a note on the keyboard. The style starts playing when you play the first note. To cancel the Synchronized Start function before you start the style, press the [SYNCHRO] button again. ➔ The [SYNCHRO] lamp turns off, the [START/STOP] lamp lights, and the style starts. ■ Tap Start ......................................................................................................................... This function lets you set the tempo and start the style in one operation. If necessary, select a variation as described on page 51, then tap the [TAP] button at the desired tempo. Tap four times for 2- and 4-beat styles, three times for 3-beat styles, and five times for 5-beat styles. If you do not tap the [TAP] button the required number of times (i.e., 3 times for a 3-beat style), the Tap Start function will be canceled after a few seconds. START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP When playing a 4-beat style… ➾ Tap 4 times. 51 The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during style playback (by tapping the button twice). In this case the tap “click” will not sound. CVP-201 53 Playing the Accompaniment Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Adding an Introduction ................................................................................. This function lets you embellish the start of a tune by adding an introduction. Z Set the introduction pattern. Select the variation to play the intro pattern as described on page 51, then press the [INTRO] button. There are three introduction patterns, as shown below: Intro Patterns Pattern Intro A Intro B Intro C/D Played by: [MAIN A] [MAIN B] [MAIN C] or [MAIN D] ➔ The [INTRO] lamp lights, and the lamp for the selected variation flashes. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT The flashing light indicates the variation that will play after the intro. In the illustration at left, the Clavinova will play Intro A, followed by Main A. X Select the main pattern. Select the variation to play the main pattern when the intro is finished. (If you want the style to continue playing with the same variation as the introduction, you can skip this step.) ➔ The lamp for the previously selected button lights, and the lamp of the selected button flashes. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT Since the flashing light indicates the variation that will play after the intro, the illustration at left indicates that the Clavinova will play Intro C/D, followed by Main A. C Start the style. Use one of the three methods described on the preceding pages to start playing the style. CVP-201 52 54 To cancel the introduction before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing the Accompaniment Styles ■ Fading In ............................................................................................................................. This function lets you gradually fade in the volume of the style. You can set the Fade In function at any time before you start the style, and use it in combination with any start method (including the Introduction function). Z Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to trigger a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 138) to FADE IN/ OUT. ➔ The lamp lights, and the Synchronized Start function (page 53) turns on automatically. X Start the style. Use one of the three methods described on the preceding page to start playing the style. To cancel the fade-in before starting the style, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button again. ➔ The [FADE IN/OUT] lamp flashes during the fade-in, then turns off when the fade-in is completed. Stopping the Accompaniment Style There are also several ways to stop accompaniment style playback, as described below: ■ Standard Stop ......................................................................................................... To stop style playback, press the [START/STOP] button. START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to start and stop the style by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 138) to START/ STOP. ➔ The lamp turns off and the style stops instantly. ■ Adding an Ending ............................................................................................... To play an ending pattern before the style playback stops, press the [ENDING] button. AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT 53 ➔ The ENDING lamp lights, and the Clavinova stops style playback after playing an ending pattern. If you press the [ENDING] button on or after the second beat of a measure, the ending pattern will start at the top of the next measure. CVP-201 55 Playing the Accompaniment Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova will play one of three ending patterns, depending on the main pattern that is currently playing, as shown below. Ending Patterns Pattern Ending A Ending B Ending C/D Played by: [MAIN A] [MAIN B] [MAIN C] or [MAIN D] Press [ENDING] a second time while the ending pattern is playing to produce a ritardando (gradually slowing) effect. Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to trigger the ending pattern and ritardando by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 138) to ENDING/RIT. ■ Fading Out .................................................................................................................. You can have the style fade out and automatically stop by pressing the [FADE IN/OUT] button. ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO Using the Pedals You can also use the left pedal to trigger a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page 138) to FADE IN/ OUT. START/STOP ➔ The lamp flashes as the style fades out. You can use the Fade Out function in combination with any pattern (including the Introduction and Ending functions). CVP-201 54 56 Playing with the Auto Accompaniment ○ ○ ○ ○ The Clavinova includes a sophisticated Auto Accompaniment system that can provide automated rhythm, bass and chord backing for your performance in 125 different styles, as well as 35 different types of piano-only accompaniment. The Auto Accompaniment playback data is normally not output by the MIDI [OUT] terminal. To send the Auto Accompaniment data to another MIDI instrument, use the ACMP&RHY and HARMONY functions in the FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display described on page 150. ACMP ON VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Using the Auto Accompaniment You can use one of several methods to indicate the chords that are to be played by the Auto Accompaniment. Choose the accompaniment mode that best suits your playing style. Detailed explanations of each accompaniment mode are given on pages 60 and 61. ● Single Finger The Single Finger method makes it easy to obtain accompaniment in major, seventh, minor, and minor-seventh chords by pressing certain keys (according to simple rules) to the left of the split point indicated by the keyboard guide lamp. (See page 60.) ● Multi Finger When you select the Multi Finger mode, you can use either the Single Finger method or the Fingered 1 method to indicate chords for the accompaniment. (See page 60.) ● Fingered 1 The Fingered 1 method lets you control the Auto Accompaniment by playing full chords to the left of the split point. (See page 60.) ● Fingered 2 This mode accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered 1 mode, with the exception that the lowest note played to the left of the split point is used as the bass root (in Fingered 1 mode, the root of the chord is always used as the bass root). Hence, you can select this mode to play “on bass” or “fraction” chords. (See page 61.) 55 ● Full Keyboard The Full Keyboard mode automatically produces appropriate automatic accompaniment for virtually anything you play, anywhere on the keyboard. (See page 61.) CVP-201 57 Playing with the Auto Accompaniment ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Starting the Auto Accompaniment You may want to select an accompaniment mode (page 59) before you start playing. If the accompaniment mode is set to your liking, you can start the Auto Accompaniment as follows: Z Select a style. ........................................................................................................ Select the desired style. (See page 49.) STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT SWING/ JAZZ LATIN BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ DISK HARMONY Pianist styles You can play the PIANIST styles and Guitar Waltz in the TRAD/WALTZ style group with the Auto Accompaniment (page 49). Since these styles do not contain drum parts, you’ll have to indicate a chord as you start the style to hear the accompaniment. CUSTOM X Set the tempo and accompaniment volume. ...................... Use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the tempo (page 25), and the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume of the accompaniment parts (page 23). C Turn on the Auto Accompaniment. ............................................... Press the [ACMP ON] button. ACMP ON ➔ The [ACMP ON] lamp lights. The [SYNCHRO] lamp also lights, indicating that you can start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function (page 53). Also, a keyboard lamp shows the current split point. • The Auto Accompaniment will automatically turn on when you select a style in the Pianist style group. • The Auto Accompaniment can also be turned on during playback of song data recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/ 700/103/201. • If you turn the Auto Accompaniment on while playing back songs recorded using the Auto Accompaniment, the recorded accompaniment track will be dropped in favor of the accompaniment you play on the keyboard. V Start the Auto Accompaniment. ....................................................... Begin playing to start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function, or start the style using one (or more) of the other methods described on pages 52 and 55. The methods used to indicate Auto Accompaniment chords are described in the following pages. • You can also select style variations and play fill-in patterns as described on page 51 while playing along with the Auto Accompaniment. • Press the [ACMP ON] button again to turn the Auto Accompaniment off before you start playing. Stopping the Auto Accompaniment Use one of the methods described on page 55 to stop playback of the style, including the Auto Accompaniment. To turn Auto Accompaniment off, press the [ACMP ON] button so that the lamp goes out. CVP-201 56 58 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing with the Auto Accompaniment Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings You can change the accompaniment mode (which selects the chord indication method), the split point, and other Auto Accompaniment settings in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display page. ■ Displaying the Auto Accompaniment Settings .................. Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [ACMP ON]. DIRECT ACCESS ➾ ACMP ON ➔ The ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display appears. ■ Selecting an Accompaniment Mode .............................................. Use the FINGERING ▲ and ▼ buttons to select an accompaniment mode. Accompaniment Mode • Settings: See insert below. • Basic setting: MULTI FINGER ➔ The selected accompaniment mode is highlighted. 57 The method for indicating chords in each accompaniment mode are described in detail below. CVP-201 59 Playing with the Auto Accompaniment ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Accompaniment Modes ● Single Finger To control the Auto Accompaniment, press one, two, or three keys in the left range of the keyboard (below and including the split point), following the rules described below. Play the melody in the right range along with the Auto Accompaniment. • The Clavinova displays the names of the chords you play at the left edge of the main display, below the tempo. • The same accompaniment continues (even after you release the chord in the left range) until you play the next chord. ■ Single Finger Chords The following four chord types can be played in Single Finger mode: C • Major Press the root note of the chord. Cm • Minor [m] The illustration below shows the key corresponding to each root note. C# Eb F# Ab Bb (Db)(D#) (Gb)(G#)(A#) Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any black key to the left of it. C7 • Seventh [7] Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any white key to the left of it. Cm7 C D E F G A B • Minor Seventh [m7] Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any white and black keys to the left of it (three keys at once). ● Multi Finger This method allows you to control the Auto Accompaniment using either the Single Finger method (described above) or the Fingered 1 method (described below). However, when indicating minor, seventh or minor seventh chords, it is necessary to play the white key and/or black key nearest the root note of the chord. ● Fingered 1 To control the Auto Accompaniment, play any chord in the left range of the keyboard (below and including the split point). Play the melody in the right range along with the Auto Accompaniment. • The automatic accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • If the Clavinova cannot recognize a chord you play, an asterisk “ * ” will appear instead of the chord name in the display. • Drums-only accompaniment can be produced by pressing any three consecutive keys (e.g., C, C#, D) simultaneously. This lets you create dynamic “drum breaks” in the accompaniment. A series of dashes “- - -” will appear instead of a chord name in the display. Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. CVP-201 58 60 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing with the Auto Accompaniment ■ Chords in Fingered 1 mode The chord types below can be played in Fingered 1 mode. For a fingering chart showing all chords in the example key of C, see page 12 of the Reference Booklet. • Major • Sixth [6] • Major seventh [M7] • Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 (b5)] • Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7 (#11)] • Added ninth [add 9] • Major seventh ninth [M7 (9)] • Six ninth [6 (9)] • Flatted fifth [(b5)] • Augmented [aug] • Seventh augmented [7 (#5)] • Major seventh augmented [M7 (#5)] • Minor [m] • Minor sixth [m6] • Minor seventh [m7] • Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)] • Minor added ninth [m add 9] • Minor seventh ninth [m7 (9)] • Minor seventh eleventh [m7 (11)] • Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 (b5)] • Minor major seventh [mM7] • Minor major seventh ninth [mM7 (9)] • Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)] • Diminished seventh [dim7] • Seventh [7] • Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] • Seventh ninth [7 (9)] • Seventh sharp eleventh [7 (#11)] • Seventh added thirteenth [7 (13)] • Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)] • Seventh flatted ninth [7 (b9)] • Seventh added flatted thirteenth [7 (b13)] • Seventh sharp ninth [7 (#9)] • Suspended fourth [sus4] ● Fingered 2 To control the Auto Accompaniment, play chords in the left range of the keyboard as for Fingered 1. In this mode, however, the lowest note you play in the will be used as the bass root, as shown at right. On-bass Chords C C on E ■ Chords in Fingered 2 mode The Clavinova will recognize the same chord types as listed above for Fingered 1 mode. ● Full Keyboard When the Full Keyboard mode is selected, the Clavinova will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will appear in the display. C on G • Although Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many types of music, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. • Chord detection occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in length — may not be detected. 59 Keep in mind… You can use the Dual and Split modes together with the Auto Accompaniment. CVP-201 61 Playing with the Auto Accompaniment ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Using the Synchronized Stop Function ................................... The SYNCHRO STOP function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display automatically stops the Auto Accompaniment when you’re not holding down any keys to the left of the split point. Press the SYNCHRO STOP button to turn the function on. This function can only be turned on if the Auto Accompaniment is on and Full Keyboard mode is not selected. ➔ The SYNCHRO STOP function is highlighted, and the [SYNCHRO] lamp lights. The Auto Accompaniment automatically starts when you play in the left range of the keyboard, and stops when you release it. To turn the function off, press SYNCHRO STOP again. This is useful for beginning players who have difficulty playing in precise time. It is also effective for creating accompaniment “breaks” during the performance. ■ Getting Help With Chords ......................................................................... The CHORD ASSIST function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display uses the keyboard guide lamps to show you appropriate fingerings for chords. Z Turn the Chord Assistance function on. Press the CHORD ASSIST button. Chord Assistance The Chord Assistance feature is essentially an electronic “chord book” that shows you appropriate fingerings for chords; it is useful when you want to quickly learn how to play certain chords. Simply specify the desired chord via the display, and the fingerings for the Fingered 1 method are indicated by the keyboard guide lamps. • If the [ACMP ON] button is off, it will turn on. • If the split point is set below F#2, it will automatically be reset to F#2. • The keyboard guide lamps do not indicate the split point when Chord Assistance is on, since they are used to indicate chord fingerings instead. ➔ The CHORD ASSIST display appears, and the accompaniment mode automatically changes to Fingered 1. CVP-201 60 62 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing with the Auto Accompaniment X Start the Auto Accompaniment. Press [START/STOP] or use the Synchronized Start function (page 53) to start the Auto Accompaniment. C Enter the chord root. Use the ROOT button to select a root. ➔ The ROOT function is highlighted, and the root changes. ROOT function Settings: See sidebar on page 60. If you hold the ROOT button down, the INVERT setting may also change. When the ROOT function is highlighted, you can also use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a root. V Enter the chord type. Use the TYPE ▼ and ▲ buttons to select a chord type. TYPE function Settings: See list at left. ➔ The TYPE function is highlighted, and the type changes. When the TYPE function is highlighted, you can also use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a chord type. The following chord types can be specified in the display: Major [Maj] Minor [m] Seventh [7] Minor seventh [m7] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)] Sixth [6] Minor sixth [m6] Major seventh [M7] Suspended fourth [sus4] Augmented [aug] Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)] Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] Seventh augmented [7 (#5)] Diminished seventh [dim7] Flatted fifth [(b5)] Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)] Minor major seventh [mM7] B Rotate the fingering as desired. 61 Press INVERT to shift the fingering down the keyboard. Each time the INVERT button is pressed, the next viable fingering for the chord appears. The INVERT function displays the inversion number. CVP-201 63 Playing with the Auto Accompaniment ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ N Enter the chord. The keyboard guide lamps indicate the fingering for the selected chord. At this point you can either play the chord on the keyboard or press the ENTER button to hear the accompaniment play it. M Stop the Auto Accompaniment. When you’re done with Chord Assistance, press [START/STOP] or [ENDING] to stop the accompaniment. • Any chords recognized in Fingered 1 mode can be entered from the keyboard. • The Clavinova displays the name of the chord recognized from the keyboard at the left edge of the LCD display, under the tempo. You can compare this chord root and type displayed by the ROOT and TYPE functions to make sure you’re fingering the chord correctly. When the root of the chord being played corresponds to one of the black keys on the keyboard, the root may be displayed as either flat or sharp; for example, Bb may also be displayed as A# (see the sidebar on page 60 for details). • A flashing keyboard guide lamp indicates a note which may be omitted. < Turn Chord Assistance off. To turn Chord Assistance off, press [EXIT] or [ACMP ON]. ➔ The main display appears. If you press [ACMP ON], the Auto Accompaniment is turned off at the same time. ■ Changing the Split Point ............................................................................ You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display to set the split point at any desired key position. The keys to the left of (and including) the split point control the chords played by the Auto Accompaniment in every accompaniment mode except Full Keyboard. SPLIT POINT function • Settings: Any key of the keyboard • Basic setting: F#2 F 2 Left range C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 Right range Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the split point. Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting. • The split point cannot be set when Full Keyboard mode is selected. • Changing the split point here also changes it for the Split mode (see page 39). ➔ The selected key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function. If the Auto Accompaniment or the Split mode (page 36) is on, the keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected split point lights. CVP-201 62 64 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Playing with the Auto Accompaniment Adjusting Individual Part Levels The Clavinova has five accompaniment parts: Rhythm, Bass, Chord, Pad, and Phrase. RHYTHM This part forms the basis of the accompaniment. The Rhythm part usually plays one of the drum kits. BASS The Bass part uses voices appropriate to each style, including acoustic bass and synth bass. CHORD The Chord part provides appropriate rhythmic chordal accompaniment for each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instruments here. PAD The Pad part plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments such as strings, organ, and choir. PHRASE The Phrase part is used for embellishments such as punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting. The volume settings for the five accompaniment parts can be adjusted individually in the MIXER display page. • The overall accompaniment playback volume can be adjusted using the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider. • By adjusting the volume balance of the various parts, or setting the volume of some parts to 0, you can create variations on the basic style accompaniment. • Some styles may not use all five accompaniment parts. • You can also adjust the level of reverb that is applied to the Auto Accompaniment parts. See page 43 for details. Part volume relationships • The volume level of each Auto Accompaniment part is relative to the [ACMP/ SONG VOLUME] setting. • The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] setting is relative to the [MASTER VOLUME] setting. Z Press the [MIXER] button. ....................................................................... FUNCTION MIXER ➔ The lamp lights, and the MIXER page appears. X Select a part. .......................................................................................................... Press the LCD button for the part whose level you want to set. 63 ➔ The selected function is highlighted. CVP-201 65 Playing with the Auto Accompaniment ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ C Set the volume level. ..................................................................................... Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to adjust the volume level. You can also increase the level by holding down the button you used to select the part. You can set the volume of the highlighted part to 0 by pressing and quickly releasing its button. Press and release the button a second time to restore the previous value. To reset the highlighted part’s volume to the basic setting of 110, simultaneously press the [–] and [+] buttons. Part volume levels • Range: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.) • Basic setting: 110 V Repeat steps Xand C. .............................................................................. Repeat the preceding steps to set the level for other parts. (You can also select several parts and adjust their volume settings simultaneously.) B Exit the MIXER display. .............................................................................. To exit the function, press the [MIXER] button again, or press [EXIT]. FUNCTION MIXER EXIT ➔ The lamp turns off, and the main display appears. CVP-201 64 66 Other Auto Accompaniment Functions ○ ○ ○ ○ The Clavinova has many other features and functions that make the use of the Auto Accompaniment even more convenient and enjoyable. With these functions you can easily select panel settings to suit a certain type of music, have the Clavinova play harmony to your melody line. MUSIC DATABASE VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON HARMONY MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING Music Database The Clavinova’s built-in Music Database gives you a convenient way to select the style, voice, and effect settings that will suit a particular type of music. Just select one of the 463 entries in the Music Database; the Clavinova does the rest! For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 11 of the Reference Booklet. Z Display the Music Database. ................................................................ Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. MUSIC DATABASE HARMONY ➔ The lamp lights, and the MUSIC DATABASE display appears. Style name Highlighted setup • When you display the Music Database, the Clavinova automatically recalls a panel setup that uses the current style. (The name of this setup is highlighted in the Music Database display.) If you want to use the selected setup, you can simply skip to step 4 of this procedure. • The Automatic Accompaniment also turns on when you display the Music Database. If you access the Music Database before starting the style, the Synchronized Start function (page 53) is also turned on. 65 The MUSIC DATABASE display contains a listing of panel setups that can be sorted either by style or alphabetically. The name of the style that is used by the currently highlighted setup is shown at the upper right edge of the display. CVP-201 67 Other Auto Accompaniment Functions ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ X Sort the list, if necessary. ........................................................................ Press the SORT button to switch the highlighted setting between STYLE and A–Z. To display the panel setups for a specific style group, simply press the corresponding STYLE button. The menu is automatically sorted by style, and a panel setup that uses the currently selected style in the chosen group is highlighted. ➔ When STYLE is highlighted, the menu list is sorted by style, and a panel setup that uses the currently selected style is highlighted. ➔ When A–Z is highlighted, the menu is sorted alphabetically. C Select and recall a panel setup. ........................................................ Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to highlight the desired panel setup in the Music Database list, then press the SET button to recall the highlighted setup. The Harmony function will not be turned on if the Full Keyboard mode is selected, even if the selected Music Database setup includes “Harmony On.” ➔ The style, voice, and effect settings change automatically. Once you have selected a panel setup from the Music Database, you can change the style, voice and effect settings to suit your preferences. You can also use the Registration function (page 89) to save the panel setup in the Clavinova’s memory. V Return to the main display. .................................................................... Press [EXIT] to exit the Music Database menu display. ➔ The previous display appears. B Turn off the Music Database. ............................................................... When you’re done using the Music Database setup, press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button again. ➔ The [MUSIC DATABASE] lamp turns off, and the panel settings you were using before you accessed the Music Database are restored. CVP-201 66 68 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other Auto Accompaniment Functions Harmony This feature adds harmony or embellishment notes to the melody you play using the main voice in the right range of the keyboard. The harmony notes are produced automatically to match chords played with Auto Accompaniment. ■ Adding Harmony ................................................................................................. Since the Harmony function can be turned on and off while playing, you can add “spice” and professional polish to your performance by applying harmony to selected phrases as you play. Z Turn the Harmony function on. Press the [HARMONY] button. • The Harmony feature cannot be turned on when Full Keyboard is selected as the accompaniment mode (page 59). • The Harmony feature can be used while playing back the intro or ending, or while the Auto Accompaniment is off, if one of the following harmony types (page 70) is selected: Octave, 1+5, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill. MUSIC DATABASE HARMONY ➔ The lamp lights. X Play the keyboard. Play the keyboard along with the Auto Accompaniment. • With some Harmony types the voice used for the Harmony will be different from the currently selected main voice. • When chords are played in the righthand section of the keyboard, the harmony will be applied to the last note played. C Turn the Harmony function off. Press the [HARMONY] button again. ➔ The lamp turns off. ■ Displaying the Harmony Settings ..................................................... You can change the harmony type, the volume of the harmony voice, and other harmony settings in the HARMONY display page. To display the HARMONY page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [HARMONY]. Using the Pedals • If you set the LEFT PEDAL function to HARMONY (page 138), the Clavinova will play harmony only while the left pedal is pressed. • If you use the left pedal to control the harmony, that pedal will have no effect when the Harmony function is off (i.e., when the [HARMONY] lamp is not lit). MUSIC DATABASE DIRECT ACCESS ➾ HARMONY 67 ➔ The HARMONY display appears. CVP-201 69 Other Auto Accompaniment Functions ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Selecting a Harmony Type ........................................................................ You can change the type of harmony that is played using the TYPE function in the HARMONY display. TYPE function • Settings: See table on this page. • Basic setting: Depends on main voice. Use the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select a harmony type, or select the TYPE function and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. ➔ The selected harmony type is highlighted. To restore the basic setting for the currently selected main voice, press the TYPE ▲ and ▼ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. Since the basic setting of the TYPE function depends on the currently selected main voice, a different harmony type may be selected automatically if you change the main voice selection. Harmony Types CVP-201 Speed Duet – Trio – Block – 4 Part – Country – Octave – 1+5 – Echo ❍ Tremolo ❍ Trill ❍ Strumming – Add Jazz Gtr – Add Brass – Add Strings – In The Forest – • Some harmony types (indicated by a “❍” in the Speed column of the table at left) have a speed setting that can be adjusted. See the next topic for details. 68 70 Type ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Other Auto Accompaniment Functions ■ Changing the Harmony Speed ............................................................. You can change the speed of the harmony notes played by the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill harmony types using the SPEED function in the HARMONY display. SPEED function • Settings: 4, 6, 8, 12 (Echo) 8, 12, 16, 32 (Tremolo) 12, 16, 24, 32 (Trill) • Basic setting: Depends on main voice. Z Select the SPEED function. Press the LCD button under the SPEED function. ➔ The SPEED function is highlighted. X Change the SPEED setting. Use the SPEED button, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the value of the SPEED function. ■ Changing the Harmony Volume .......................................................... You can change the volume of the harmony notes using the VOLUME function in the HARMONY display. VOLUME function • Settings: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.) • Basic setting: Depends on main voice. Z Select the VOLUME function. Press the one of the LCD buttons under the VOLUME function. ➔ The VOLUME function is highlighted. X Change the VOLUME setting. 69 Use the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the value of the VOLUME function. To restore the VOLUME function to its basic setting for the currently selected main voice, press the VOLUME ▼ and ▲ buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. CVP-201 71 Other Auto Accompaniment Functions ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ One Touch Setting The Clavinova’s convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style you’re playing. Each style has four preprogrammed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button. For a list of the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to page 11 of the Reference Booklet. The One Touch Setting function cannot be used with styles in the [DISK/CUSTOM] group. Z Select a style. ........................................................................................................ Select the desired style in the normal way (see page 49). STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT SWING/ JAZZ LATIN BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ DISK HARMONY CUSTOM X Make sure the ONE TOUCH SETTING function is on. If necessary, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button lamp lights. C Select a panel setup. ..................................................................................... Press one of the four numbered buttons under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING. REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The voice and effect settings change automatically. Once you have selected a panel setup using the One Touch Setting function, you can change the voice and effect settings to suit your preferences. You can also use the Registration function (page 89) to save the panel setup in the Clavinova’s memory. CVP-201 The Clavinova’s pre-programmed factory default panel settings can be stored in a registration memory to allow easy recall of the pre-programmed panel settings. Using the REGISTRATION function, register the factory default settings (the preprogrammed settings initially present when the Clavinova’s power is first turned on) to [REGIST A-1] (see page 89). Now when you select [A-1] all panel settings will be conveniently returned to their factory default settings. 70 72 • When you select a panel setup, the Auto Accompaniment turns on automatically. If you select a panel setup before starting the style, the Synchronized Start function (page 53) will also turn on. • The Harmony function will not be turned on if the Full Keyboard mode is selected, even if the selected One Touch Setting setup includes “Harmony On.” Creating Your Own Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova lets you create custom accompaniment styles that you can recall and play back at any time, just like the presets. Up to four custom styles can be maintained in the Clavinova’s memory at the same time, and any number can be saved to disk for later reloading and use. Recording a Custom Style Use the following procedure to record your own custom styles. Z Select the DISK/CUSTOM style group. ...................................... Press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button. STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT SWING/ JAZZ LATIN BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ DISK HARMONY CUSTOM • One temporary style (named TEMP.STYLE) is automatically loaded into the DISK/CUSTOM style memory when the power is turned on. • If you have loaded other style data (see page 87), you can select any of the styles from the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE menu to serve as the basis for your new custom style. ➔ The lamp lights, and the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display appears. X Select the CUSTOM STYLE function. ............................................ 71 Press the CUSTOM STYLE button. CVP-201 73 Creating Your Own Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ➔ The “Select a source style” message is displayed for a few seconds, then replaced by page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. The style that was selected in the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display begins playing. C Select a source style. ................................................................................... Select a preset style that is close to the style you want to create. Preset style selection is carried out in the normal way (page 49). You can also use the style already selected in the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display as the basis for your new style, or select a different DISK/CUSTOM style just as you would a preset style. V Select the section you want to record. ..................................... In page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, press the SECT. button as many times as necessary to display the section you want to record: MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, MAIN D, INTRO, FILL IN, or ENDING. • In the CUSTOM STYLE display, the variations and patterns that make up a style are referred to as “sections.” • A custom style includes only one intro section, one fill-in section, and one ending section. • The custom style’s intro, fill-in, and ending sections are based on the corresponding patterns for the style variation (MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, or MAIN D) that was selected when the CUSTOM STYLE button was pressed (page 73). ➔ The SECT. function is highlighted, and each section is displayed in turn. The Clavinova plays the currently displayed section repeatedly. B Change the beat and section length. .......................................... If you want to create a style with a different time signature than the selected style, or change the number of measures in the selected section, press the PAGE [>] button. ➔ Page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display appears. CVP-201 72 74 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating Your Own Styles ● Changing the beat: Press the BEAT button to select a different time signature. ➔ The “Clear style?” message is displayed. BEAT function • Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5 • Basic setting: Depends on style. Clear style? Since the patterns of the selected style will not match the new beat, you will have to completely clear the style and start recording from scratch if you change the time signature. ➾ Press OK to clear the style, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style has been cleared, you can use the BEAT button, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a new time signature. ● Changing the section length: Press the MEAS. button to change the number of measures in the current section. MEAS. function • Settings: 1 — 8 • Basic setting: Depends on style. ➔ The “Clear section?” message is displayed. Clear section? • You will have to clear all parts of the currently selected section and start recording from scratch if you change the number of measures. • The “Clear section?” message will not be displayed if you have already cleared the section by changing the beat, as described above. ➾ Press OK to clear the section, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style has been cleared, you can use the MEAS. button, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to set the section length. The length of the FILL IN section can only be set to one measure. ● When you’re done here: 73 Once the BEAT and/or MEAS. parameters have been set as required, press the PAGE [<] button to return to page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. CVP-201 75 Creating Your Own Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ N Select the part you want to record. ............................................... Use the PART LCD button, the data dial, or [–] and [+] buttons to select the part you want to record. R1 R2 Bs C1 C2 Pd P1 P2 The R1 part is initially selected and set to record. Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Recording part Playback part OFF Part containing no data • Only one part can be set to record. • All other parts will be set to PLAY (the part number is surrounded by a box) or OFF (only the part number is displayed). Any part you select can be set to record by using the rightmost LCD button to select REC after selecting the part. ➔ The part number is highlighted. If you have selected a part other than R1 or R2, the “Clear part?” message will be displayed. Clear part? • If the source style is a preset style or a style loaded from an optional Style File disk, parts other than R1 and R2 must be cleared before they can be recorded. • The “Clear part?” message will not be displayed if the selected part does not contain any data. ➾ Press OK to clear the part and continue, or CANCEL to abort. M Select the voice for the part. ................................................................. At this point you can also select the voice you want to record the part with. Select the voice as you would the main keyboard voice (see page 29). Voices that can be used R1 Any drum or SFX kit in PERCUSSION group R2 Any Others Any except a drum kit or SFX kit CVP-201 74 76 Part The preset voice for the part being recorded is initially selected. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating Your Own Styles < Record the selected part. .................................................................. You can now record new notes in the selected part by playing the keyboard at the appropriate timing. Record non-percussion parts in C major seventh (CM7), since the custom style is recorded as a C major seventh pattern. If you want to create a totally new part from scratch, press the CLEAR LCD button to clear the selected part before beginning to record. If both the R1 and R2 parts are cleared, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide. (The metronome sound is not recorded, and will stop as soon as the custom style is stored.) • Playback of the custom style can be started and stopped by pressing the [START/STOP] button. (Data cannot be recorded while playback is stopped.) • All notes are automatically stopped at the end of the style (i.e., at the point between repeats when recording). It is therefore not advisable to record over this point. 75 When recording a drum kit voice in part R1 or R2, you can clear a single drum instrument from the part by pressing the key corresponding to the instrument to be cleared while holding down the C1 key on the keyboard. (The C1 key is labeled “CANCEL.”) The metronome timing guide can also be cleared in this way. Another useful recording aid is the SOLO LCD button: when this button is pressed and highlighted, only the selected part will sound. Press the SOLO button again to turn the solo function off and hear all parts in the selected section. CVP-201 77 Creating Your Own Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ > Quantize the recorded part, if necessary. .............................. You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by using the PART QUANTIZE functions in page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to align all the notes to a specified beat. Press the PAGE [>] button to display the function, then press the middle LCD button to select the quantize size: 3 32nd notes 16th note triplets 3 16th notes 8th note triplets 8th notes 3 quarter-note triplets quarter notes Once the required quantize size has been selected, press the START LCD button to quantize the current part. The part will begin to play using the new timing, and the START button will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the quantize operation and return to the pre-quantized data if the results are not as you expected. You will not be able to UNDO once another button has been pressed. ? Repeat until the custom style is complete. .......................... Repeat steps 4 through 9 to record other parts for the currently selected section. During custom style recording, no MIXER display is available. Repeat steps 4 through 10 to record other sections, until all sections have been recorded. [ Name the custom style. ............................................................................. When your custom style is complete, use the PAGE buttons to select page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the STYLE NAME LCD button to display the NAME page. CVP-201 76 78 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating Your Own Styles Use the > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the character you want to change (style names can be up to 12 characters in length). Use the data dial and/or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the CH.SET LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The BACK LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete the preceding character. When the name is complete, press OK to register the name for the current custom style, or CANCEL to abort. Store the custom style. .............................................................................. Press the STORE LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to store the current custom style in the Clavinova’s memory. The current tempo setting at the time the custom style is stored becomes the preset tempo for that style. ➔ The Clavinova displays a message asking you to confirm your decision to store the style. 77 ➾ Use the MEMORY No. ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the memory number (1 through 4) where you want to store the custom style, then press OK to store or CANCEL to abort. If the selected memory number already contains a style, the style name will appear next to the memory number. The existing style will be overwritten when a new style is stored. CVP-201 79 Creating Your Own Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ● Be Sure to Save Your Data! Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned off, so be sure to save your custom style before turning the power off (see page 82). Exit when done. .................................................................................................. Press the [EXIT] button to exit the CUSTOM STYLE display and return to the main display. EXIT Other Custom Style Functions In addition to the various functions described in the basic custom style recording procedure, above, the CUSTOM STYLE display pages include several other functions that you may find useful when creating custom styles. ■ RECALL SECTION function ...................................................................... This function makes it possible to recall the last-stored version of the currently selected section (all parts of the section are recalled). Simply press the RECALL SECTION LCD button in page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. If the Clavinova cannot recall the preceding operation (i.e., after time signature has been changed), the “Can’t recall!” message will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return to the previous display. ■ STYLE CLEAR function ................................................................................. Press the STYLE CLEAR LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to completely clear the current custom style. The “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to clear the style, or NO to cancel the change. CVP-201 78 80 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating Your Own Styles ■ Volume and Effects ......................................................................................... Page 4 of the CUSTOM STYLE display includes several functions that let you set the volume, reverb, chorus type and depth, and pan for each part of each custom style section. Z Select the section and part. Use the SECT. function to select a section (or select ALL for all sections), and the PART function to select a part (or select ALL for all parts). X Select the parameter you want to set. The third LCD button selects the parameter to be set for the current section and part. Choose from VOLUME, REVERB, CHORUS, or PAN. C Select the chorus type. If you selected CHORUS in step 2, the TYPE function is displayed above the fourth LCD button. Use this function to select the chorus type you want to apply to the current section and part. Chorus Type List 79 • CHORUS 1 • CHORUS 2 • CHORUS 3 • CELESTE 1 • CELESTE 2 • CELESTE 3 • FLANGER 1 • FLANGER 2 • OFF CVP-201 81 Creating Your Own Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ V Set the value or depth of the selected parameter. The VALUE (or DEPTH) function displayed above the rightmost LCD button sets the amount or depth for the parameter selected in step 2. When VOLUME is selected, the SECTION setting is fixed at ALL and the VALUE range is from –50 to +50 (this value is relative to the preset volume of the source style). When the REVERB or CHORUS parameter is selected, the DEPTH can be set in a range from 0 to 127. When PAN is selected, the VALUE function can be set in a range from L10 (full left) to C (center) to R10 (full right). B Repeat as necessary. Repeat the preceding steps to set other parameters for each part and section in the custom style. • The reverb type used for the custom style are determined by the style that was selected as the basis for custom style creation. • Normally the VALUE and chorus TYPE settings from the preset style are initially selected. If the PART function is set to ALL, the preset values for part R1 are displayed. If the SECTION function is set to ALL, the preset values for MAIN A are displayed. • The word “OTHERS” may appear as the chorus type if the preset style uses a chorus type other than those in the list. The OTHERS setting cannot be reselected once you select a different chorus type. ■ Saving Styles to Disk ................................................................................... Page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display lets you save custom styles on a disk. You can save custom styles individually, or in a complete set of up to four styles. After inserting a properly formatted disk (page 111) in the Clavinova’s disk drive, use the MEMORY No. ▼ and ▲ buttons to select the custom style you want to save to disk, or select ALL to save a complete set of up to four custom styles. When this is done, press the SAVE LCD button to start saving the data to disk. At this point the SAVE display appears. Enter a name for the style file. The procedure for entering the filename is the same as that used to enter a name for a custom style (page 140). Press SAVE when the name has been entered. If a file with the same name already exists, the “Same name! Overwrite?” message will be displayed. Press OK to overwrite the existing file, or CANCEL to abort the save operation. CVP-201 80 82 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating Custom styles must be stored in the Clavinova’s memory before they can be saved to a disk. If a custom style has not been stored and you attempt to save it to disk, the “Store in memory before saving to disk” message will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return to page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. Store the custom style (see step 12 on page 79), then try saving again. Your Own Styles Style files can be loaded from disk using the ALL LOAD and SINGLE LOAD functions, as described in the “Loading Style Files” section (page 86). ■ Deleting Style Files ......................................................................................... Style files can also be deleted from a disk using the DELETE function on page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. After inserting a disk that contains style files in the Clavinova disk drive, press the DELETE LCD button. Use the FILE ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the style file you want to delete from the disk. The “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to delete the style file, or NO to cancel. ■ Exiting Custom Style Mode ................................................................... 81 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode and return to the main display. CVP-201 83 Creating Your Own Styles ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Playing Back Your Custom Styles Once created, your original custom styles can be selected for playback by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the custom style you want to play. The selected style can then be played in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 51). Since only one intro pattern, one fill-in pattern, and one ending pattern can be recorded for each custom style, no intro, fill-in, or ending variations are produced during playback. Messages in Custom Style Mode The following messages may appear when creating and storing a style in Custom Style mode. ■ Memory Full During Recording ......................................................... This message will be displayed if the memory becomes full during recording or editing. Press OK to return to the CUSTOM STYLE display, then simplify the style by clearing a part, etc. ■ Insufficient Memory To Store ............................................................... This message will be displayed if there is not enough memory to perform a store operation. In this case it will be necessary to either delete a style you don’t need, or simplify the style you are currently recording. Press CANCEL to return to the CUSTOM STYLE display and simplify the current style (by clearing a part, etc.), or DELETE to delete one or more styles. If you select the DELETE function, the “Select style to delete” message will be displayed: CVP-201 82 84 The amount of memory being used by each style is displayed next to the style name (in approximate kilobytes). You can refer to this amount to judge how much memory (out of the total 100 KB) will become available when a particular style is deleted. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Creating Your Own Styles Use the MEMORY No. ▼ and ▲ buttons to select the style you want to delete, then press OK to delete the style, or CANCEL to cancel the operation. If the Clavinova displays the “Can’t delete this style!” message when you try to delete a style, it is because you have tried to delete the style that your custom style was based on. If this happens, press OK to return to the “Select style to delete” display, then select a different style to delete. ■ Exit Before Store ............................................................................................... If you press [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode before storing the style, the Clavinova will display a message like the one shown below: Select a memory number and press YES to store the style and exit, press NO to exit without storing the style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode. ■ Style Change Before Store ..................................................................... If you attempt to select a different source style before storing the style you’ve just edited, the following display will appear: If you want to select a different source style without storing the current style, exit the Custom Style mode without storing the style (see “Exit Before Store” above), then re-enter the Custom Style mode. 83 Select a memory number and press OK to store the style and select a new source style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode. CVP-201 85 Using Style Files ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ You can load and play style files created in the Style File Format either from optional Yamaha “Style File” disks, or from disks containing custom style files you’ve created yourself. DISK VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON CUSTOM MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL About the Yamaha Style File Format The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original auto-accompaniment format, which has evolved through years of development and refinement. The Style File Format features a unique conversion system that allows you to play exceptionally high-quality accompaniments with a variety of chord types. In addition to the internal styles, the Style File Format lets you use other sophisticated styles from optional Style File disks, as well as styles that were created and saved to disk in the Custom Style mode. Style files created for Clavinova models prior to the CVP-201 may have slightly different formats. If you try loading such files, the data may not play back as expected. (This also applies to the use of CVP-201 style data by earlier-model Clavinovas.) Loading Styles from a Disk Z Insert a disk. ........................................................................................................... Insert a disk containing style files into the disk drive. The [DISK IN USE] lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. When a Style File disk is inserted, the STYLE FILE LOAD display (see step 2 below) will appear automatically. If the disk is already inserted and the STYLE FILE LOAD display is not showing, press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button to open the DISK/ CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the LOAD SINGLE button. If a disk containing both song data and style files is inserted, the SONG PLAY display will automatically appear. If this happens, press the [SONG] button or the [EXIT] button to return to the main display, then press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button. DISK IN USE To load a set of four style files that was created by selecting ALL as the memory number when the files were saved in Custom Style mode (see page 82), press the ALL LOAD LCD button rather than the LOAD SINGLE button. CVP-201 84 86 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Using Style X Select a style file. .............................................................................................. Select the desired style using the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. You can preview the selected style by pressing the LISTEN LCD button. (The LISTEN function is not available in the ALL LOAD display.) To stop listening, press the LISTEN LCD button again, or press the [START/STOP] button. • If a tempo is set prior to loading the style, that tempo becomes the default for the loaded style. • Some styles are too large to preview with the LISTEN function. In this case the “Too much data for LISTEN function! Please load data.” message will be displayed. If this happens, load the style directly as in step 4. • The Auto Accompaniment is automatically turned on when the LOAD SINGLE button is pressed, and the style is played back automatically with the Auto Accompaniment in C Major when the LISTEN LCD button is pressed. You can change the chord or try playing on the keyboard while previewing a style. C Select a memory number and load the style. .................... Use the MEMORY LCD button to select the memory number to which the selected style file is to be loaded (1 through 4), then press the LOAD LCD button to load the style file. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select and load other style files. 85 It is not necessary to select a memory number when ALL LOAD is selected in step 1. Simply press OK to load or CANCEL to abort. If there is not enough memory to load the specified style file, the “Not enough memory! Delete an unneeded style?” message will be displayed. In this case it will be necessary to delete a style you don’t need before loading the new style. Use the MEMORY No. ▼ and ▲ buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then press DELETE to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort. • If the selected memory number already contains a style, the name of that style will appear above the MEMORY and LOAD functions in the display. The existing style will be overwritten when a new style is loaded. (One pre-programmed temporary style is automatically loaded into the [DISK/CUSTOM] memory whenever the power is turned on.) • The ALL LOAD display is as follows: When ALL LOAD is executed, all data in the four memories will be replaced by new data. • The amount of memory being used by each style is displayed next to the style name (in approximate kilobytes). You can refer to this amount to judge how much memory (out of the total 100 KB) will become available when a particular style is deleted. CVP-201 87 Using Style Files ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ V Eject the disk when you’re done. .................................................... When you’ve finished with the Style File disk, press the disk drive EJECT button to remove it and return to the normal play mode display. You can return to the normal play mode without removing the disk by pressing the [EXIT] button. CAUTION The [DISK IN USE] lamp will light while the style is being loaded. NEVER attempt to remove a disk while the [DISK IN USE] lamp is lit. The LISTEN, LOAD, [EXIT], and STYLE buttons will not function while the style data is being loaded (i.e., while the [DISK IN USE] lamp is lit). Playing Loaded Style Files Once loaded, style files can be selected for playback by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the style you want to play. The selected style can then be played in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 51). Loaded disk styles will be retained in memory only until the power is turned off. STYLE 8BEAT 16BEAT SWING/ JAZZ LATIN BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ DISK HARMONY CUSTOM CVP-201 86 88 6: Registrations CHAPTER Using Registrations (Registering and Recalling Panel Setups) ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Registration feature lets you store complete panel setups that you can recall whenever needed. A total of 20 setups (5 banks containing 4 memories each) can be registered in the Clavinova’s memory. VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG 1 CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Storing a Panel Setup Use the following procedure to store a panel setup as a registration in the Clavinova’s memory. Z Set up the controls as needed. ........................................................... For a list of the settings that are memorized by the Registration function, refer to page 11 of the Reference Booklet. X Select a registration bank. ....................................................................... Use the [BANK +] and [BANK –] buttons to select the desired bank. REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION Registration bank • Range: A — E • Basic setting: A ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The selected bank is displayed in the upper left corner of main display. 87 Registration bank CVP-201 89 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Using Registrations C Register the panel setup. .......................................................................... While holding down the [REGISTRATION] button, press one of the buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING corresponding to the registration memory where you want to save the setup. REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION Registration Memory • Range: 1 — 4 (each bank) • Basic setting: None ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The number of the selected registration memory appears next to the bank name in the upper left corner of the main display. The panel settings that were previously stored in the selected registration are cleared and replaced by the new settings. Registration number • Pre-programmed settings are initially stored in all registration memories when the Clavinova’s power is first turned on. • By default, the registration settings are preserved even when the Clavinova’s power is turned off (see page 152). You 5can also save individual registrations (or complete sets of 20 registrations) to floppy disk for future recall (see page 139). Recalling the Registered Panel Settings Z Press the [REGISTRATION] button. .............................................. REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The [REGISTRATION] lamp lights. X Select a bank. ....................................................................................................... Use the [BANK +] and [BANK –] buttons to select the bank that contains the desired registration. REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The selected bank is displayed in the upper left corner of the main display. C Select a registration. Press one of the buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING corresponding to the registration memory you want to recall. CVP-201 88 90 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 2 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION Using Registrations ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The number of the recalled registration appears next to the bank name in the upper left corner of in the main display. A pencil icon will appear to the right of the registration number in the display as soon as any change is made to the panel buttons or settings. The pencil icon is displayed to remind you that the current panel settings are different from those stored by the Registration function. Edit symbol • Registered panel settings are not recalled when a bank is selected. The settings are recalled only when one of the numbered buttons ([1] through [4]) is pressed. • When the LEFT PEDAL function is set to REGISTRATION (see page 138), the left pedal can be used to select the registration memories in sequential order (A1 through E4), letting you recall a different registration each time the pedal is pressed. However, other left pedal settings saved by the Registration function cannot be recalled in this case. The Clavinova’s pre-programmed factory default panel settings can be stored in a registration memory to allow easy recall of the preprogrammed panel settings. Using the REGISTRATION function, register the factory default settings (the preprogrammed settings initially present when the Clavinova’s power is first turned on) to [REGIST A-1] (see page 89). Now when you select [A-1] all panel settings will be conveniently returned to their factory default settings. Protecting Panel Settings You can use the Registration Freeze function to prevent certain panel settings from being changed when a Registration is recalled. This allows you to recall various registrations while using the Auto Accompaniment without suddenly changing the style or volume settings. Z Open the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display. ..................... For a list of the settings in each freeze category, see page 11 in the Reference Booklet. Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REGISTRATION]. REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING DIRECT ACCESS ➾ 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ➔ The REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display appears. Freeze categories 89 Categories to be frozen are marked by an asterisk (*) in the menu listing. Also, the ON setting (in the ON/OFF function over the middle LCD button) is highlighted when a category to be frozen is selected. CVP-201 91 Using Registrations ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ X Indicate the categories to be frozen. ............................................ Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a category, then press the ON/OFF button to mark or unmark the selected category. Freeze Categories • Settings: ON, OFF • Basic setting: ON (ACMP SETTING) OFF (others) Backup of last settings: ON Repeat this step to mark or unmark other categories, as needed. C Turn the Freeze function on or off. ................................................ Press the FREEZE LCD button to freeze or unfreeze the categories you marked in step 2. ➔ The FREEZE function is highlighted when the marked categories are frozen. When the Freeze function is off, the settings in all categories are not protected. V Exit the display. ................................................................................................... To exit the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display and return to the main display, press [EXIT]. CVP-201 90 92 FREEZE • Settings: ON (highlighted), OFF (unhighlighted) • Basic setting: OFF • Backup of last setting: ON 7: Song Control CHAPTER Song Playback ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova can play back songs recorded using the Song Record function (page 110), as well as song data included on various commercially available software disks. You can also play along on the keyboard as the songs play back. Moreover, when song data software includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the display during playback. • See “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” (page 9) for information on using floppy disks. • The Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs recorded on a single disk. Any songs exceeding this number will not be available for playback. • Playback data is normally not output via MIDI. However, you can set the Clavinova to output song data using the Song Transmission function in the FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display (page 150). • In addition to songs you’ve recorded yourself, the CVP-201 can play back commercially available disks of Yamaha DOC software, XG software, and Disklavier PianoSoft as well as GM software. See “Playing Other Types of Music Data” on page 104. • Consult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is compatible with the Lyric Display function of the Clavinova. SONG CONTROL VOLUME MASTER VOLUME MAX CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME DEMO 8BEAT HELP SWING/ JAZZ 16BEAT BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE SONG CONTROL TEMPO SONG SONG PLAY/ STOP REC PAUSE REW FF VOICE PLAY/ STOP REC PIANO E. PIANO FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE SOUND REPEAT 1 2 GUITAR SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT BEAT MAX LATIN METRONOME DISK RESET FUNCTION HARMONY MIXER PAUSE REW BASS CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MIN INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP MIN SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Song Playback The LCD screens used in this Owner’s Manual are for instuctional purposes only. Song names, etc., will appear differently depending on the disk you use. Z Enter the Song Play mode. ................................................................. Gently insert the included “Music Software Collection” disk or a disk containing songs you’ve recorded yourself into the disk drive. Make sure to insert the disk face up in correct direction, as shown in the illustration, until it clicks into place. The Song Play mode is automatically called up when a song disk is inserted in the disk drive. The Song Play mode is not automatically engaged if the disk is inserted when one of the disk-related FUNCTION displays (page 139) or the CUSTOM STYLE display (page 74) is showing. DISK IN USE Sliding shutter 91 Label CVP-201 93 Song Playback ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ➔ The DISK IN USE lamp lights while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. Once the disk has been identified, the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1) appears and the [SONG] lamp lights. If a song disk has been inserted but the Song Play mode is not engaged, press the [SONG] button. ➔ The [SONG] lamp lights. Press the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the first page, if the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown. X Select a song number. ................................................................................ Select the desired song number for playback by using the SONG button, data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. ➔ The selected song number, name, current tempo and the file icon which indicates the type of the file are displayed. Song numbers 1 through 99 are displayed, including song numbers that contain no song data. However, no song names are displayed for song numbers that contain no data. Select “ALL” if you want all songs on the disk to be played in order. Select “RANDOM” if you want all songs on the disk to be played at random. For either selection “ALL” or “RANDOM” the songs will be repeated until playback is stopped. Current voice for the keyboard Tempo Selected song number/name File icon ● File Icons There are four icons (shown below) that indicate the type of the file. Icons File Type XG/SMF format file DOC/ESEQ format file Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft or XG/ESEQ file • Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibility” (page 172) for information on file formats. • Icons are not shown for GM song files or song data files recorded with CVP models other than the CVP-109/ 107/105/700/103/201, the CVP-98/ 96/600, or the CVP-94/92. Song data recorded with the CVP-201 CVP-201 92 94 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display page 3), to view the entire list of the song names in the disk. The desired song can be selected easily by using the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. Up to eight song titles are shown in the display at a time. If more songs are on the disk, the next eight titles will appear when you scroll past the last title shown in the display. Song Playback When nothing appears in the song name location… This indicates that there is no song data for this song number. Repeat Playback from a Specific Song If you first select ALL in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display, and then select a song in the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display page 3), all songs will be repeatedly played back starting from the selected song. Repeat Playback of a Single Song If you select a song in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display or in the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display page 3), and then select 1 SONG in the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4), only the selected song will be played back repeatedly until stopped. C Start and stop playback. ............................................................................ Start playback of the selected song by pressing the [PLAY/STOP] button. SONG CONTROL SONG PLAY/ STOP REC ➔ Playback of the selected song starts. Unless ALL or RANDOM has been selected, the selected song will play through to the end, then playback will stop automatically. The current measure number and tempo will be shown in the display during playback. You can also start playback of the selected song by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Press the panel [PLAY/STOP] button to stop playback. Voice Selection During Playback The voice you play from the keyboard can be changed during song playback by selecting a voice in the normal way (page 29). The voices of the 1/RIGHT and 2/ LEFT parts being played back can be changed in the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (page 98). Please note that the song may not start immediately after you press [PLAY/ STOP]. Turning off the Keyboard Guide Lamp The keyboard guide lamps corresponding to the notes being played by the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts will light in real time. These guide lamps can be turned off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 109.) ➔ Song playback stops. You can also stop playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button. To exit the Song Play mode, press [SONG] or [EXIT]. The lamp turns off and the previous display appears. Turning Off the Lyric Display Lyrics are shown in the display when playing back software which contains lyric data. If you want to stop the lyrics from appearing, you can disable this function in page 5 of the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. 93 Using the Pedal to Start/Stop Playback When you set the Left Pedal Function to START/STOP in the FUNCTION [PEDAL] display (display page 3), the left pedal will function like the [START/ STOP] button. (See page 138.) CVP-201 95 Song Playback ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ● Adjusting the Tempo The playback tempo of the song can be changed as desired. (See page 25.) The preset tempo for the selected song can be restored at any time by simultaneously pressing the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons. Usually the tempo is indicated by numbers. However in case of the free tempo software, “- - -” will appear in place of the tempo in the display, and the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of the song has been played back. The increase or decrease of the tempo based on the basic tempo is indicated by a percentage figure in the display when the tempo is changed (from -99 to +99 at maximum; the range differs depending on the software). The BEAT lamps (page 52) may not flash during playback of free-tempo software. With some songs, the displayed measure numbers may not match those marked on the score. TEMPO METRONOME RESET V Eject the disk. ....................................................................................................... When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the disk drive’s EJECT button to remove it. CAUTION Never take out the disk while the DISK IN USE lamp is lit or while a song is being played back. ➔ The LCD display returns to the main display. Volume Adjustment for Each Part The volume of each part can be adjusted in the MIXER display. DISK IN USE Adjusting the Level Balance of Song Playback and the Keyboard Voices Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control (page 23) to adjust the volume. When playing back a song recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/700/103/201, the Auto Accompaniment can be turned on by pressing the [ACMP ON] button. CVP-201 94 96 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Song Playback Part Cancel The 1/RIGHT (right hand), 2/LEFT (left hand) and ORCH (accompaniment) buttons in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display can be used to turn playback of the corresponding parts on or off. The buttons are highlighted when the parts are turned on. For example, you can turn off the right- and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard. • Parts can be switched on and off during playback. • Parts not having any data cannot be turned on. This applies when there is actually no data in the assigned track (page 98), or when the track assigned to the 2/LEFT part is set to “TRK -(OFF).” In the case of Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files, DOC files and XG/ESEQ files, the part indication does not appear for the parts without data. In this example, 1/RIGHT is canceled. The track assignment for each button can be changed in display page 6 of the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (page 98). ■ Turning Individual Accompaniment Parts On or Off Normally, pressing the ORCH (accompaniment) LCD button turns all orchestra parts (tracks 3 through 16) — or all parts other than 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT — on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on or off individually in the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display page 2). Z Select the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] page. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display page 2). 95 ➔ Tracks which contain data are indicated above the TRACK < and > buttons. Tracks enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the track number. Tracks which do not contain data are not displayed. All track numbers appear whether, the tracks contain data or not, when a Standard MIDI file song is selected (except songs recorded on the CVP-109/107/ 105/700/103/201, the CVP-98/96/600, and the CVP-94/92). CVP-201 97 Song Playback ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ X Select the desired track for playback (PLAY/OFF, SOLO). Select the track by using the TRACK < and > buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons. ➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark. Turn playback on or off for the selected track by pressing the rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback) or OFF. When a track is muted, the box surrounding the track number disappears. The voice used by the currently selected track is shown above PLAY/OFF. Select a track, then press and highlight the SOLO LCD button to hear only the selected track. Press the SOLO LCD button again to cancel the Solo function. Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment ■ Assigning Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT ............................. Specific tracks can be assigned to the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT functions in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display, allowing you to selectively turn playback of assigned tracks on or off. TRK - - (OFF) can be assigned to 2/LEFT. The same track cannot be assigned to both parts. Select the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (display page 6) by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons. ➾ Press the 1/RIGHT button or the 2/LEFT button to highlight the corresponding function in the display, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to assign the desired track. You can also select the track by pressing the 1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT button. CVP-201 The track assignments of DOC files and Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files are fixed, and therefore cannot be changed. Tracks can only be assigned when playback is stopped at the top of the song. 96 98 1/RIGHT • Settings: 1 — 16 • Basic setting: Depends on file type. 2/LEFT • Settings: 1 — 16, -- (off) • Basic setting: Depends on file type. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Song Playback ■ Selecting Voices for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT Parts The playback voices for the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts can be selected in the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display. Press L&R VOICE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corresponding function in the display, then select the playback voice for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can also select a voice by using the L&R VOICE ▼ or ▲. The playback voice can only be changed when playback is stopped at the top of the song. Overall Song Playback Volume Control The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider can be used to control the overall volume of song playback. When you enter the Song Play mode, the song volume level is automatically set to the volume level that was last set in the Song Play mode, regardless of the slider’s position. After that, moving the slider will set the volume to the corresponding level. If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on during playback of an original song that was recorded on the CVP-109/107/105/ 700/103/201, the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control will affect the level of the Auto Accompaniment rather than that of song playback. VOLUME 97 MASTER VOLUME ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN CVP-201 99 Song Playback ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Adjustment of Track Settings To adjust the playback volume, voice, and pan settings, as well as the reverb, chorus, and effect depth for individual tracks, press the [MIXER] button while in the Song Play mode to call up the MIXER display. FUNCTION MIXER You can use the MIXER display to set the parameters listed below. See the indicated reference pages for descriptions of each parameter. Parameters available in the MIXER display ● When track 1 — 16 is selected: ● When TOTAL is selected: • VOLUME (See page 32.) • TEMPO (See page 25.) • VOICE (See page 29.) • Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 42.) • PAN (See page 32.) • REVERB TYPE (See page 42.) • REVERB DEPTH (See page 43.) • CHORUS TYPE (See page 44.) • CHORUS DEPTH (See page 45.) • EFFECT TYPE (See page 47.) • EFFECT DEPTH (See page 48.) The Program Change Number (PRG#), Bank LSB (BKL), and Bank MSB (BKM) parameters, which are used to select voices via MIDI, are displayed when VOICE is selected. Depending on the file type, some parameters cannot be changed. For such parameters, a “Fixed” indication is shown. Changing Settings in the MIXER Display Z Select the track to be changed. ........................................................ Select the desired track by pressing TRACK < or >. Selecting TOTAL will change the overall settings of the song rather than the settings of individual tracks. Press the rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback), OFF, or SOLO for the selected track. Select SOLO if you want to play only the selected track. CVP-201 98 100 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Song Playback X Select the parameter to be edited. ................................................. Press SELECT ▼ or ▲ to select the desired parameter. Depending on the file type, voice changes may only be possible for tracks 1 and 2. Current value for the selected track Parameter selected for editing Selected track is highlighted. C Edit the value or setting. ........................................................................... Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the value or setting. You can make changes to the parameters while the song is playing back, letting you immediately hear the results of your edits. • Selecting TOTAL and changing the REVERB DEPTH value will also affect the sound of your keyboard performance. • The voices of tracks to which Auto Accompaniment, rhythm, and harmony data have been recorded can also be changed. • Volume range: 0 — 127 • If another song is selected, all settings will return to the basic settings for the song (or the settings used to record the song). • If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on during playback of an original song that was recorded on the CVP-109/ 107/105/700/103/201, the MIXER display will function as Auto Accompaniment Part Volume Control (page 65) instead of Song Track Volume Control. Repeat Functions The Clavinova has convenient repeat functions that let you repeatedly play back the same song or sections within the song. This function is useful when you want to practice a difficult phrase. Select the desired mode from the available four Repeat modes from the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4). 99 Four Repeat modes • OFF (Repeat function is turned off) • PHRASE (Phrase Repeat) • 1 SONG (1 Song Repeat) • AB mode (AB Repeat) • The ALL or RANDOM playback mode (in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display) will be disengaged when any of the Repeat modes are selected. • Any previously set Repeat mode will be reset to OFF when a different song is selected. CVP-201 101 Song Playback ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Phrase Repeat ...................................................................................................... When playing back Yamaha software that includes special phrase marks, such as DOC files, you can select specific phrase numbers (as indicated on the accompanying sheet music) and repeatedly practice only the selected phrase. (Phrase Repeat can be used for the four songs for which notation is provided in the included Music Book.) If you select PHRASE by using the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ buttons, the PHRASE display for selection of the phrase number will appear at the right of the button. Press PHRASE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corresponding function in the display, then select the phrase number by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can also select the phrase number by pressing PHRASE ▼ or ▲. Once song playback is started, the selected phrase will be played back repeatedly until playback is stopped. • Parts can be turned on/off even during the performance. • The Guide function can also be used simultaneously with Phrase Repeat. • When Phrase Repeat is started, a lead-in count automatically plays before the phrase. However, for freetempo songs, a lead-in count is not available. ■ 1 Song Repeat ...................................................................................................... When 1 SONG is selected by pressing the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ button, any song selected and played as described above will play repeatedly until stopped. Lead-in count is not played. ■ AB Repeat ................................................................................................................. This function allows you to specify any section (between point A and point B) of a song, letting you repeatedly play back the selected section for practice. When AB mode is selected by the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ buttons, A ➔ and B will appear at the right of the buttons in the display to specify points A and B. • The specified A and B points will be erased when a new song number or another Repeat mode is selected. • A lead-in count automatically plays before the specified section A–B Repeat playback is started. However, for free-tempo songs, a lead-in count is not available. • To specify the A point as the beginning of the song, press A ➔ before playback starts. In this case a lead-in count is not available. • Specifying only the A point results in repeat playback between the A point and the end of the song. • The B point cannot be selected unless an A point is selected. CVP-201 100 102 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Song Playback While the song is playing back, press the A ➔ button once at the beginning of the section to be repeated. ➾ Then, press the B button at the end of the section to be repeated. Repeat playback of the specified section (from point A to point B) will begin automatically. The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song or a different Repeat mode is selected. The same section can be played back repeatedly as many times as you desire by using the [PLAY/STOP] button. When both the A and B points have been specified, you can clear the A and B points by pressing the A ➔ button, or just the B point by pressing the B button. You can then specify other A and B points within the song. Other Playback Controls SONG CONTROL SONG PLAY/ STOP REC PAUSE REW FF ■ Pause ............................................................................................................................. Press the [PAUSE] button during song playback to temporarily stop song playback. Press [PAUSE] again or the [PLAY/STOP] button to resume playback from the same point. Using the [REW] button may cause the voice, tempo, and/or volume to change. ■ Rewind and Fast Forward ........................................................................ Use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song. • While playback is stopped or paused, the [REW] and [FF] buttons can be used to step backward or forward through the song a measure at a time. Holding down either button continuously moves through the song in the corresponding direction. 101 • During playback, the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move the playback point of the song rapidly as long as the button is held. No sound is produced during [REW] operation. CVP-201 103 Song Playback ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Playing Other Types of Music Data ■ About Compatible Software .................................................................. The CVP-201 can play back the following types of software. • Sequence formats: SMF (format 0 and 1), ESEQ • Voice allocation formats: GM System Level 1, XG, DOC The Lyric Display function (page 109) cannot be used with song data recorded in SMF format 1. Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibility” (page 172) for information on the voice allocation formats and sequence formats. The internal tone generator of the CVP-201 automatically resets for compatibility with either the Yamaha XG format (including GM System Level 1) or the Yamaha DOC voice allocation (page 172), depending on the playback data. (However, the selected voice allocation on the panel will not change.) ■ Song Data Recorded on Other Instruments ........................ Song data recorded on other Clavinovas (CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/ 85A/87A/59S/69A/69/79A/89/92/94/96/98/600/109/107/105/700/103) will normally be played back with the correct voices even though the volume balance may be slightly different. However, data recorded using the Auto Accompaniment function of the CVP-50/70 cannot be played back properly. Song data recorded on the Yamaha Disklavier can also be played back. CVP-201 102 104 Regardless of the type of software, only the following disk formats can be used: 3.5" 2DD 720 kilobyte format and 3.5" 2HD 1.44 megabyte format. ○ Guide Control ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova has a special Guide function which allows you to practice by using the appropriate disk software. The “piano roll” display and the keyboard guide lamp indicate which keys you should play, and when you should play them. You can even practice at your own pace since the Clavinova pauses playback of the accompaniment until you play the correct keys. (You can try out the Guide function by pressing one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons during playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song in the Demo mode.) GUIDE CONTROL VOLUME MASTER VOLUME MAX CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT MAX TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MIN MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START /STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT MIN EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL Keyboard guide lamps Guide Methods and Piano Roll The Clavinova has three different Guide methods that can be selected depending on your playing experience or preferences. Beginning players should practice first with Easy Play, then go on to Next Note, then Sound Repeat. “FOLLOW LIGHTS” and “CueTIME” software should be used with the Next Note method, as the Easy Play and Sound Repeat methods may not function properly with such software. GUIDE CONTROL EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE SOUND REPEAT ■ Practicing the Timing: Easy Play ..................................................... Since the Easy Play method lets you practice only the timing of the notes, you can play anywhere on the keyboard. The melody will play back smoothly when you play with the correct timing. (The accompaniment plays back normally in tempo.) ■ Practicing the Notes: Next Note ....................................................... 103 The Next Note method lets you check which notes to play by looking at the piano roll display and the keyboard guide lamps. Since the Clavinova waits to play the accompaniment until you play the correct note, you can practice at your own pace. The keyboard guide lamps indicate the timing in which to play, by changing from lit-up to flashing. If the guide lamps do not flash… The guide lamps may not flash in the case of a few songs because of a special guide system. In case of such songs, however, you can switch to the Next Note method so that the lamps flash, if you like. See the “Other Guide-related Functions” on page 108. If the guide lamps and piano roll are transposed up or down… The guide lamps and piano roll may be transposed up or down by one or two octaves for certain songs. The guide lamps and piano roll will not indicate notes exceeding the 88-key range of the keyboard. CVP-201 105 Guide Control ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Practicing Phrase-by-Phrase with the Playback: Sound Repeat ....................................................................................................... In the Sound Repeat method, the Clavinova plays back a short phrase. Listen to the phrase and practice. As soon as you play the phrase correctly, the Clavinova will automatically play the next phrase. ● Piano Roll To show the piano roll in the display, press any GUIDE CONTROL button, then press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. A bar of the same length as the note to be played scrolls down from the top of the display toward the bottom. You should play the note at the time the bar reaches the bottom of the display. In order to play the note with the correct duration, hold the note for as long as the bar remains in the display. Number of Repeats You can set the number of times the phrase will be repeated in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 109.) The keyboard guide lamps can be turned on or off as desired in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 109.) Piano Roll ON/OFF The piano roll display can be turned on or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 109.) Using the Guide Function Z Set up the desired song for practicing. .................................... Check that the disk is properly inserted in the disk drive before calling up the Guide function. ➾ Select the song and cancel the part that you wish to practice yourself from the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1). CVP-201 Auto Part Cancel If you turn on the Guide function without canceling playback of the part to be practiced, 1/RIGHT part is guided (or the 2/LEFT part is guided when the 1/RIGHT part contains no data). However, when you cancel the part before turning on Guide, the setting will be kept until the song is changed. 104 106 Before Practicing Before starting to practice, play back the entire song without canceling the part to be practiced and listen to it carefully. This will give you a clear idea of how the song should be played, and will make your practice sessions progress more smoothly. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Guide Control X Select the Guide method. ........................................................................ Press one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons: [EASY PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT]. GUIDE CONTROL EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE Turning Off the Keyboard Guide Lamps The keyboard guide lamp can be turned on and off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. (See page 109.) SOUND REPEAT ➔ The lamp of the corresponding button lights. When the GUIDE CONTROL buttons cannot be turned on… The GUIDE CONTROL buttons can be used only in the Song Play mode or when the “4. GUIDE Demo” song is selected in the Demo mode. Only one Guide mode can be selected at a time. C Practice the part. ............................................................................................... Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. ➔ The piano roll will appear. Practice along with the accompaniment. Piano Roll On/Off The piano roll display can be turned on or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). (See page 109.) SONG CONTROL SONG PLAY/ STOP REC The correct melody plays back no matter which note you play in the EASY PLAY mode. The Guide method can be changed during playback. However, the Guide method cannot be changed for songs in which SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE MODE location in SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] (display page 5). The [PAUSE] button cannot be used in the Next Note or Sound Repeat methods. V Stop your practice session. .................................................................. The Guide function stops automatically when playback reaches the end of the song. You can also stop song playback by pressing the [PLAY/ STOP] button. To turn off the Guide function, press the appropriate button - [EASY PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT] - so that the lamp turns off. • The keyboard guide lamps light corresponding to the notes played by the 1/ RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts during song playback, even when Guide is set to off - unless the LAMP button is turned off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. The guide lamps indicate the notes to be played by both the 1/ RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts when both are turned on or off; when only one of the parts is turned off, the lamps indicate the notes to be played by the part that is turned off. 105 • The guide part can be selected, the piano roll and guide lamps can be turned on and off, and the Guide function itself can be turned on or off during playback. CVP-201 107 Guide Control ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ • Playback tempo can be set to any desired value after a song has been selected by using the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons. • The Guide function may not work properly with software which was not produced for independent left- and right-hand playback. • Since the Guide phrases used in the Sound Repeat method are automatically determined by the Clavinova, they may not precisely match the actual musical phrases. Also, the phrases may become shorter when the Guide function is used for both the leftand right-hand parts. Other Guide-related Functions Various settings related to the Guide functions can be made in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5). ■ GUIDE MODE ......................................................................................................... NORMAL is usually displayed as the setting of the GUIDE MODE function in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. Change the setting to ENSEMBLE by pressing the GUIDE MODE button; the part which was set to Part Cancel in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1) can then be played with the regular Part Cancel function and the other part (not set to Part Cancel) can be played with the Easy Play function. When Next Note is selected and SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE MODE display, a special Guide method is engaged for the selected song. To return the normal Next Note mode, press the GUIDE MODE button so that the indication changes to NORMAL. The settings made in this display will also be effective in the Guide function during playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song in the Demo mode. • The ENSEMBLE mode is effective only for songs which have data in both the [1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] parts. • The ENSEMBLE mode cannot be used when Next Note or Sound Repeat is selected. • The GUIDE MODE setting can only be changed when playback is stopped at the beginning of a song. • The SPECIAL indication appears automatically depending on the song being played back. The SPECIAL indication will not appear, even when pressing the GUIDE MODE button, when playing back songs that do not feature the special method. • When using the Easy Play or Sound Repeat method, the respective method is still active, even if the SPECIAL indication is shown. GUIDE MODE • Settings: NORMAL, ENSEMBLE, (SPECIAL) • Basic setting: NORMAL or SPECIAL (depends on song) CVP-201 106 108 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Guide Control ■ Setting the Sound Repeat Number ............................................. To set the number of times the phrase is repeated in the Sound Repeat mode, press the SOUND REPEAT button. When AUTO is selected, only the notes which have not been played correctly are repeated; the Guide function will automatically go on to the next phrase once the previous one has been played properly. SOUND REPEAT • Settings: AUTO, 2 — 10 • Basic setting: AUTO The SOUND REPEAT setting can only be changed when playback is stopped at the beginning of a song. ■ Lyric Display ON/OFF ................................................................................ To turn lyric display off, press the LYRICS button to set the function to OFF. LYRICS • Setting: ON, OFF • Basic setting: ON • The Lyric Display function cannot be used with song data recorded in SMF format 1. • If a song does not contain lyric data, the LYRICS function will display a row of dashes (- - -). The LYRICS function cannot be selected when playing back such songs. ■ Piano Roll ON/OFF ....................................................................................... The piano roll display can be turned on or off by pressing the PIANO ROLL button. When AUTO is selected, the piano roll will appear by turning on one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons. When this function is set to ON, the piano roll is always shown during playback; when it is set to OFF, the piano roll is not displayed. PIANO ROLL • Settings: AUTO, ON, OFF • Basic setting: AUTO When a song contains lyrics, the Lyric Display function has priority over the Piano Roll function. The Piano Roll will be displayed if you turn the Lyric Display function off as described above. ■ Keyboard Guide Lamp ON/OFF ...................................................... 107 To turn off the keyboard guide lamps, press the LAMP button to set the function to OFF. CVP-201 109 Song Recording ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova features comprehensive song recording functions that allow you to record your own performances to floppy disks. Three recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 112), which lets you record quickly and easily; Track Recording (page 115), with which you can record multiple instrumental parts; and Chord Sequence (page 121), which lets you step-record Auto Accompaniment chords. • Up to 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending on the amount of data contained in each song. • Before you can record songs on a new disk, the disk must be formatted for use by the Clavinova (see page 111). SONG CONTROL VOLUME MASTER VOLUME MAX CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME DEMO 8BEAT HELP SWING/ JAZZ 16BEAT BALLAD DANCE ROCK/ R&B COUNTRY BALLROOM TRAD/ WALZ PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE SONG CONTROL TEMPO SONG SONG PLAY/ STOP REC PAUSE REW FF VOICE PLAY/ STOP REC PIANO E. PIANO FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE SOUND REPEAT 1 2 GUITAR SYNTHESIZER ORGAN PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB XG SPLIT EFFECT BEAT MAX LATIN METRONOME DISK RESET FUNCTION HARMONY MIXER PAUSE REW BASS CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MIN INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS MIN ANCEL EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ● Structure of a Song A song can be made up of several instrumental parts, each assigned to a different track, as shown in the example below. Sample song track chart Track Part 1 Piano (right-hand) 2 Piano (left-hand) 3 Bass 4 : 9 Strings : Rhythm 10 : 16 Rhythm : Organ • Refer to “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” (page 9) for information on using floppy disks. • Songs recorded by the CVP-201 are saved as SMF (format 0) files. Songs recorded using the [XG] category voices are XG-compatible. See page 172 for information on the XG/SMF (format 0) format. (Up to a maximum of 16 tracks.) Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the display during operation. Refer to “Messages” (page 165) for information on the messages. CVP-201 108 110 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Song Recording Recording Setup: Disk Format Before you can record to the included blank disk, you will have to format it. Commercially available blank disks must also be formatted for use. You can use the Format function in the FUNCTION [DISK 5] display (page 146) to re-format floppy disks that have already been used for recording. Z Insert a disk. ........................................................................................................ Gently insert the included blank disk for recording into the disk drive face-up and shutter end first, until it clicks into place. ➔ A few seconds after inserting the disk into the disk drive, a “Start disk format?” message appears in the display. To start formatting, press the OK button. To cancel the format operation, press CANCEL. The same display appears when inserting blank unformatted disks, or disks of different formats. Format Types 2DD disks are formatted to 720 KB, while 2HD disks are formatted to 1.44 MB. DISK IN USE Shutter Label side of disk X Execute the format operation. ......................................................... 109 An “Are you sure?” message appears in the LCD display; press YES to execute the operation, or NO button to cancel it. A bar graph appears in the LCD display during formatting to indicate progress of the operation. The display automatically returns to the previous display when formatting is completed. CVP-201 111 Song Recording ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Quick Recording Z Insert a formatted disk. ............................................................................... Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position, then insert the disk face up with the shutter forward until it clicks into place. The Song Play mode is not automatically engaged if the disk is inserted when one of the disk-related FUNCTION displays (page 139) or the CUSTOM STYLE display (page 74) is showing. DISK IN USE Shutter Label side of disk Write protect tab closed (unlocked — write enabled) Using Style File Disks When using Style File disks, first load the desired data from the Style File disk (page 86), then insert the recording disk. ➔ The DISK IN USE lamp stays lit until the Clavinova reads and recognizes the disk. ➾ If the Song Play mode is not automatically called up, press the [SONG] button. ➔ The lamp lights and the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display appears. If the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown, use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select display page 1. X Select the song number to be recorded. ................................. Select the SONG function, then use the SONG button, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the desired song number for recording. ➾ Select a song number between 1 and 60. If you select a song number between 61 and 99, you will not be able to select the Song Record mode in step 3. The Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs on a single disk, but it can only record songs in song numbers up to 60. The selected number is the location where the song will be recorded. If a song name appears beside the song number, the selected song already contains data. Make sure that it doesn’t contain data you want to keep before moving on to the next step! If you record to a song that contains data, the existing data will be replaced by the new data. CVP-201 110 112 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song Recording C Select the Song Record mode. .............................................................. • The song number for recording can be changed in the QUICK RECORD display. Press the [REC] button. SONG CONTROL SONG PLAY/ STOP REC ➔ The [REC] lamp lights and the QUICK RECORD display (Record mode page 1) appears. • If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on when you enter the Record mode, the ACMP&RHY track will automatically be set to REC. Songs Recorded on Other Instruments • The Clavinova may display the “Convert to CVP song?” message (page 166) If you attempt to record data to a song created on another instrument. Press YES to convert the song before recording. • When a song is converted as described here, it may not be possible to record data in tracks other than tracks 1 or 2. Both 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT cannot be set to REC at the same time. Call up page 1 by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons if the lamp is lit but the QUICK RECORD display is not shown. Once you have entered the Record Mode, you can press [REC] or [EXIT] at any time before step 6 to cancel recording without saving any data. Recording the Harmony Parts The Clavinova will record harmony notes when you record with the Harmony function (page 69) turned on. If the harmony type is set to Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country, Octave, or 1+5, the harmony notes will be recorded in the selected track. When any other harmony type is selected, the harmony notes will be recorded in tracks 6 through 8. VSelect the part to be recorded. ........................................................ In Quick Recording, three parts can be recorded: the right hand part (1/RIGHT), the left hand part (2/LEFT) and the Auto Accompaniment & rhythm part (ACMP&RHY). Press the appropriate button — 1/ RIGHT, 2/LEFT or ACMP&RHY — to set the corresponding part to REC (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). The PLAY (playback) setting can be selected only for parts which already contain data. The ACMP&RHY part can be set to REC automatically by pressing the panel [ACMP ON] button. To record only the rhythm, leave ACMP&RHY set to REC, then press the [ACMP ON] button so that the lamp goes out. 111 When a part is set to REC (recording enabled), the Synchronized Start function is set to stand-by, and recording automatically starts when you play the keyboard. Recording in Dual/Split Mode • If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Dual mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 3. • If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Split mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 5. • If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Dual mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 4. • If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Split mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 5. • When the recording part is changed, [HARMONY] and [SPLIT] are automatically turned off. Recording the Auto Accompaniment • When recording Auto Accompaniment, the rhythm is recorded to tracks 9 through 10, bass to track 11, and chordal backing to tracks 12 through 16. • The Chord Sequence function (page 121) lets you record the Auto Accompaniment without having to play chord parts in tempo. • When any part is set to REC, the remaining capacity of the disk (in kilobytes) is shown to the right of the tempo indicator in the display. Empty 2DD and 2HD disks should have about 690 KB (about 69,000 notes) and 1400 KB (about 140,000 notes), respectively. • When the ACMP&RHY part is set to REC, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide before recording is started. CVP-201 113 Song Recording ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ B Select the desired voices and style, etc. ................................. Select the voices and accompaniment style and set the tempo in the normal way, and other settings needed. (If you want to try out the selected voices, style, tempo, or other settings, be sure to do so before entering the Song Record mode in step 3, since the recording will start as soon as you play the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button.) When Using Style File Disks When using Style File disks, make sure to load the data from the Style File disk (page 86) before inserting the disk for recording. The Auto Accompaniment sections — INTRO, AUTO FILL, ENDING, and FADE IN/OUT — can be also recorded. Press the INTRO button before starting to record, the AUTO FILL buttons while recording, the ENDING button at the end of recording, and the FADE IN/OUT button at the beginning or ending of the recording. When the ENDING button or the FADE IN/OUT button is pressed at the ending, recording stops automatically after the ending pattern or fade out. N Start recording. ................................................................................................... Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment in the usual way (page 58), and finger chords in a manner appropriate to the current accompaniment mode (pages 60 and 61). Recording Along with the Metronome 1. After selecting the voice, press the [METRONOME] button, and set the Beat parameter in the METRONOME display. ➔The metronome will start sounding. 2. The recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. The metronome sound is not recorded. When a disk is not inserted… • A song can be recorded to internal memory if it is short enough. A maximum of approximately 2500 notes (26 KB) can be recorded; however, the amount may be less if other functions are used. The internally recorded song will be deleted when the power is turned off or when another song is loaded. See “Recording Without a Disk” (page 133) for more information. Adjusting the Volume While Recording You can use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider and the MIXER display to adjust the volume of the Auto Accompaniment part while recording. Adjust the keyboard part volume using the KBD VOL function in the display. If You Turn the Harmony Function or Split Mode On While Recording… • You can record harmony notes or left range keyboard part while recording the 1/RIGHT part. • When the 2/LEFT part is being recorded, the Clavinova will not record the harmony notes for harmony types that are recorded to tracks 6 through 8 (see the sidebar on page 113), or the left range keyboard part. The keyboard guide lamps do not light up during recording. CVP-201 112 114 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song M Stop recording. ................................................................................................ Press the [PLAY/STOP] button. ➔ Recording stops. When the recorded data has been written to disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display appears. If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording your keyboard performance, without the Auto Accompaniment and rhythm. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop recording. If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the [FADE IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the keyboard as well. < Play back the recording. ........................................................................ Recording CAUTION The Clavinova may continue to write data to the disk for a short time after you stop recording. DO NOT eject the disk while the DISK IN USE lamp of the disk drive is lit. • When a song has been recorded, the temporary name SONG *** (*** is the number) will automatically be given to the song. You can change the name as desired. (See page 127.) • The [ACMP ON] lamp automatically goes out when recording of these parts has finished. • When recording is finished, the song volume is automatically reset to the maximum setting, regardless of the current [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider position. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button. ➔ The recorded data will be played back. During playback you can use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] buttons to control the playback, and use the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons to change the tempo. You can also play along on the keyboard. Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is reached, or you can press the [PLAY/STOP] button again to stop it at any time. • When style changes have been recorded in a song, playback may become slightly sluggish at points where the style changes, depending on the styles that were used. • Playback of songs recorded using both the Dual mode (page 33) and the Full Keyboard accompaniment mode (page 57) may also sound somewhat sluggish. Track Recording (Multi-track Recording) Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................ The first three steps in the Track Recording process are exactly the same as those for Quick Recording. (See page 112.) X Select the TRACK RECORD page ................................................ 113 Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the TRACK RECORD page (Record mode display page 2). The 16 tracks appear above the TRACK < and > buttons. Tracks which are enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the track number, and tracks which are record-enabled are indicated by a highlighted number. The numbers of tracks that do not contain data are not displayed. CVP-201 115 Song Recording ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ C Select the desired track for recording. ...................................... Press the TRACK < and > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track. ➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark. Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected tracks to REC (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). When a track is set to REC, the Synchronized Start mode is turned on. The Clavinova will start recording when you begin to play on the keyboard. PLAY can only be selected for tracks which contain data.When a track is muted, the track number is displayed without a surrounding box. Three separate tracks can be set to record simultaneously when recording keyboard parts. If you intend to record using the Dual or Split functions, two tracks must be record-enabled. If you intend to use both the Dual and Split functions simultaneously, three tracks must be selected. If the Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are turned on, the recording track numbers are automatically fixed, as described below. * If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on, tracks 9 through 16 are automatically set to record the Auto Accompaniment data. If the Harmony function is turned on and a harmony type (page 70) other than Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country, Octave, or 1+5 is selected, tracks 6 through 8 are automatically set to record the Harmony data. When the RHYTHM button is pressed, tracks 9 and 10 are automatically selected for the rhythm data. Set tracks 9 and 10 to REC, PLAY, or OFF using the rightmost LCD button. CVP-201 • When the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10) or the Auto Accompaniment tracks (9 through 16) are set to REC, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide. • If the Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are already on when the Track Recording page is selected, the corresponding tracks are automatically record-enabled. 114 116 • Track 10 (and 9, in some cases) can only be used to record the rhythm sound of the accompaniment style and cannot be used to record keyboard part. Also, the keyboard part should be recorded on a track other than those used for Harmony or Auto Accompaniment. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song Recording V Set all performance features as required. .......................... After setting the tracks to be recorded, set up all necessary performance features as required: voice, accompaniment style, tempo, reverb, etc. B Start recording. ................................................................................................ Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment in the usual way (page 58), and finger chords in a manner appropriate to the current accompaniment mode (pages 60 and 61). The current measure number is shown in the display as you record. The parameters listed below will be recorded in addition to notes you play. (Recorded parameters differ depending on the play styles and settings.) If you want to re-record part of the song (for example, if you’ve made a mistake in the recording), you can easily do so with the Punch-in/out Recording function (page 118). Backing Up Your Data Any time you have recorded some amount of data, you should copy the data to another song number for backup purposes (see page 142 for information on the Copy operation). Doing this prevents accidental loss of important data, should you inadvertently delete the data while recording. Parameters Recorded for Each Track Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song • Notes • Voice • Keyboard volume • Pan • Right (damper) pedal • Left pedal (page 138) • Center (sostenuto) pedal • Reverb depth • Chorus depth • Effect depth • Keyboard part volume (main, second, left) • Fade-in/out (converted into volume data) • Scale tuning data (page 155) • Tempo • Reverb type • Overall reverb depth • Chorus type • Effect type* • Accompaniment style • Section (Intro, Main A through D, Fill-In, Ending) * The last recorded track effect takes priority. Other Recorded Parameters 115 Accompaniment style data which is recorded but not listed above includes: • Accompaniment part volume (volume settings included in style data, plus mixer levels set when recording) CVP-201 117 Song Recording ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ N Stop recording. ................................................................................................ Press the [PLAY/STOP] button. ➔ Recording stops. The [REC] lamp goes out when the data has been written to the disk, and the SONG PLAY display appears. When recording is finished, the [ACMP/ SONG VOLUME] level is automatically set to the maximum value, regardless of the current slider position. If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording your keyboard performance without the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop recording. If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the [FADE IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the keyboard as well. Adding New Tracks You can add a new track to your song by selecting a new record track(s) and voice(s) for recording as described above. You can also play back and monitor the previously recorded tracks while you record. By repeating this process, you can assemble a complete song. If you record on a track that has already been recorded, the previous material will be erased and the new material will be recorded in its place. Punch-in/out Recording With the Punch-in/out Recording function, you can selectively rerecord specified sections of the song. Punch-in/out recording allows you to start recording from any “punch-in” point within a previously recorded track and stop recording at any “punch-out” point, leaving intact all recorded material up to the punch-in point and following the punchout point. Punch-in/out recording cannot be performed on tracks which have been used to record the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm parts, or on tracks 6 through 8 when these tracks have been used to record harmony parts (see sidebar on page 113). Z Play back the song. ......................................................................................... Play back the song in order to locate the point where you want to punch in (i.e., start re-recording). SONG CONTROL SONG CVP-201 REC 116 118 PLAY/ STOP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○Song Recording X Pause before the punch-in point. ................................................. Press the [PAUSE] button to pause play back a bit before the point at which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before the punch-in point so you’ll be able to grasp the timing before you punch in. PAUSE REW FF C Turn on the Punch-in/out function. ............................................ Press the [REC] button. SONG CONTROL SONG PLAY/ STOP REC ➔ The PUNCH IN/OUT display appears. V Select a track. .................................................................................................... Press the TRACK < or > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track. ➔ The selected track is indicated by an underline mark. 117 Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected track to REC (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). PLAY can only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted, the track number is displayed without a surrounding box. Auto Setting of Punch-in/out If no other track is selected, the last recorded track is automatically selected for Punch-in/out. If you select a track that was used to record an Auto Accompaniment or rhythm part, or a track (6, 7, or 8) that contains a harmony part (see sidebar on page 113), you will not be able to set the track to REC. CVP-201 119 Song Recording ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ B Select the punch-in mode. ....................................................................... Select the desired punch-in mode with the fourth LCD button. Two modes are available, as described below. 1ST KEY Recording begins as soon as the first key is played, after Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below). PEDAL Recording begins as soon as the left pedal is pressed, after Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below). When the PEDAL punch-in mode is selected, the left pedal is automatically assigned for this function only (the normal pedal function is canceled). N Select the punch-out mode. ................................................................... Select the desired punch-out mode with the center LCD button. Two modes are available, as described below. REPLACE When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out point will be erased. PCH.OUT When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out point will remain intact. M Start playback and recording. ............................................................. Press the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback from the current paused location. To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the 1ST KEY mode is selected, simply begin playing at the point from which you want to record. To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the PEDAL mode is selected, press the left pedal at the point from which you want to record. When the PEDAL Punch-in mode is selected, recording can be started directly by pressing the left pedal, without first pressing the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback. < Stop recording. ................................................................................................ Press the [PLAY/STOP] button. ➔ Recording stops. When the data has been written to disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display reappears. CVP-201 118 120 When the PEDAL mode is selected, recording can also be stopped by pressing the left pedal. Chord Sequence ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Chord Sequence function lets you enter Auto Accompaniment data step-by-step according to chord names. You can use this function to record the accompaniment part without having to play the song in time with the rhythm or at a certain tempo. Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................ Just as you did in steps 1 through 3 of Quick Recording, insert a formatted disk, select a song number, then press the [REC] button to enter the Record mode. You cannot use the Music Database (page 67) or the Registration function (page 89) while recording data with the Chord Sequence function. SONG CONTROL SONG PLAY/ STOP REC ➾ Select the RECORD EDIT display (page 3 of the Record mode display) by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons. X Turn on the Chord Sequence function. ................................. 119 Press the CHORD SEQ. button in the RECORD EDIT display. When Chord Sequence cannot be turned on… The chord sequence function cannot be used when no disk has been inserted in the disk drive. CVP-201 121 Chord Sequence ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ➔ The CHORD SEQUENCE display appears, the Auto Accompaniment is turned on, and the Fingered 1 accompaniment mode is selected. C Move the cursor to the entry point. ............................................... The display shows measures as a horizontal line with 8th-note divisions. To move the triangular cursor along the measure indication to the point at which you want to enter a chord or style change, press one of the CURSOR < or > buttons to highlight the function, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can also move the triangular cursor by pressing the CURSOR < and > buttons. Changing the Auto Accompaniment Mode Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned off while the Chord Sequence function is active. However, you can select an accompaniment mode (other than Full Keyboard) in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display by pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by the [ACMP ON] button. The split point can also be changed in this display. • The Chord Sequence data will automatically replace any previous data in the Auto Accompaniment and rhythm tracks that was recorded in the Quick Record or Track Record modes. • Up to 999 measures can be recorded using the Chord Sequence function. • The chord input resolution will be automatically selected according to the current style. For styles with 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, and 5/4 time signatures, one chord can be entered on every 8th note or 8th-note triplet. For other time signatures, one chord can be entered for each measure. Entering Accompaniment Style and Section Changes One style change or section change (page 123) can be made at the beginning of each measure (The Intro pattern can only be entered at the beginning of a song.). However, Auto Fill data can be entered anywhere you desire. Adjusting the Volume of Auto Accompaniment You can also enter volume changes for the Auto Accompaniment. Used judiciously, these can help you create professional-sounding dynamic changes in the Auto Accompaniment of your song. To do this, first enter the Auto Accompaniment part volume data from the MIXER display; the volume event symbol ( ) will appear in the box at the right side of the display. To actually record the volume data at the current position, press the SET button in the CHORD SEQUENCE display. (An initial volume event is automatically entered at the beginning of a song.) CVP-201 120 122 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Chord Sequence V Enter and set the chords and/or style changes. .......... To enter a chord, either play the chord with appropriate fingering in the left range of the keyboard (lower than the split point), or highlight ROOT or TYPE in the LCD display and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can also select the chord by pressing the ROOT and/or TYPE buttons. The names of chords entered using the keyboard are also displayed by the ROOT and TYPE functions. ➔ The name of the chord is displayed next to the keyboard icon in the box at the right side of the display. ➾ To enter a style change (style, section and tempo) simply make the appropriate selections in the normal way. ➾ Once the chord and/or style has been selected, press the SET button. ➔ A black box appears above the line at the current position in the measure indicator, indicating that the data has been recorded at that position. The cursor automatically moves to the next position. The recorded data is also shown in the display: the time signature, style name, and section appear at the upper left, and the chord name and tempo in the box at the right side of the display. A fade-out cannot be entered during a fadein. Entering Rhythm-only Sections You can also record the rhythm alone (without accompaniment) to your song. To do this, record a blank chord in the desired measure by leaving the TYPE function set to “ ---.” Continue moving the cursor to other positions and enter chords and style changes in this manner. You can always check the entered data during the operation by playing back the sequence using the [PLAY/ STOP] button. The data recorded by the Chord Sequence function is listed below. Entering a Break • A complete break can be created by setting the chord type to “ ---” and setting the rhythm sound to “OFF” (see “RHYTHM ON/OFF” below). • The “break fill” pattern triggered by the left pedal (page 138) cannot be entered using the Chord Sequence function. • The Clavinova will normally play a fill-in pattern as it switches between variations (MAIN A through MAIN D). To have the Clavinova change the style variation at the start of a measure without playing a fill-in pattern, press the button for that variation twice before pressing SET. Data Recorded by the Chord Sequence Function • Accompaniment style • Section (MAIN A/B/C/D, Intro, Ending, Auto-fill, Fade-in/out, Break) • Chord name • Tempo • Auto accompaniment part volume (MIXER settings) • Rhythm on/off 121 • ACMP/SONG volume (as an initial setting only) • The measure number is shown to the left of the measure indicator. • For information on other useful editing features, see “Other Chord Sequence Functions,” below. • The same chord cannot be entered twice in a row. If the chord displayed by the ROOT and TYPE functions is the same as the last chord that was recorded, the Clavinova will not record a chord change when the SET button is pressed. CVP-201 123 Chord Sequence ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ B Stop recording. .................................................................................................... When all recording has been finished, select page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display, then press the END MARK and SET buttons and input an “end mark” which determines the location of the ending. The end mark will be displayed in the box at the right side of the display. Finally, press the [REC] button; the “Save recorded data?” message will appear. Press YES to store the recorded data and automatically leave the Chord Sequence function; the display returns to the SONG PLAY display. To leave without saving the data, press NO. To continue editing the sequence without saving the data, press CANCEL. • The chord sequence data now resides in tracks 9 through 16, and can be played back in the normal way. Add other tracks as desired by using the standard track selection and recording procedure. You can also record over the Auto Accompaniment parts and replace them with original material if you like by using the standard track selection and record procedure. • The song recorded via the Chord Sequence function can be modified later by re-entering the Chord Sequence mode and making the desired changes. However, keep in mind that any data recorded over the Auto Accompaniment parts (with normal track recording) will be replaced by the preset accompaniment style data. (For example, even if you’ve recorded your own bass part, it will be erased and replaced by the original bass pattern if you correct the data in the Chord Sequence display.) Other Chord Sequence Functions Page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display contains a number of versatile functions that help you enter chord sequence data more efficiently. ■ ALL DELETE ................................................................. To delete all sequence data, press the ALL DELETE button. An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation, or NO to cancel. ■ DELETE ......................................................................... To delete the data at the current cursor location, press the DELETE button. An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation, or NO to cancel. CVP-201 122 124 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Chord Sequence ■ END MARK .................................................................... To enter an “end mark” at the current cursor location, press the END MARK button followed by the SET button. An end mark signifies the end of the song, and should always be entered to properly end each song. (An end mark is unnecessary when ending with an Ending pattern or Fadeout.) The cursor cannot be moved past an end mark. You can delete an end mark by using the DELETE button, just as with other normal data. End Mark Unless an end mark is entered, the song will end one measure after the last entered data. If an Ending pattern or Fade-out is input, the song will end at the last measure of the Ending or Fade-out. ■ RHYTHM ON/OFF.......................................................... 123 To turn the rhythm sound on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF button followed by the SET button. No rhythm sound is produced following the location to which a “rhythm off” event is entered; the rhythm starts sounding again from the location to which a “rhythm on” event is entered. The rhythm on/off status is displayed in the box at the right side of the display. CVP-201 125 Other Record Edit Functions ○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Record mode has a number of other convenient editing functions that provide even greater control over the song data. The Record Edit functions include: Setup Memory, which lets you save the Clavinova’s current panel settings as part of the currently selected song; Song Name, which lets you name a recorded song file; Track Edit, which gives you a variety of trackrelated editing controls, such as Track Mix and Track Delete; and Initial Edit, which lets you change the data at the beginning of a song, such as voice, reverb, and effect settings. You can select the Record Edit functions from the RECORD EDIT display (Record mode display page 3) after selecting the song you wish to edit. Setup Memory The Setup Memory function lets you save the current panel settings to disk so that they will automatically be restored whenever you play back the song being edited. Z Set up the Clavinova to play the song. ...................................... Change the Clavinova’s functions to the settings you want it to use when playing back the song you’re editing. X Select the Setup Memory function. ................................................ Use the PAGE [>] button to select the RECORD EDIT display (page 3 of the Song Record mode display) if necessary, then press the SETUP MEMORY button. • For details regarding which settings are saved by the Setup Memory function, see the Parameter Chart on page 11 of the Reference Booklet. • The settings saved by the Setup Memory function will be deleted if you re-record the song data or use Initial Edit function (page 130) to edit the initial parameter settings. ➔ The “Save panel settings to disk?” message is displayed. CVP-201 124 126 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Other Record Edit Functions ➾ Press YES to save the current panel setup, or CANCEL to return to the RECORD EDIT display. ➔ The Clavinova displays the “Don’t remove the disk!” message and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then displays a “Completed!” message before it returns to the RECORD EDIT page. Song Name This function is used to name song files recorded with the Clavinova or to change existing names. To call up the Song Name function, press the SONG NAME button in the RECORD EDIT display. The Song Name function cannot be used when a disk has not been inserted in the disk drive. Z Enter the desired name. ......................................................................... Use the > button to move the underline cursor to the desired character position in the file name display. (File names can be up to 12 characters in length). ➾ Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select and highlight the character or mark you wish to enter. Press the CH.SET button to enter the selected character to the current cursor position and move to the next position. Continue entering other characters or marks in this way. To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the cursor moves back to the deleted position. To abort the Song Name operation and return to the RECORD EDIT display, press the CANCEL button. X Register the name. ....................................................................................... 125 When the song file name is complete, press the OK button to register it. The new name is registered as the current song file name. To cancel the operation, press the CANCEL button. CVP-201 127 Other Record Edit Functions ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Track Edit Press the TRACK EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT display to call up the TRACK EDIT display. There are three pages in the TRACK EDIT display: TRACK EDIT [MIX], TRACK EDIT [DELETE], and TRACK EDIT [QUANTIZE]. ■ Track Mix (TRACK EDIT page 1) The Track Mix function combines the data from two specified tracks and copies the result to a third specified track. Track Copy Only tracks containing data can be selected by the TRK A and TRK B functions. In addition, “---” (no track) can also be selected for TRK B. In this case, the data in track A will simply be copied to track C. For the Track Mix function, the selected track voice and volume data, etc. (i.e., all data except note data) in track A will be effective for the destination track after the mix operation. Z Specify the two tracks to be mixed. .............................................. Press the TRK A and TRK B buttons to highlight the corresponding functions, and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the numbers of the two tracks to be mixed. The voices which are used for the selected tracks are indicated above these functions in the LCD display. X Specify the destination track. .............................................................. Use the TRK C function to specify the track to which you want to record the mixed data. You can also specify the track for the mixed data by pressing the TRK C button to highlight the corresponding function, then using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. Any previous data in the destination track will be erased. C Execute the Track Mix operation. ..................................................... Press the MIX button to begin execution of the Track Mix operation. An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the Track Mix operation or press NO to cancel. When the operation is completed, the MIX function will be replaced by the UNDO function, allowing you to undo the Track Mix operation and restore the previous data. Press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out) to exit the Track Mix function. You can also exit the Track Mix function by pressing the [EXIT] button. CVP-201 • A bar graph indicating the progress of the Track Mix operation will appear while the data is being processed. • You can check whether the results are what you expected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/ STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.) • The Undo function cannot be used once you’ve selected another track or exited from this mode. • The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 133). 126 128 • The original data will remain in tracks A and B after the Track Mix function is executed. If the old data is not needed, you should delete it. (See “Track Delete,” below.) ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Other Record Edit Functions ■ Track Delete (TRACK EDIT page 2) The Track Delete function can be used to delete the data from any specified track. Z Specify the track to be deleted. ................................ Press the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the function, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be deleted. Only tracks containing data can be selected. X Execute the Delete operation. .......................................................... Press the DELETE button. When the “Are You Sure?” message is displayed, press YES to execute the Delete operation or NO to cancel. The DELETE function will be replaced by the UNDO function after the Delete operation is executed. If the result is not what you expected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the deleted track. To exit the Track Delete function, press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out). You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Delete function. • A bar graph indicating the progress of the Track Delete operation will appear while the data is being processed. • You can check whether the results are what you expected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.) • The Undo function cannot be used once you’ve selected another track or exited from this mode. • The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 133). ■ Track Quantize (TRACK EDIT page 3) 127 You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by aligning all notes to specified beats with the Track Quantize function. For example, you can accurately align the recorded notes to 8th- or 16th-note resolution. CVP-201 129 Other Record Edit Functions ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Z Specify the track to be quantized. ............................................... Use the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the function, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be quantized. Only tracks containing data can be selected. X Specify the quantize “size.” ................................................................ Press the LCD button below the note symbol to select the desired quantize “size” as shown below. 32nd notes 3 16th note triplets 16th notes 3 8th note triplets 8th notes 3 quarter-note triplets quarter notes C Execute the Quantize operation. ...................................................... Press the QUANTIZE button. When the “Are you sure?” message is displayed, press the YES button to execute the Quantize operation or NO button to cancel. The QUANTIZE function will be replaced by the UNDO function after the Quantize operation is executed. If the result is not what you expected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the quantized track to what it was before performing the Quantize operation. To exit the Track Quantize function, press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out). You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Quantize function. • Only the note data and voice data are quantized. • A bar graph indicating the progress of the Quantize operation will appear while the data is being processed. • You can check whether the results are what you expected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/ STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.) • The Undo function cannot be used once you’ve selected another track or quantize size, or exited from this mode. • The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 133). Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data) The Initial Edit function allows you to change the volume level of each track or the initial data set for the entire song after you’ve finished recording. The INITIAL EDIT display appears when you press the INITIAL EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT display. All sixteen tracks are displayed simultaneously in this display and the settings such as volume, voices and reverb depth can be changed. CVP-201 128 130 • Any voice changes entered in the middle of the original song will be erased when the voice parameter is changed in the Initial Edit mode. • When editing some types of data, it will not be possible to change certain parameters (indicated as “Fixed”) or change the voices for tracks other than tracks 1 and 2. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Other Record Edit Functions The following parameters can be changed in the INITIAL EDIT display. Refer to the indicated page for details on each parameter. Parameters which can be changed with Initial Edit: ● When track 1 — 16 is selected: ● When TOTAL is selected: • VOLUME (See page 32.) • TEMPO (See page 25.) • VOICE (See page 29.) • Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 42.) • PAN (See page 32.) • REVERB TYPE (See page 42.) • REVERB DEPTH (See page 43.) • CHORUS TYPE (See page 44.) • CHORUS DEPTH (See page 45.) • EFFECT TYPE (See page 47.) • EFFECT DEPTH (See page 48.) • The Program Change Number (PRG#), Bank LSB (BKL), and Bank MSB (BKM) parameters, which are used to select voices via MIDI, are displayed when VOICE is selected. Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display Z Select the track to be edited. ............................................................ Select the track whose parameters you wish to change by pressing the TRACK < or > button. If TOTAL is selected, any changes will affect the entire song rather than an individual track. X Select the parameters to be changed. .................................... Select the parameters to be changed by pressing the SELECT ▼ or ▲ button. The parameter to be changed. The current parameter value for the selected track. The selected track is highlighted. C Change the settings. .................................................................................. 129 Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the settings. You can instantly check the effect of the changes, since the settings can be changed during playback. • If TOTAL is selected and the value of the reverb depth is changed, the new setting will also affect the keyboard sound. • The voices of the tracks to which Auto Accompaniment, rhythm and/or Harmony data have been recorded, can also be changed. • The data may not be played back accurately if you use the [REW] button while editing the data. CVP-201 131 Other Record Edit Functions ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ V Write the changes. ....................................................................................... When all the Initial Data changes have been made as desired, press the WRITE button. When the “Are you sure?” message is displayed, press the YES button to actually make the specified changes, or NO to cancel. When this is completed, the WRITE button will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the Write operation and restore the data of the edited track to what it was before you made any edits. • All edited data for any number of tracks within a single song can be written in a one-time Write operation, by pressing the WRITE button. • You can check whether the results of the Initial Edit operation are what you expected by starting and stopping playback with the [PLAY/STOP] button. (You should try this before you do something that would make it impossible to select the UNDO function.) • The Undo function cannot be used once you’ve changed the setting again, changed a different setting, or exited from the Initial Edit mode. • The Undo feature cannot be used for data recorded to internal memory (see page 133). B Exit the Initial Edit function. .................................................................. To do this, press the [REC] button. ➔ The [REC] lamp goes out and the Initial Edit operation is completed. You can also exit the Initial Edit function by pressing the [EXIT] button. If you do this after making any edits that you have not yet written to disk, a “Write edited data?” message will be displayed. Press YES to write the edited data and exit from the Initial Edit mode, NO to exit without writing the data, or CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit mode and continue editing. CVP-201 130 132 Recording Without a Disk ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova has about 26 KB of internal memory that you can use to record a limited amount of song data — approximately 2,500 notes, if no other data is recorded — without using a floppy disk. About the CVP MEMORY Song If you enter the Song Record mode without inserting a disk, the words CVP MEMORY will appear in the SONG display as shown below, and the Quick Recording, Track Recording and Punch-in/out Recording functions will become available. • Chord Sequence data (page 121) cannot be recorded to internal memory. • The Song Name (page 127) and Setup Memory (page 126) functions cannot be used when editing a song recorded to the internal memory. • You can use the Track Edit (page 128) and Initial Edit (page 130) functions to edit a song in the internal memory. When you enter the Song Play mode after recording a song in the memory, the SONG function displays the letters CVP in place of a song number. You can play this song back as you would any other song that was recorded to disk (see page 93). SONG PLAY [MAIN] display when playing back the CVP MEMORY song. 131 If you insert a song disk and select a song number when the internal memory contains song data, a “Delete CVP MEMORY?” message will be displayed. Press YES to delete the song data from the internal memory. The song data will also be erased from the internal memory by turning the power off. If you wish to keep the recorded data, use the Song Copy function (page 142) to copy the recorded data to disk. Song data recorded to internal memory will be deleted when you load a style file. In this case, no message is displayed. CVP-201 133 CHAPTER 8: The Utility Functions The Function mode provides various advanced functions that, for example, let you make various MIDI settings, or give you greater, more convenient control over disk-related operations. These sophisticated functions let you customize the Clavinova to your own musical needs and preferences. FUNCTION VOLUME MASTER VOLUME CONTRAST STYLE ACMP/SONG VOLUME MAX MAX MIN MIN DEMO 8BEAT BALLAD DANCE HELP SWING/ JAZZ LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM INTRO MAIN A AUTO FILL MAIN B MAIN C 16BEAT ROCK/ R&B PIANIST MUSIC DATABASE DISK HARMONY SONG CONTROL TEMPO VOICE PLAY/ STOP SONG REC PIANO E. PIANO GUITAR FF BRASS SAX / FLUTE BASS SOUND REPEAT 1 2 SYNTHESIZER ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR DUAL REVERB SPLIT EFFECT BEAT TRAD/ WALZ METRONOME RESET FUNCTION MIXER PAUSE REW PERCUSSION ENSEMBLE XG CUSTOM AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ACMP ON MAIN D ENDING FADE IN/OUT START/STOP TAP SYNCHRO GUIDE CONTROL START/STOP PAGE DIRECT ACCESS EXIT EASY PLAY NEXT NOTE REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 4 BANK BANK REGISTRATION ONE TOUCH SETTING ANCEL The following functions are available: Group Display 1 KEYBOARD 2 PEDAL DISK 3 UTILITY Tune 136 Transpose 136 Key Touch & Fixed Velocity 137 Voice Setting 137 Left Pedal & Glide Range 138 4 Registration & Setup Files 139 Song Copy & Disk Copy 142 6 Song Delete 144 7 Song Data Transform 145 8 Disk Format 146 Send Channel (Keyboard) 147 Local Control 147 Synchronization 148 10 MIDI Filter 148 11 Receive Filter 149 MIDI Transpose 150 Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) 150 Song Transmission 151 Remote Keyboard 151 13 Backup 152 14 Recall 153 15 Micro Tuning 154 16 Scale Tuning 155 12 BACKUP Page 5 9 MIDI Function Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the display during operation. Refer to the “Messages” section (page 165) for information on the messages. CVP-201 132 134 ■ Using the Utility Functions ....................................................................... As the table on the preceding page shows, the utility functions are divided among 16 display pages. Use the following procedure to display the page containing a desired function. Z Press the [FUNCTION] button. FUNCTION MIXER ➔ The lamp lights and the most recently used page of the Function mode display appears. X Display the desired page. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display the page that contains the function you want to set. PAGE C Perform the desired operation. Refer to Chapter 2 “Basic Operation” for instructions regarding the selection and use of the various types of functions. V Press the [FUNCTION] button when finished. 133 ➔ The [FUNCTION] lamp goes out. You can also exit the Function mode by pressing the [EXIT] button. CVP-201 135 Keyboard ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1 ■ Tune .................................................................................................................................... The Tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch, allowing you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. The frequency (in Hz) of A3 is displayed by the TUNE function. The tuning can be adjusted up or down a maximum of approximately 26 Hz (slightly over 100 cents) in 0.2-Hz steps. TUNE • Range: 414.8 Hz — 466.6 Hz (–102.1 — +101.62 cents) • Basic setting: 440 Hz Hz and Cents • Pitch is measured in units of Hertz (abbreviated Hz), which represents the number of times the sound wave vibrates in a second. • A cent is a unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone). • Tune has no effect on the Drum Kit voices. • The XG Master Tune setting is effective when playing back songs containing XG Master Tune data. ■ Transpose .................................................................................................................... TRANSPOSE functions • Range: –24 — +24 semitones (–2 — +2 octaves) • Basic setting: 0 The Transpose functions make it possible to shift the pitch of the keyboard or song data in semitone units, allowing you to match the pitch of the Clavinova to the range of other instruments or singers. The Clavinova has two transpose functions: ALL and SONG. The former transposes all notes played by the Clavinova, whereas the latter transposes song data only. When you change the setting of the ALL function, the SONG setting is also adjusted by the same amount. CVP-201 134 136 • The Transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit voices. • When playing back songs containing XG Transpose data, the XG Transpose data is effective only for the data playback sound. The value set on the panel affects the keyboard sound. • The values set here affect playback data transmitted via MIDI. • When a Transpose function is set to a high value, notes played in the corresponding range at the upper end of the keyboard (e.g., C5 through C7 for a value of +24) may not sound as expected. The same is true of notes at the lower end of the keyboard when a low Transpose value is set. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Keyboard FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2 ■ Key Touch & Fixed Velocity ...................................................................... The Key Touch function determines how velocity affects the volume of the voices played by the Clavinova’s keyboard. Select from four Key Touch settings to tailor the keyboard response to the selected voice, type of song, or your personal playing style. Press the KEY TOUCH button to change the setting. The data dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used. Velocity • The amount of force applied to a key is frequently referred to in this manual as velocity. This is because the Clavinova determines the amount of force that was applied to a key by measuring the speed with which the key was depressed. • This function does not affect the actual weight of the keys. Key Touch Settings NORMAL This is the standard keyboard response and is used as the basic setting. SOFT This setting lets you produce a relatively loud sound even when playing the keys softly. FIXED This setting produces a uniform degree of loudness, no matter how forcefully or softly you play the keys. Use the FIXED VELOCITY function to set the loudness of notes produced by the keyboard. HARD This setting requires you to play the keys quite strongly to produce maximum loudness KEY TOUCH • Settings: See table at left. • Basic setting: NORMAL FIXED VELOCITY • Range: 1 — 127 • Basic setting: 76 ■ Voice Setting ............................................................................................................. 135 This function determines whether the basic reverb, chorus, effect, and other settings for each voice are automatically selected when a voice is selected. Press the VOICE SETTING button to change the setting. When it is set to AUTO, the basic settings for each voice are automatically selected when the voice is selected; when it is set to MANUAL, the settings do not change when voices are selected. VOICE SETTING • Settings: AUTO, MANUAL • Basic Setting: AUTO The following settings are automatically selected when VOICE SETTING is set to AUTO: Function Page Reverb ON/OFF 41 Reverb depth settings 42 Chorus depth settings 45 Effect ON/OFF 46 EFFECT TYPE 47 Effect DEPTH 48 Effect VARIATION 47 HARMONY TYPE 70 Harmony SPEED 71 Harmony VOLUME 71 OCTAVE settings 32, 34, 38 CVP-201 137 Pedal ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3 ■ Left Pedal & Glide Range ........................................................................... This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal to control one of various functions. LEFT PEDAL • Settings: See table at left. • Basic setting: SOFT LEFT PEDAL Settings Setting SOFT The left pedal functions as the soft pedal (basic setting). (See page 40.) START/STOP The left pedal functions as the [START/STOP] button. (See page 52.) HARMONY When the Harmony function is set to on, Harmony is applied only while the left pedal is held down. (See page 69.) REGISTRATION The panel settings registered to the next Registration number are recalled each time the left pedal is pressed. (See page 91.) REG.FREEZE The left pedal switches the Registration Freeze function on and off; that is, it performs the same function as the FREEZE button in the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display (page 91). ENDING/RIT The left pedal functions as the [ENDING] button. You can have the song end ritardando (slow down gradually) by pressing the left pedal twice in succession. (See page 56.) BREAK Pressing the left pedal during style playback produces a break in the accompaniment and rhythm for as long as the pedal is held. When the pedal is released, normal playback resumes from the next measure. If you press the left pedal a second time within one measure, normal playback resumes immediately. BREAK FIL Pressing the left pedal during style playback causes the Clavinova to play a special “break fill-in” pattern. This pattern is different from the fill-in patterns produced by the Auto Fill function. (See page 51.) BASS HOLD FADE IN/OUT The left pedal performs the function same as the [FADE IN/ OUT] button. (See pages 55 and 56.) This function switches the effect variation on or off; that is, it performs the same effect as the VARIATION button in the EFFECT display (page 47). GLIDE UP S Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to rise an amount specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the selected setting). GLIDE UP F GLIDE DOWN S GLIDE DOWN M GLIDE DOWN F GLIDE RANGE • Settings: 1 — 12 (semitones) • Basic setting: 1 Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to drop an amount specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the selected setting). 136 CVP-201 If the left pedal is set to REGISTRATION, the setting of the left pedal function in Registration memory is not recalled. While the left pedal is pressed, the bass note played by the Auto Accompaniment will be held even if the chord is changed. This function does not work when FULL KEYBOARD is selected as the accompaniment mode (page 61). EFFECT VARI GLIDE UP M 138 Description Disk ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4 ■ Registration & Setup Files ........................................................................ You can use the functions on this page to load, save, delete, and rename data files containing registration data (page 89) or panel setup data. Before executing one of these functions, make sure that the disk you want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive. Z Select the file type. Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file type to be loaded, saved, deleted or named. REGISTRATION A Registration file may contain the data for just one registration, or a full set of twenty. Refer to page 11 in the Reference Booklet for a list of settings registered by the Registration function. ALL SETUP An All Setup file contains all panel setting data in the list on page 11 in the Reference Booklet. ➾ If you select REGISTRATION as the file type, you can also use the REGIST function to specify whether the operation will affect one memory location or a full set of twenty. When saving registration data, the REGIST setting specifies which memory location(s) will be saved to disk. When loading data, the REGIST setting specifies how the registration data will be loaded, as shown below: You can delete or rename any registration file on the disk, regardless of the REGIST setting. REGIST setting: 137 File contains: ALL A1 — E4 Only registration saved from specified location is reloaded (to original location). All registrations All registrations are loaded. One registration Selected registration file is Selected registration file is loaded into original location. loaded into specified location. CVP-201 139 Disk ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ X Select the file operation. Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME. File operations cannot be performed while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the Song mode before attempting to perform a file function. C Press the START button. ➔ The file operation begins. The subsequent steps for each file operation depend on the operation you’ve selected. Refer to the corresponding instructions for each operation below. ■ LOAD ......................................................................................................................................... When you select LOAD, the Load function display will appear. The original internal data will be replaced when you execute the Load operation. Be sure to save all important data to disk (see below) before using the Load operation. First, select the desired file to be loaded. Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button. ➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to load the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Load operation. ■ SAVE .......................................................................................................................................... When you select SAVE, the name entry function display for the file to be saved will appear. Press the > button to move the underline cursor, and select the character position of the file name. (File names can contain up to twelve characters.) ➾ Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to highlight the characters to be input. CVP-201 138 140 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Disk Press the CH.SET button to input the selected characters at the current underline position of the file name. Continue moving the cursor to other characters or marks and entering them in this way. To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the cursor moves back to the deleted position. To abort the name entry operation and return to the FUNCTION [DISK 1] display, press the CANCEL button. When the file name has been completely entered, press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation. If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a “Same name! Overwrite?” message will appear. Press the OK button to overwrite the original file with the new file, or CANCEL to cancel the Save operation. ■ DELETE ................................................................................................................................ When you select DELETE, the Delete function display will appear. First, select the desired file to be deleted. Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button. ➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to delete the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Delete operation. ■ NAME ...................................................................................................................................... When you select NAME, the Name function display will appear. First, select the desired file to be named. Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button. ➾ The name entry display will appear. Enter a new file name in the same way as described above for the Save function. 139 ➾ Pressing the OK button changes the current name to the newly entered name. Press the CANCEL button to abort. If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a “Same name! Overwrite?” message will appear. In this case, press the OK button to overwrite the original file with the renamed file, or CANCEL to abort the Name operation. CVP-201 141 Disk ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5 ■ Song Copy & Disk Copy .............................................................................. The functions on this page allow you to copy song data recorded by the Clavinova to a different song number on the same disk, or to a different disk. You can also use the Disk Copy function to copy an entire disk. The Song Copy and Disk Copy functions cannot be executed while the [RECORD] lamp is lit. Exit the Song Record mode before attempting to copy a song or disk. Z Select a copy function. First insert the disk containing the source song, or the disk to be copied. ➾ Press either of the leftmost two LCD buttons to select the copy type. Three copy types are available. DISK1 – 1 This function allows you to copy a song to a different song number on the same disk. DISK1 – 2 This function allows you to copy a song to a different disk. DISK COPY This function copies all the data from one disk to another disk. (All data on the destination disk is erased by this process.) X Select the source song. • You will not be able to select DISK1 – 1 as the copy function if the disk you inserted is write protected (page 9). • If the Clavinova’s memory contains song data recorded without a disk (page 133), CVP – DISK will automatically be selected as the copy function. If you want to keep the CVP MEMORY song data, you can use this function to copy it to a disk. (Insert the disk, specify a destination song number as described in step 3, then execute the copy function as usual.) You can then use the Song Delete function (page 144) to delete the CVP MEMORY song. Once the song has been deleted, you will be able to use the other copy functions. If you selected DISK1 — 1 or DISK1 — 2 in step 1, press the SONG ➔ button, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a song number from 1 to 99. ➔ The number and name of the selected song are displayed above the third and fourth LCD buttons. CVP-201 140 142 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Disk C Select the destination song number. If you selected DISK1 — 1 as in step 1, press the SONG button, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a destination song number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be selected.) ➔ If the destination song number already contains data, the name of the song file will appear in the middle section of the display. In this case, the original data of the destination song number will be replaced by the source song data when you execute the copy operation. V Execute the copy operation. Press the COPY button. ➔ The copy operation begins. If you are copying to the same disk, an “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to continue or the NO button to cancel. The copy operation cannot be executed if the same song number is selected as both the source song and the destination song for the DISK1 – 1 function. In this case, a “Select a different number!” message will appear. If you are copying the data to a different disk (or copying an entire ** disk), a “Number of disk exchanges (** **)” message appears to indicate the number of times the disk will have to be changed. Press the OK button to continue, or the CANCEL button to abort the operation. When copying data between disks, follow the instructions in the display, inserting the source and destination disks as required. If you are using the DISK1 – 2 function to copy a song to another disk,the“Selectdestinationsongnumber”messagewillappearthe first time you insert the destination disk. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a destination song number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be selected.) 141 ➾ If the destination song number already contains data, the song name will appear in the display. In this case, the original data of the destination song number will be replaced by the source song data. Press the OK button to continue, or CANCEL to abort. Copying Commercial Software • Copying of commercially available software is strictly prohibited, except for your personal use. • Some commercially available software is purposely copy-protected, and cannot be copied using these functions. Data files (other than those made with the CVP-109/107/105/700/103/201) that have been copied once cannot be copied a second time to another disk. Also, additional data can be recorded only to the right-hand/left-hand parts of the copied DOC files. CVP-201 143 Disk ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6 ■ Song Delete ............................................................................................................... You can delete unneeded song data from the disk in this display. Be careful not to delete any important data on the disk; once the delete operation is performed, it cannot be undone. The Song Delete function cannot be executed while the [RECORD] lamp is lit. Exit the Song Record mode before attempting to delete a song. Z Insert the disk. Insert the disk containing the song data to be deleted into the disk drive. X Select the song to be deleted. Use the SONG ▼ and ▲ buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the song to be deleted. The song data in the Clavinova’s memory can be also deleted with this operation. To do this, select CVP MEMORY instead of a song number (CVP MEMORY appears only when the memory contains song data). C Execute the delete operation. Press the DELETE button. ➔ An “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press the YES button to delete the selected song, or press the NO button to cancel the operation. CVP-201 142 144 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Disk FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7 ■ Song Data Transform ....................................................................................... This function allows you to convert song data recorded on the CVP201 for playback on other Clavinova models or a Disklavier. The Song Data Transform function cannot be used while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the Song mode before attempting to transform song data. Z Insert the disk. Insert a 2DD disk containing the data to be converted in the disk drive. X Select a data format. Use either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the target format of the file (the type of instrument that will use the converted data). The following three types are available: CVP PERFORMANCE This function converts data for playback on the CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/87A/89, the DOM30, and the DOU-10. PIANO FORMAT 1 This function converts data for playback on all Disklavier models except the MX100A and the MX100B. PIANO FORMAT 2 This type converts the data for playback on the Disklavier MX100A or MX100B. 2DD Disks Only! Only data saved on 2DD disks can be converted. To transform song data that has been saved on a 2HD disk or recorded in the Clavinova’s memory, use the Song Copy function (page 142) to copy the song to a 2DD disk before you attempt to convert it. Data Format Compatibility CVP-series Clavinovas other than the models listed in the table at left can play back song data recorded on the CVP-201 without conversion. If you are planning to use your song data on other instruments and want to ensure that they will closely reproduce the sound you achieved on the CVP-201, however, we recommend using XG voices (see page 30) for all tracks other than those that play piano voices. C Select the song to be converted. Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the song number of the song to be converted. ➔ The number and name of the selected song are displayed above the SONG function. V Press the TRANSFORM button. ➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to convert the selected song, or NO to cancel the operation. When the conversion process is finished, a “Completed! SONG No.**” message indicates the song number to which the data was saved. 143 If CVP PERFORMANCE was selected in Step 2, the characters “C)” are appended to the beginning of the original name. If one of the other formats was selected, the characters “P)” are appended. • The converted data is saved to a song number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 are not used.) • The original data remains intact at the original song number even after the conversion has been executed. • Recording or editing cannot be performed on the converted songs. CVP-201 145 Disk ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8 ■ Disk Format .............................................................................................................. Floppy disks must be correctly formatted before the Clavinova can use them for data storage. If you insert a new, unformatted disk (or a disk that has already been initialized in a different format) in the disk drive, the Clavinova will automatically ask you whether it should format the disk. (See page 111 for details.) The Clavinova also has a Disk Format function that can be used to reformat disks that have already been formatted for use by the Clavinova. The reformatting operation deletes any data that may have been saved on the disk. The Disk Format function cannot be used while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the Song mode before attempting to format a disk. Z Insert the disk to be formatted. CAUTION Formatting a disk erases all the data on the disk. Before you format a disk, make sure it doesn’t contain any data that you want to keep. Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position, and insert the disk into the disk drive face up with the shutter forward until it clicks into place. X Execute the format operation. Press the START button. Format Types 2DD disks are formatted to hold 720 KB of data; 2HD disks are formatted to hold 1.44 MB of data. ➔ An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the format, or NO to cancel. A bar graph indicates the progress of the formatting process. Once the disk has been formatted, the Clavinova can use it to store songs and other data. CVP-201 144 146 MIDI ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9 ■ Send Channel (Keyboard) ......................................................................... In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels (1 through 16) of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. The SEND CH function lets you set the MIDI transmit channels for the keyboard parts. Part Explanation Basic Setting LEFT Left voice in Split mode (see page 36) 3 RIGHT1 Main voice 1 RIGHT2 Second voice in Dual mode (see page 33) 2 SEND CH • Settings: OFF, 1 — 16 • Basic setting: See table at left. You can set each keyboard part to transmit on a separate channel. If you set a part to OFF, the MIDI data for that part will not be transmitted. ● MIDI Reception The Clavinova always receives MIDI data in the “Multi Timbre” mode. This is a mode in which the Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1 through 16) by an external MIDI device. This means that you can produce the sound of a full band or ensemble on the Clavinova by using a computer or MIDI sequencer. ■ Local Control .......................................................................................................... 145 The term “local control” refers to the control of the internal tone generator by the keyboard. You will normally play the Clavinova with the Local Control function set to ON. Turning off the local control separates the keyboard from the tone generator, so that the Clavinova will not output any sound when you play the keyboard. Since keyboard performance data is still output via the MIDI jacks, however, you can use this setting when you want to play an external MIDI tone generator from the Clavinova’s keyboard without sounding the internal voices. To turn the local control on or off, press the LOCAL button. The data dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used. LOCAL • Settings: ON, OFF • Basic setting: ON CVP-201 147 MIDI ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ■ Synchronization .................................................................................................... The playback tempo of a song or style is normally controlled by the Clavinova’s internal clock. When you want the Clavinova’s playback tempo to be controlled by an external sequencer or rhythm machine, you should set the synchronization function to use an external clock. You might use this function, for example, to play the Auto Accompaniment of the Clavinova in perfect synchronization with an external sequencer. To switch the synchronization from an internal clock to an external clock (or vice versa), press the SYNC. button. The data dial and the [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used. SYNC. • Settings: INT. (internal clock), EXT. (external clock) • Basic setting: INT. FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10 ■ MIDI Filter ................................................................................................................. The FUNCTION [MIDI 2] display contains MIDI filter settings that can be used to enable or prevent the transmission and reception of certain types of MIDI data. ● Program Change Messages Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or another MIDI device. For example, the Clavinova can change voices in response to MIDI program change messages received from a connected MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) The voices of connected external MIDI devices can also be changed by program change messages transmitted from the Clavinova. (Program change messages are transmitted when changing voices on the panel of the Clavinova.) Depending on your particular MIDI setup, you may find that this feature is convenient in some cases and not in others. Set the PROGRAM function to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of program change messages. CVP-201 Bank MSB and LSB messages can be transmitted and received even when PROGRAM is set to OFF. 146 148 PROGRAM • Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received), OFF • Basic setting: Tx&Rx ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ MIDI ● Control Change Messages Control change messages are used for various non-keyboard performance controls, such as the damper pedal, or for expressive control of the sound of a connected MIDI device, such as effects and volume. For example, the Clavinova can respond to control change messages transmitted from an external MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) Similarly, an external MIDI device can be controlled by sending control change messages from the Clavinova to that device. (Control change messages are transmitted when operating the damper pedal, etc., on the Clavinova.) Set CONTROL to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of control change messages. The control change data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in detail on page 14 in the Reference Booklet. CONTROL • Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received), OFF • Basic setting: Tx&Rx ● System Exclusive Messages System exclusive messages are used for more advanced or detailed MIDI control, or for controls related to specific manufacturer’s devices. Set SYS EX. to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of system exclusive messages. The system exclusive data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in detail on page 16 in the Reference Booklet. SYS EX. • Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received), OFF • Basic setting: Tx&Rx ● Start/Stop Commands A device that transmits the Start/Stop command can start and stop the rhythm or sequence data performance of a receiving device via MIDI. For example, you can transmit the Start/Stop command from an external MIDI sequencer to start and stop the Auto Accompaniment or song playback on the Clavinova. Also, an external MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine can be started and stopped by starting and stopping the Auto Accompaniment on the Clavinova. Set START/STOP to ON to enable the transmission and reception of Start/Stop commands. START/STOP • Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received), OFF • Basic setting: OFF FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11 ■ Receive Filter ........................................................................................................... 147 The Receive Filter function lets you prevent the Clavinova from receiving channel-specific MIDI messages — such as note data and control changes — on certain MIDI channels. This function is useful, for example, when you want to control some of the Clavinova’s voices exclusively from an external sequencer, and others using only the Clavinova’s keyboard or its built-in Auto Accompaniment and Song mode functions. (You can also have the Clavinova ignore channels carrying messages that are intended for another instrument connected to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal.) By default, the Clavinova will receive messages on all 16 channels. Use the following procedure to enable or disable the reception of a channel: RECEIVE FILTER • Settings: ON, OFF (x 16) • Basic setting: ON (x 16) CVP-201 149 MIDI ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Z Select the channel. Use the CHANNEL < and > LCD buttons to select the number of the channel you want to enable or disable. ➔ An underline cursor is displayed below the selected channel number. X Press the rightmost LCD button. ➔ When the selected channel is enabled, ON is highlighted and the channel number is enclosed in a solid box. When it is disabled, OFF is highlighted, and the channel number is displayed without a surrounding box. FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12 ■ MIDI Transpose ...................................................................................................... The MIDI Transpose function determines whether the Transpose setting in the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] display (page 136) will affect the MIDI data received by the Clavinova. The Clavinova will normally transpose the data it receives. Press the MIDI TRANSPOSE button to switch this function on or off. MIDI TRANSPOSE • Settings: ON (enabled), OFF (disabled) • Basic setting: ON ■ Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) ............................ When the ACMP&RHY function is set to 9—16ch, the performance data for the rhythm and accompaniment parts is transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal over MIDI channels 9 through 16. If the HARMONY function is set to 6–8ch, the notes added by the harmony types listed below are transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal over MIDI channels 6 through 8. CVP-201 148 150 SEND CH (ACMP&RHY) • Settings: OFF (not transmitted), 9–16ch (transmitted) • Basic setting: OFF SEND CH (HARMONY) • Settings: OFF (not transmitted), 6–8ch (transmitted) • Basic setting: OFF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ MIDI Harmony types transmitted on channels 6 through 8: • Echo • Add Jazz Gtr • Tremolo • Add Brass • Trill • Add Strings • Strumming • In The Forest * See page 69 for details on the Harmony function. Notes added by other harmony types are always transmitted on the RIGHT1 channel (page 147), regardless of this setting. The rhythm, accompaniment, and harmony parts can be recorded by a computer or external sequencer when these functions are turned on. • When transmitting rhythm, accompaniment, or harmony part data via MIDI, do not select the MIDI channels used by these parts as the send channels (page 147) used to transmit the data for your keyboard performance. Doing so may result in your keyboard performance data being mixed with the Auto Accompaniment or Harmony data. • If ACMP&RHY or HARMONY is turned on, the data for the corresponding part(s) will be transmitted via MIDI, even if the RIGHT1 send channel (page 147) has been turned off. ■ Song Transmission ............................................................................................ When the SONG function is set to ON, the Clavinova will transmit song data via the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Select this setting when you want an external tone generator to sound in response to song data played back by the Clavinova. The transmission of song data is turned off by default. SONG • Settings: OFF (not transmitted), ON (transmitted) • Basic setting: OFF ■ Remote Keyboard ............................................................................................... MIDI data received over the channel set with the REMOTE KBD function will affect your keyboard performance. The received data also can be recorded. Select OFF to prevent external MIDI data from affecting your keyboard performance. The following data types can be received: • Key ON/OFF • Control Change (performance data; only those listed below) #1 #7 #11 #64 #66 #67 #123 Modulation Volume Expression Sustain Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Soft Pedal All notes off #0 #32 #6 #96 #97 #100 #101 BANK Select MSB* BANK Select LSB* Data Entry MSB (for RPN Pitch Bend Range) Data Increment (for RPN Pitch Bend Range) Data Decrement (for RPN Pitch Bend Range) RPN LSB (Pitch Bend Range only) RPN MSB (Pitch Bend Range only) REMOTE KBD • Settings: OFF (not received), 1 — 16 (receive channel) • Basic setting: OFF MIDI data received by the remote keyboard function cannot be output via the MIDI [OUT] terminal. • Program Change (voice change data)* • Pitch Bend 149 Note: Items marked with an asterisk are used to change the main voice. CVP-201 151 Backup ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13 ■ Backup ............................................................................................................................ This function allows you to set the backup of various parameter groups on or off. When set to on, the corresponding settings will not be reset to the basic settings (default settings) when power is turned off. Press the ▼ or ▲ button or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the desired group, then use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected group to backup on/off. The (“*”) mark at the beginning of the group name indicates that the backup setting of the group is turned on. The settings of groups whose backup settings are set to off will return to the basic settings (default settings) when the power is turned off. Backup functions • Settings: ON, OFF • Basic settings: ON (REGISTRATION) OFF (all other groups) Backup is used for the following groups on the Clavinova. Group Description VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings REVERB/EFFECT Reverb, chorus, and effect settings TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning PEDAL Pedal function settings ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings Permanent Settings The following settings are always backed up: • Help language • Song volume • Backup ON/OFF Refer to page 11 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific parameters in each group. Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are maintained, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week. CVP-201 150 152 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Backup FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14 ■ Recall ................................................................................................................................ This function can be used to recall the initial factory settings (basic settings) for a group of parameters, or for all parameters at once. Press the ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the group you want to recall, then press the START button. ➔ An “Are you sure?” message will be displayed. Press the YES button to recall, or NO to cancel. The following parameter groups of the Clavinova can be recalled. Group Description VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings REVERB/EFFECT Reverb, chorus, and effect settings TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning PEDAL Pedal function settings ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings ALL All of the above settings 151 Refer to page 11 in the Reference Booklet for a list of the specific parameters in each group. Permanent Settings The factory settings of the following parameters are not recalled: • Help language • Song volume • Backup ON/OFF However, these and all other settings can be reset to the initial factory values by turning the power on while holding down the rightmost key on the keyboard (C7). When this is done, the “Back up data erased and replaced by factory data” message appears to indicate that all backed up data has been erased and the factory settings have been recalled. After this message is displayed for a few seconds, the main display will appear. CVP-201 153 Utility ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15 The Micro Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each key of the keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to a disk and loaded whenever necessary. The currently loaded custom tuning can be turned on or off at any time by using the leftmost LCD button in this display. ■ Micro Tuning Setup ............................................................................................ Z Select a key. Press the key to be tuned. ➔ The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key will appear in the display. X Set the tuning. Press the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] to tune the pitch of the selected key. If you set the parameter at the leftmost LCD button to ON, you can play the key being tuned in order to check the sound during this operation. The normal tuning of ±0 cents for the selected key can be instantly recalled by simultaneously pressing both the TUNE ▼ and ▲ buttons. TUNE • Range: –100 cent — +100 cent –1 — +1 semitone • Basic Value: 0 cent (all keys) C Repeat steps 1 and 2. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the required keys have been tuned. ■ Micro Tuning Files ............................................................................................... The custom tuning can be named and saved to disk as a tuning file. Tuning files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they are no longer needed. Z Insert a disk in the disk drive. Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or rename a tuning file, the inserted disk should contain the file in question. CVP-201 152 154 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Utility X Select the desired file operation. Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME. C Press the START button. After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the selected file operation appears. The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140 through 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file operation. LOAD See page 140. SAVE See page 140. DELETE See page 141. NAME See page 141. FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16 This feature allows you to select from various tuning (temperament) configurations, when selecting PRESET in this display. By selecting USER, you can create your own user scale, in which the tuning you set for a single octave takes effect for the entire keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to disk for future recall. The Scale Tuning function does not affect the pitch of song data played back by the Clavinova. ■ Preset Scale .............................................................................................................. This function lets you select from various pre-programmed tunings or temperaments. Until equal temperament — the most commonly used tuning at present — was accepted, various tunings have been created over the years for use with the particular music and instruments of the era. This feature lets you play in historically authentic tunings, and get a better feeling for the music of the corresponding eras. The Clavinova contains the following seven temperaments: 153 • EQUAL • PURE(MAJOR) • PURE(MINOR) • MEANTONE • PYTHAGOREAN • WERCKMEISTER • KIRNBERGER CVP-201 155 Utility ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Z Select PRESET with the leftmost LCD button. ➔ The following display appears: X Select a scale. Press the SCALE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the parameter, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the temperament type. When selecting temperaments other than equal (EQUAL) temperament, the central key (reference pitch for the temperament) must be set. This allows you to produce the proper temperament in the desired key. C Select the central key. Press the KEY button to highlight the parameter, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the central key. KEY • Settings: C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B • Basic setting: C ■ User Scale Setup ................................................................................................. This function allows you to individually tune each key within an octave. The setting made for one key is automatically assigned to the same key in all other octaves. Z Select USER with the leftmost LCD button. ➔ The following display appears: X Press the key to be tuned. ➔ The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key appears. C Set the tuning. Set the pitch by pressing the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons, or by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can play the key being tuned to check the sound during this operation. The default tuning of ±0 cents can be instantly recalled for the selected key by simultaneously pressing the TUNE ▲ and ▼ buttons. TUNE • Range: -64 cent — +63 cent • Basic Value: 0 (all keys) V Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the required keys have been tuned. CVP-201 154 156 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Utility ■ User Scale Files ................................................................................................... The custom scale can be named and saved to disk as a user scale file. User scale files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they are no longer needed. Z Insert a disk in the disk drive. Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or rename a user scale file, the inserted disk should contain the file in question. X Select the desired file operation. Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME. C Press the START button. 155 After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the selected file operation appears. The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140 through 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file operation. LOAD See page 140. SAVE See page 140. DELETE See page 141. NAME See page 141. CVP-201 157 CHAPTER 9: Connections Audio Connections ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The Clavinova is equipped with jacks that let you connect a variety of audio devices. You can connect headphones, a stereo system, or PA equipment for audio output, as well as input from a tone generator or other instrument. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting audio equipment, as failing to do so can result in damage to speakers and other problems. PHONES Headphones To use headphones, connect them to one of the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/ 4" phone jacks) located below the left end of the keyboard. The Clavinova’s built-in speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones are connected. Two people can enjoy listening to the Clavinova together by connecting two pairs of headphones to the two jacks. Recommended Headphones: Yamaha HPE-160 headphones Audio Input and Output You can connect the Clavinova to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks, which are located at the left end of the unit on the rear panel. ■ AUX IN Jacks ........................................................................................................... AUX IN R L/L+R Tone Generator CVP-201 CAUTION Never connect the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks, either directly or via external audio equipment. Such connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage the Clavinova. The volume of the audio signal input at the AUX IN jacks is affected by the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. 156 158 The sounds of other instruments or tone generator modules can be output through the speaker system of the Clavinova by connecting audio cables to the AUX IN jacks as shown here. Use the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack for monophonic input. For stereo input, connect the left channel output to the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack, and the right channel output to the AUX IN [R] jack. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Audio Connections ■ AUX OUT Jacks .................................................................................................... AUX OUT R L/L+R 157 Stereo System By connecting audio cables to the AUX OUT jacks as shown here, you can output the sound of the Clavinova to a stereo system, amplifier, mixing console, or recording equipment. Since the AUX OUT jacks provide output at a fixed level, you will need to use the controls on the connected equipment to adjust the overall volume of the sound from the Clavinova. Use the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack for monophonic output. For stereo output, connect the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack to the left channel input, and the AUX OUT [R] jack to the right channel input. CVP-201 159 Data Connections ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ You can use the MIDI terminals to connect your Clavinova to a wide range of MIDI devices, including personal computers, sequencers, tone generators, and so on. In addition, the Clavinova features a [TO HOST] connector that lets you connect it directly to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/ AT, or other compatible personal computer without the use of a special MIDI interface. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting computers or MIDI equipment, as failing to do so can result in damage to equipment. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Home Page: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ Connecting MIDI Equipment Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI terminals on the Clavinova to other MIDI devices. The Clavinova’s MIDI terminals are located at the left of the unit on the rear panel. Tone generators or other devices to be controlled by the Clavinova can be connected to the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Devices that will control the Clavinova should be connected to the MIDI [IN] terminal. If you have a personal computer or sequencer that will control the Clavinova, you may want to connect it to both the [IN] and [OUT] terminals to allow two-way communication. In this case, any other instruments to be controlled by the same device can be connected to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal. When you use the MIDI termiMIDI nals, set the [HOST SELECT] HOST SELECT PC-1 PC-2 switch to the MIDI position. The MIDI Mac MIDI terminals will not transmit or receive data if this switch is set to any other position. You can set the Clavinova’s MIDI parameters using pages 9 MIDI Sequencer Tone Generator through 12 of the FUNCTION display (see page 147 through 150). IN OUT [TO HOST] or MIDI? • If you simply want to connect your Clavinova to a personal computer, it may be more convenient to use the [TO HOST] terminal, as your computer won’t need a special MIDI interface to make that connection. • The MIDI terminals are particularly convenient when you want the Clavinova to function as part of a more extensive MIDI setup. THRU Connecting to a Host Computer You can connect the Clavinova to an Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/AT, or compatible personal computer using the [TO HOST] connector, which is located at the left of the unit on the rear panel. If you do, be sure to set the adjacent [HOST SELECT] switch to the appropriate setting for your computer model. CVP-201 158 160 • Turn off both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting the cable. • When the Clavinova is connected to a host computer, turn on the computer first, then the Clavinova. • Disconnect the cable when not using the [TO HOST] terminal. If it is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly. ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Data Connections ■ Connecting to an Apple Macintosh or Compatible Computer ................................................................................................................................................ Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the modem or printer port on your Macintosh (whichever port your MIDI software is using for MIDI data communication) using a standard Macintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable. Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the “Mac” position. You may also have to make other MIDI interface settings on the computer side, depending on the type of software you use (refer to your software owner’s manual). In any case, the clock speed should be set to 1 MHz. HOST SELECT PC-2 MIDI TO HOST ● “Mac” Cable Connections PC-1 Mac Set to the “Mac” position. MINI DIN 8-PIN Apple Macintosh compatible computer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 (HSK i) 1 (HSK 0) 5 (RxD-) 4 GND 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP i) 6 (TxD+) MINI DIN 8-PIN • 8-pin system peripheral cable • Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps ■ Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ................................ Connect the [TO HOST] connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port on your IBM computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cross cable. Set the [HOST SELECT] switch to the “PC-2” position. Refer to your software owner’s manual for information on any settings you might have to make on the computer side. HOST SELECT PC-2 MIDI TO HOST If your system doesn’t work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual: if it requires a 31,250 bps data transfer rate, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “PC-1.” ● “PC-2” Cable Connections PC-1 Mac Set to the “PC-2” position. MINI DIN 8-PIN IBM-PC/AT compatible computer 1 2 3 4 8 5 8 (CTS) 7 (RST) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) D-SUB 9-PIN 3 (TxD) • 8-pin mini DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cable • Data transfer rate: 38,400 bps ● Connector Pin Numbers MINI DIN 8-PIN 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 ● Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). You can download this driver from the following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com D-SUB 9-PIN 5 4 3 2 1 159 9 8 7 6 CVP-201 161 APPENDICES Effect Type Lists ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ The tables in this appendix contain descriptions of the various reverb, chorus, and effect types that are available for use on the CVP-201. Reverb Type List Type Description HALL1 HALL2 Concert hall reverb effects HALL3 HALL4 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 Small room reverb effects ROOM4 STAGE1 STAGE2 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument PLATE1 PLATE2 Simulated steel plate reverb effects Chorus Type List Type Description CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness to the sound CHORUS4 CHORUS5 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking off and landing FLANGER4 CVP-201 160 162 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Effect Type Lists Effect Type List Type Description HALL1 HALL2 HALL3 Concert hall reverb effects HALL4 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 Small room reverb effects ROOM4 STAGE1 STAGE2 PLATE1 PLATE2 EARLY REF1 EARLY REF2 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument Simulated steel plate reverb effects Early reflection components of the reverb effect GATE REVERB Simulation of a gated reverb REVERSE GATE Simulation of a gated reverb played back in reverse CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness to the sound CHORUS4 CHORUS5 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking off and landing FLANGER4 SYMPHONIC Multi-stage versions of the modulation provided by a celeste-type effect PHASER Modulation effect created by cyclical phase shifting ROTARY SP1 ROTARY SP2 ROTARY SP3 Modulation effects that simulate rotary speakers ROTARY SP4 ROTARY SP5 TREMOLO1 161 TREMOLO2 Cyclical volume modulation effects GTR TREMOLO Tremolo effect that is suitable for guitar sounds AUTO PAN Effects that cyclically move the sound from right to left and front to back CVP-201 163 Effect Type Lists ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Effect Type List Cyclical wah effects; useful for electric guitar sounds, etc. DELAY LCR Three delay sounds: L (left), R (right), and C (center) DELAY LR L and R delays with two feedback delays ECHO L and R delays with independent feedback for L and R CROSS DELAY Two delays (L and R) with crossed feedback DIST HARD DIST SOFT Effects that add distortion with an edge to the sound; useful for electric guitar sounds, etc. EQ DISCO Disco-oriented equalizer effect EQ TEL Equalizer effect that simulates sound heard over the phone CVP-201 162 164 AUTO WAH Messages ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ● General (Panel Operation) This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as song data conversion) that cannot be performed during recording or playback. ➾ Stop song recording or playback, or exit the Song Record or Song Play mode, then perform the operation again. This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as selection of a style or Music Database setup) that cannot be performed during playback. ➾ Stop song playback, or exit the Song Play mode, then perform the operation again. This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as copying or deletion of song data) that cannot be performed in the Song Record mode. ➾ Stop recording, or exit the Song Record mode, then perform the operation again. A button that does not have a function in the current mode has been pressed. ● General (Direct Access) This prompt appears when you press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button (page 21). ➾ Press the panel button that corresponds to the settings you want to display. (Be sure to press the second button while this message is showing.) This message appears if you press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by a panel button that does not correspond to a Direct Access display. (See page 21.) ➾ Press [DIRECT ACCESS] again, then press a panel button that corresponds to a Direct Access display. ● General (Disk-related) This prompt appears when there is no disk in the disk drive. ➾ Put the proper disk in the drive and attempt the operation again. This prompt appears when you attempt to rename or convert a song that doesn’t contain any data. ➾ Select a song that contains data, or insert a disk with song data into the floppy disk drive. This message appears when you attempt to load, rename, or delete a file, and no file of the specified type can be found on the disk in the disk drive. ➾ Create a file or insert a disk with a proper file. This message appears if you try to save a custom style to disk (page 82), but have selected a memory number that doesn’t contain any style data. ➾ Create a custom style, or select a memory number that contains custom style data. This message appears when a new or improperly formatted disk has been inserted into the disk drive. (See page 111.) ➾ Press OK if you want to format the disk. Press CANCEL if you want to abort the formatting process. This message appears when you attempt to record or perform other file operations using a disk whose write-protect tab is in the “protect” position. 163 ➾ Set the write-protect tab to the “write-enable” position (page 112), then try the operation again. If the operation still cannot be performed, the disk itself has internal write protection, making it impossible to perform recording or file operations on the disk. CVP-201 165 Messages ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ This message appears when you attempt to record over parts or perform other operations on song files that are incompatible or do not allow such operations. Depending on the song file type, operations such as additional recording, copying, deleting, etc. may not be possible using the CVP-201. An error occurred while writing to (as in recording or storing files) or reading from the disk. ➾ Try the operation again after pressing the OK button. If the error occurs a second time, the disk or the disk drive unit may be faulty. If you suspect the drive to be at fault, refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer. This appears for a few seconds when a time-consuming operation such as Format, Song Copy, etc., is finished. This message is displayed while data is being transferred between the Clavinova and the disk. ➾ The message disappears automatically when the operation is finished. When operations such as Song Delete or Format are selected, this prompts you to confirm whether you want to go ahead with the operation or not. ➾ Press YES to execute the operation. Press NO to return to the previous display. The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data. ➾ Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary data in the disk (page 144), or use a disk that has more available space. If this message appears during song recording, recording will stop and any data recorded up to that point will be saved automatically. This message appears when you try to create more files than the disk is capable of storing. You can record up to 60 song files on a 2DD or 2HD disk. A 2DD disk can hold about 107 files (of various types), and a 2HD disk can hold up to about 219 files. ➾ Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary files from the disk (page 144), or use a disk that has more available space. A file with the same name already exists. ➾ Press the OK button if you wish to overwrite the original file with new data, or press CANCEL to abort the operation. This message appears when you try to execute other operations while reading data from the disk or saving data. ➾ Wait until the data read/write operation is completed, then perform the operation again. This message appears when you attempt to record over or edit the data of commercially available software or data recorded on instruments other than the CVP-109/107/105/700/ 103/201 or the CVP-94/92/98/96/600. ➾ Press YES to convert the data for recording or editing on the CVP-109/107/105/ 700/103/201. Press NO if you don’t want to convert the data. It may not be possible to record to tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 of songs converted in this manner. ● General (Memory-related) This message appears when the Clavinova’s memory has become full while recording a song in the internal memory (page 133). If this happens, recording will stop and any data recorded up to that point will be saved automatically. This message is also displayed if the Clavinova’s memory becomes full when recording data in a custom style (see page 84). This message appears while the Clavinova is storing the data of a song recorded to the internal memory after it has been edited using the Track Edit or Initial Edit functions. ➾ Complete the data write operation, then perform the other operation. CVP-201 164 166 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Messages This message appears when you execute an operation, such as playback of disk software, that will cause the Clavinova to delete data recorded to the internal memory. ➾ Press YES to delete the data recorded to the internal memory, then perform the desired operation. Press the NO button if you want to keep the data. This message appears if you try to select one of the following functions while editing song data that has been recorded to the internal memory: Chord Sequence (page 121), Setup Memory (126), or Song Name (page 127). ➾ Use the Song Copy function (page 142) to copy the song to a disk, delete the CVP MEMORY song (page 144), then perform the desired operation using the data on the disk. ● Custom Style Mode This message appears for a few seconds when the Custom Style mode is engaged. (See page 74.) This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the time signature of the custom style. (See page 75.) This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the number of measures in a section of the custom style. (See page 75.) This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to perform an operation that can only be performed after the part has been deleted. (See page 76.) This confirmation prompt appears when you store a custom style (page 79). It also appears if you try to change styles before you’ve stored the custom style (page 85). ➾ Select OK to store the custom style. Press CANCEL to return to the previous display without storing data. This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to exit the Custom Style mode before storing the custom style. (See page 85.) ➾ Select YES to store the custom style. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CANCEL to return to the previous display. This message appears when the previous version of the custom style cannot be recalled because the time signature has been changed. (See page 80.) If you attempt to save a custom style to disk before storing it in memory, this message prompts you to store the style before proceeding. (See page 83.) This message appears if there is not enough internal memory capacity available to store the custom style. (See page 84.) This message appears when DELETE is selected in the display shown above. ➾ Select the style to be deleted and press the OK button. Press CANCEL if you do not want to delete the style. This message appears if the style selected for deletion in the display shown above is the source style on which the style currently being edited was based. 165 ➾ Press OK to return to the preceding display, and select a different style for deletion. CVP-201 167 Messages ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ● Style File Load This message appears if you attempt to load a Style file when the memory capacity is not sufficient to hold the specified file. (See page 87.) Some Style files are too large to be handled by the LISTEN function. (See page 87.) ➾ Load the Style file, then use the normal playback methods to hear the style in question. ● Chord Sequence This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Chord Sequence function while recording. ➾ Press YES to store the recorded data. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CANCEL to return to the Chord Sequence function without storing. This message appears during Chord Sequence recording when you attempt to enter an accompaniment style or section change at a position other than the beginning of a measure. ➾ Record the style or section change in question at the beginning of the measure. (See page 122.) ● Other Record Edit This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Initial Edit function without writing the data to disk. ➾ Press YES to save the edited data. Press NO to exit without saving. Press CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit display without saving. This confirmation prompt appears when you execute the Setup Memory function (page 126) to save the current panel settings with the song being edited in Song Record mode. ➾ Select YES to save the panel settings. Press CANCEL to return to the RECORD EDIT 2 display without saving. ● Song Copy & Disk Copy This message appears before you start a Song Copy or Disk Copy operation to inform you of the number of times the disks must be exchanged. (See page 143.) This message prompts you to insert the destination disk when copying data from one disk to another. (See page 143.) This message appears when you try to copy data from a 2DD disk to a 2HD disk — or vice versa — using the Disk Copy function (page 142). ➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then perform the operation again from the beginning. Make sure the destination disk you insert is the same type (2DD or 2HD) as the source disk being copied. This message appears if you insert the source disk when prompted to insert the destination disk while using the Disk Copy function (page 143) to copy data from one disk to another. ➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful not to confuse the source and destination disks. CVP-201 166 168 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Messages When you first insert the destination disk while copying a song from one disk to another disk, this message prompts you to specify the song number to which the song is to be copied. (See page 143.) This message prompts you to insert the source disk when copying data from one disk to another. (See page 143.) This message is displayed if you insert a disk other than the specified disk (source or destination) when prompted to exchange disks while using the Disk Copy function (page 143) to copy data from one disk to another. ➾ Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful to insert the correct disk as specified. This message indicates that you have selected the same song number as both the source and the destination when copying a song within a disk. (See sidebar, page 143.) ➾ Change the destination song number. ● Song Data Conversion This message appears if you attempt to convert song data that has been saved on a 2HD disk. (See page 145.) ➾ Press OK and copy the song data to be converted to a 2DD disk, then perform the data conversion using the 2DD disk. Following conversion of the song data, this message displays the song number to which the data was saved. ● Hardware-related This message appears when the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is not properly connected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active. ➾ Turn off both the Clavinova and the host computer. Check the cable connection and the position of the HOST SELECT switch (page 160), then turn on the computer first, followed by the Clavinova. 167 The Clavinova will retain data protected by the Backup function (page 152) as long as it is used regularly. If the instrument is not turned on for a week or longer, however, the data may be lost. This message appears when the Clavinova is turned on after data has been lost. It also appears when you recall all factory data (page 153.) CVP-201 169 Troubleshooting Problem Cause Solution The Clavinova does not turn on. The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal, and is no cause for concern. Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s speakers. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness may be affected by the surrounding temperature. Adjust the contrast of the display using the [CONTRAST] control. (See page 11.) The keyboard volume is low compared to that of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback. Either the overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard part is set too low. Increase the overall keyboard level in the main display (page 23), or use the VOLUME function in the appropriate KEYBOARD display (pages 32, 34, or 37) to raise the volume of the keyboard part in question. The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback is low compared to that of the keyboard. The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] is set too low. Raise the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] level. The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song tracks is set too low. Raise the part or track level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display (page 65 or 100). The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low. Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level. Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. The Local Control function is turned off. Turn the Local Control function on. (See page 147.) The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the pedal cord plug into the proper jack. (See page 34 in the Reference booklet.) Style or song playback does not start. The MIDI Sync function is set to EXT. Set the MIDI Sync function to INT. (See page 148.) When the keyboard is played, not all of the notes sound. The Clavinova’s total simultaneous polyphonic capacity (maximum number of notes) has been exceeded. Since the configuration of the tone generation system is such that later notes have priority, previous notes may occasionally be cut off. (See “Specifications” in the Reference Booklet for details about the simultaneous polyphonic capacity.) CVP-201 168 170 ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Troubleshooting 169 Problem Cause Solution The Auto Accompaniment does not play back. The Auto Accompaniment is not turned on. Press the [ACMP ON] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. The desired chord is not recognized or output by the Auto Accompaniment. The keys are not being played correctly. Refer to the Fingering Chart (page 12 of the Reference Booklet). The keys are not being played according to the selected accompaniment mode. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode. (See page 59.) The maximum of 60 songs cannot be recorded. The memory capacity is full because the playing time of one or more songs is long, or many functions were used. Delete unnecessary songs (page 144) or record to a new disk. Some tracks do not play back when playing back data. Playback of the track(s) is turned off. Turn on playback for the tracks that you want to hear. (See pages 97 and 100.) CVP-201 171 MIDI and Data Compatibility ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ■ MIDI ● Sequence Format MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a worldwide standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. • Depending on the MIDI device, the transmittable/receivable data differs, and only data which is commonly recognized among the connected MIDI devices can be transmitted or received. You can check whether your instrument supports certain data types by referring to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the owner’s manual for that instrument. The MIDI Implementation Chart for the CVP-201 is found on page 30 in the Reference Booklet. MIDI Terminals Data received via the MIDI IN terminal is retransmitted unchanged through this terminal. This terminal transmits the MIDI data. This terminal receives the MIDI data. THRU OUT IN MIDI MIDI Cable Connect MIDI devices with special MIDI cables. • MIDI settings can be made in the MIDI pages of the Function mode display. (See pages 147 through 150.) • Further information on MIDI and its applications is available in various music books and magazines. ■ Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CVP-201, and whether or not the CVP-201 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. ● Basic Check Points The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below. • Disk Format • Sequence format • Voice allocation format ● Disk format Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used. This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • CVP-201 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the CVP-201, a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to 1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44 MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. CVP-201 [Common Sequence Formats] SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. • Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CVP-201 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17 chunks). • Song data recorded on the CVP-201 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0. ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. • The CVP-201 is compatible with ESEQ. ● Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” • Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. [Main Voice Allocation Formats] GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. • The CVP-201 is compatible with GM System Level 1. XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. • The CVP-201 is compatible with XG. • Song data recorded on the CVP-201 using voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible. DOC This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software. • The CVP-201 is compatible with DOC. Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. 170 172 The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” • Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. Index ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ A F M Accompaniment Mode .................... 57, 59-61 accompaniment styles ................ see “styles” All Setup files .................................... 139-141 audio connections ............................. 158-159 Auto Accompaniment ............................ 57-72 Fade In ....................................................... 55 Fade Out .................................................... 56 fast forward .............................................. 103 file icons ..................................................... 94 fill-in patterns ......................................... 51-52 filter, MIDI Filter ................................. 148-150 fingering (chords) ...................... 60-61, 62-64 Fixed Velocity ........................................... 137 floppy disks .................................................. 9 formatting, Disk ................................ 111, 146 free tempo .................................................. 96 Function ............................................ 134-135 function, resetting .................................. 19-20 functions in normal rectangles .............. 20-21 functions in rounded rectangles ................. 16 main display ............................................... 16 main voice ................................. 29-32, 33, 36 memory, recording to ............................... 133 menu display .............................................. 18 messages .......................................... 165-169 messages, Custom Style ...................... 84-85 metronome ............................................ 25-26 Micro Tuning ..................................... 154-155 MIDI equipment ........................................ 160 MIDI Filter ......................................... 148-149 MIDI functions ................................... 147-151 MIDI terminals .......................................... 160 MIDI Transpose ....................................... 150 Mixer, Auto Accompaniment ................. 65-66 Mixer, Song ....................................... 100-101 multi-track recording ......................... 115-118 Music Database .................................... 67-68 music stand ................................................ 10 B Backup ..................................................... 152 basic settings ............................................. 19 beat ................................................. 26, 74-75 C channels, MIDI .......................... 147, 150-151 Chord Assistance .................................. 62-64 chord indication ..................................... 60-61 Chord Sequence ............................... 121-125 chorus ................................................... 44-45 chorus, Custom Style ............................ 81-82 chorus, Song ..................................... 100-101 Chorus Type List ...................................... 162 computer ........................................... 160-161 contrast ...................................................... 11 controls ................................................. 12-13 convert, song data ................................... 145 Custom Style ......................................... 73-88 CVP MEMORY (song) ............................. 133 D damper pedal ..................................... 40, 138 data dial ..................................................... 17 deleting, Chord Sequence ....................... 124 deleting, data files .................................... 141 deleting, Style Files .................................... 83 deleting, tracks ......................................... 129 Demo Play ............................................ 14-15 detune ........................................................ 35 Direct Access ............................................. 22 Disk Copy .......................................... 142-143 disk drive ...................................................... 9 Disk Format ...................................... 111, 146 Disk functions .................................... 139-146 display pages ............................................. 19 Dual ....................................................... 33-35 E 171 Easy Play ......................................... 105, 107 Effect Type List ................................. 163-164 effects ................................................... 46-48 effects, Song ..................................... 100-101 end mark .......................................... 124, 125 ending pattern ....................................... 55-56 G Glide Range ............................................. 138 Guide .......................................... 15, 105-109 guide lamps .............................................. 109 Guide Mode ............................................. 108 H Harmony ............................................... 69-71 headphones ....................................... 11, 158 Help ....................................................... 27-28 host computer ................................... 160-161 highlighted items ........................................ 16 N naming, Custom Style ........................... 78-79 naming, data files ..................................... 141 naming, Song ........................................... 127 Next Note ......................................... 105, 107 O octave ............................................ 32, 34, 38 One Touch Setting ..................................... 72 I P Initial Edit .......................................... 130-132 introduction pattern .................................... 54 pages, display ............................................ 19 pan 32, 35, 38 pan, Custom Style ................................. 81-82 pan, Song .......................................... 100-101 panel controls ........................................ 12-13 part, recording ....................................... 76-78 part, track assignment ........................... 98-99 Part Cancel ........................................... 97-98 part levels .................................. 65-66, 81-82 pause ....................................................... 103 Pedal functions ........................................ 138 pedals .................................................. 38, 40 Pianist styles ........................................ 49, 58 Piano Roll ................................. 106, 107, 109 playback, Auto Accompaniment ...... 58, 60-61 playback, Custom Style ............................. 84 Playback, demo songs .......................... 14-15 playback, Song ................................... 93-104 playback, styles ..................................... 51-56 playback, style files .................................... 88 power ......................................................... 11 practicing ........................................... 105-107 preset scale ....................................... 155-156 Punch-in/out Recording .................... 118-120 K key cover .................................................... 10 Key Touch ................................................ 137 keyboard guide lamps .............................. 109 keyboard percussion .................................. 31 L LCD, changing a value ............................... 17 LCD, selecting a function ........................... 16 Left Pedal ................................................. 138 left voice ................................................ 36-39 loading, data files ..................................... 140 loading, style files .................................. 86-88 Local Control ............................................ 147 lyrics ................................................... 15, 109 CVP-201 173 Index ○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ Q quantizing .................................... 78, 129-130 Quick Recording ............................... 112-115 R Recall ....................................................... 153 Recall Section ............................................ 80 recalling, registration ............................. 90-91 Receive Filter .................................... 149-150 Record Edit functions ........................ 126-132 recording, Chord Sequence .............. 121-125 recording, Custom Style ........................ 73-80 recording, Song ................................. 110-120 recording, without a disk .......................... 133 Registration ........................................... 89-92 Registration file ................................. 139-141 Registration Freeze ............................... 91-92 Remote Keyboard .................................... 151 Repeat .............................................. 101-103 Reverb .................................................. 41-43 reverb, Custom Style ............................ 81-82 reverb, Song ..................................... 100-101 Reverb Type List ...................................... 162 rewind ...................................................... 103 Rhythm On/Off ......................................... 125 S saving, Custom Style ............................ 82-83 saving, data files ............................... 140-141 saving, Initial Edit ..................................... 132 Scale Tuning ..................................... 155-157 second voice ......................................... 33-35 section ............................................. 74-75, 80 Send Channel ........................... 147, 150-151 Setup files ......................................... 139-141 Setup Memory ................................... 126-127 setup procedure ......................................... 10 soft pedal ........................................... 40, 138 software ................................................... 104 song, Chord Sequence ..................... 121-125 Song Copy ........................................ 142-143 Song Data Transform ............................... 145 Song Delete ............................................. 144 Song Name .............................................. 127 Song Play ............................................ 93-104 Song Record ..................................... 110-120 Song Transmission .................................. 151 sostenuto pedal .......................................... 40 Sound Repeat .......................... 106, 107, 109 Split ....................................................... 36-39 Split Point ....................................... 36, 39, 64 stereo position ................................. see “pan” storing, Custom Style ............................ 79-80 storing, Registration .............................. 89-90 CVP-201 T Tap Start .................................................... 53 tempo ........................................... 25, 96, 100 terminals and jacks ............................... 12-13 time signature ................................. 26, 74-75 Track Delete ............................................. 129 Track Edit .......................................... 128-130 Track Mix ................................................. 128 Track Recording ................................ 115-118 Track Quantize .................................. 129-130 tracks, adding ........................................... 118 tracks, song structure ............................... 110 Transform ................................................. 145 Transpose ........................................ 136, 150 troubleshooting ................................. 170-171 Tune ................................................. 136, 156 U user scale .......................................... 156-157 V velocity ..................................................... 137 Voice Setting ............................................ 137 voices, selecting ........................ 29-30, 76, 99 volume .................................................. 23-24 volume, metromome .................................. 26 volume, part .............................. 65-66, 81-82 volume, song .............................................. 99 volume, track ..................................... 100-101 volume, voices ............................... 32, 34, 37 172 174 Style Clear ................................................. 80 style file ................................................. 86-88 styles, custom ....................................... 73-88 styles, playback ..................................... 51-56 styles, selecting ..................................... 49-50 Synchronization (MIDI) ............................ 148 Synchronized Start ..................................... 53 Synchronized Stop ..................................... 62 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) 173 • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 174 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America, Keyboard Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 PHILIPPINES DENMARK OTHER COUNTRIES HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [CL] 21 Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2001 Yamaha Corporation V780550 1??PO???.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia